+ All Categories
Home > Documents > Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn ·...

Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn ·...

Date post: 01-Sep-2019
Category:
Upload: others
View: 8 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
211
高等教育出版社 i “高职高专英语专业立体化系列教材”《英语》一套专门为我国高等职业教育英语专业编写的 普通高等教育“十一五”国家级规划教材,自2007年出版以来,以其明确的定位,充分反映了我国 高等职业教育英语专业学生学习英语的学习规律和要求,体现我国英语教学研究的新成果、新思想 和新理念,因此获得了广泛的好评。教材的设计充分考虑了高等职业教育英语专业的课程设置、课 时、教学要求与高等职业教育英语专业人材培养的要求与目标,力图处理好打好英语语言基础与培 养英语语言应用能力的关系,强调英语语言基本技能的训练与培养实际使用英语从事涉外交际活动 的语言应用能力并重。 为了更好地体现新时期对高等职业教育英语专业课程教学和人材培养要求,编者在广泛征求教 材使用反馈意见的基础上,结合教学实际情况,对本教材第一版进行了修订完善。 《英语综合教程》为这套立体化系列教材的主干教材之一,包括基础阶段3册和专业阶段1册。 本次修订主要是调整第一、二册单元数量,削减部分练习量,调整部分练习项目,使教材的安排更 为合理。 本书是配合《英语(高职高专英语专业)(第二版)综合教程》第一册编写的教师用书。 《英语(高职高专英语专业)(第二版)综合教程》总主编为上海交通大学陈永捷教授。 《英语(高职高专英语专业)(第二版)教师参考书1》由上海交通大学常辉教授和周越美副教 授担任主编,副主编为为杨建国、江萍。 《英语(高职高专英语专业)(第二版)教师参考书1》的编者为:陈永捷、吴颉、周越美、余 继英、李素枝、老青、刘圣明、蔡红、陈丽和曾涟英等。 本教材对内容安排和练习形式都作了不少新的尝试,编者真诚地希望使用本教材的学生和教师 对教材的不足之处提出意见,以便我们今后加以完善。 2016年3月 前言.indd 1 16/3/24 上午9:14
Transcript
Page 1: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

i

前 言

“高职高专英语专业立体化系列教材”《英语》一套专门为我国高等职业教育英语专业编写的

普通高等教育“十一五”国家级规划教材,自2007年出版以来,以其明确的定位,充分反映了我国

高等职业教育英语专业学生学习英语的学习规律和要求,体现我国英语教学研究的新成果、新思想

和新理念,因此获得了广泛的好评。教材的设计充分考虑了高等职业教育英语专业的课程设置、课

时、教学要求与高等职业教育英语专业人材培养的要求与目标,力图处理好打好英语语言基础与培

养英语语言应用能力的关系,强调英语语言基本技能的训练与培养实际使用英语从事涉外交际活动

的语言应用能力并重。

为了更好地体现新时期对高等职业教育英语专业课程教学和人材培养要求,编者在广泛征求教

材使用反馈意见的基础上,结合教学实际情况,对本教材第一版进行了修订完善。

《英语综合教程》为这套立体化系列教材的主干教材之一,包括基础阶段3册和专业阶段1册。

本次修订主要是调整第一、二册单元数量,削减部分练习量,调整部分练习项目,使教材的安排更

为合理。

本书是配合《英语(高职高专英语专业)(第二版)综合教程》第一册编写的教师用书。

《英语(高职高专英语专业)(第二版)综合教程》总主编为上海交通大学陈永捷教授。

《英语(高职高专英语专业)(第二版)教师参考书1》由上海交通大学常辉教授和周越美副教

授担任主编,副主编为为杨建国、江萍。

《英语(高职高专英语专业)(第二版)教师参考书1》的编者为:陈永捷、吴颉、周越美、余

继英、李素枝、老青、刘圣明、蔡红、陈丽和曾涟英等。

本教材对内容安排和练习形式都作了不少新的尝试,编者真诚地希望使用本教材的学生和教师

对教材的不足之处提出意见,以便我们今后加以完善。

编  者

2016年3月

前言.indd 1 16/3/24 上午9:14

Page 2: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

ii

教材使用说明

本书是为配合《英语(高职高专英语专业)(第二版)综合教程1》教学编写的教学参考书。为

了进一步帮助教师了解与掌握《英语(高职高专英语专业)(第二版)综合教程》各个环节的编写

意图,从而更好的使用教材,特作以下说明。

本教材的英语词汇起点为1 600个单词。第一册词汇释义绝大部分采用英汉双解释,从第二册、

第三册起逐步过渡到英语释义。我们在内容和练习形式安排上力图做到学与用的有机结合,在学习

的过程中使用英语,在遵循语言学习规律的基础上突出“实用”和“应用”,体现我国高等学校高

等职职业教育英语专业教学的特点。在练习编写中我们力图体现我国学者对中国英语学习者语料库

和口语语料库研究的成果,对中国学生英语学习的难点、常犯错误现象、“语块”使用等予以特别关

注。因此。我们有意识在《综合教程》中设计了较多的练习项目,目的是希望给教师更多的选择。

教师不必安排完成每项练习,可视学生的实际情况,让学生在课外有选择地完成部分练习。

《英语(高职高专英语专业)(第二版)综合教程1》共有8个单元,主题包括大学生活、音

乐、人生态度、人际交往、社区服务、工作、实现人生梦想和父母之情等,每个单元围绕一个主

题,由Text A和Text B两个部分组成。另配有,含幽默小故事、名言警句等内容。

在Text A前Before Reading练习,与课文主题有关,但并不涉及课文的具体内容,旨在为开展教

与学做一个铺垫,引导学生进入单元的主题。

Text A和Text B部分各包含一篇阅读文章和相应的练习。Text A部分包含阅读理解、口语实践、

词汇和结构、翻译、写作和听写练习。Text B部分包含阅读理解、阅读技能、词汇练习和综合技能

练习。

First Reading的练习是为了培养学生快速阅读的能力,While Reading练习帮助学生养成良好的

阅读习惯, Second Reading练习是进一步帮助学生加深对课文的理解,并对课文主要内容的小结。阅

读理解练习既可以在课堂中进行,也可以在课外进行,还可以让学生在小组活动中用一问一答的方

式进行。

Oral Practice旨在帮助学生用课文中所学到一些词语和句子口头表达或复述与Text A篇文章有关

的一些内容。

Vocabulary and Structure Practice旨在帮助学生掌握和正确使用课文中出现的重要词语和结构,

帮助学生掌握词语的搭配,提高学生“语块”意识和地道表达英语的意识。在这个部分中,我们安

排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学

会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

应用这些词语的能力。教师可以视学生的实际情况决定是否对这些练习作补充讲解。在这部分,我

们还安排了介词和副词的练习。对于中国学生,如何正确使用介词和副词一直是个难题,我们希望

学生通过该项练习能够正确熟练地掌握课文中出现的一些最基本的介词和副词的用法。这项练习也

可由教师安排,让学生在课外自己完成。这部分还设有词语搭配练习,这是本书的特色之一。它分

为两个部分,从辨认、选择到使用。此外,本部分还包括易混淆词语的练习,主要是帮助学生辨别

和正确使用一些容易混淆的词语。最后,我们又安排了两个Text A课文中重点的句型练习。学生可以

通过连词成句、改写等形式使用相关的句型。

Vocabulary Practice的练习、目的、形式和Vocabulary and Structure Practice大体相同。

Translation Practice部分包括英译汉练习和汉译英练习,希望学生通过英译汉练习能逐步掌握一

前言.indd 2 16/3/24 上午9:14

Page 3: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

iii

些最基本的英译汉技能。第一册重点为英译汉的词义选择、词义引申、词类转换、增词译和省略译

等技能。我们在《教师参考书》中对每单元的练习都作了重点讲解。另一项是汉译英练习,旨在复

习课文中一些基本句型和重要词语的表达方式。

Writing Practice部分分为一般写作与应用文写作。一般写作是指句子、段落和短文写作。第一

册中一般写作重点是写正确句子,包括句子与句子的衔接,以及写出正确的段落主题句。应用文写

作部分练习包括学习填写表格、名片、贺卡、邀请便函和回函和通知等。

Dictation部分为一篇与课文主题相关的短文,第一册主要要求学生听录音并填出文章中空缺的

一些单词或词组。

Reading Skills安排在Text B部分中,我们希望通过练习有意识地帮助学生培养和提高自己的阅读

技能。第一册的阅读技能练习的重点是理解英语段落主题思想并能够抓住段落的细节。我们在安排

这项练习时力求做到与写作练习的衔接,在写作技能中我们也安排了英语主题句的练习。两者角度

虽不同,但目的相同。这也是本书的特点之一。

Expanding Your Vocabulary旨在帮助学生扩大词汇量,我们在每个单元中安排了英语构词练习,

教师可视学生的实际情况在课上或课外进行。

本书为《英语(高职高专英语专业)(第二版)综合教程1》教学编写的教学参考书,和学生用

书一样也分为8个单元。在本书中我们为每个单元前编写了本单元的学习目标(Objectives),以便使

教师对本单元的教学重点一目了然。

我们建议教师可以根据自己学校的实际情况,每单元用一周半的教学时间完成。对语音的练习

可以分散在各单元进行,也可以集中练习。

编  者

2016年3月

前言.indd 3 16/3/24 上午9:14

Page 4: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

i

Unit 1 Coing to College ················································· 1

Unit 2 Music ································································· 27

Unit 3 Developing a Positive Attitude ······················· 53

Unit 4 Making a Good lmpression ······························ 81

Unit 5 Community and Society ································· 105

Unit 6 Working ··························································· 129

Unit 7 Realizing Our Dreams ····································· 153

Unit 8 Our Parents ····················································· 183

ContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContentsContents

目录.indd 1 16/3/23 上午9:47

Page 5: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Going to College

Unit

1

ObjectivesObjectivesObjectives

Text A Text B

Words

adjust, responsibility, handle, check,

account, clue, located, aspect,

confused, comfortable, cope, row

challenge, retire, instant, deliver,

embarrassed, tribute, lean, productive,

talent, opportunity, regret, conclude

Phrases and

Expressions

adjust to, on one’s own, have…

off, first of all, be around, open an

account, now that, find out, add to,

cope with, in a row, sleep in

take on, dream of, dress up, revel in,

live it up, give up, clear one’s throat,

live out, in tribute to, grow up

Collocation make + objective do + objective

Confusable Wordsconfused/confusing, even though/now that, especially/specially, find out/

fi nd

StructuresI had to go out and look for a bank where I could open an account.

Even though I’d been here before, I was a bit confused about where I was going.

Translation

Practice选择词义

Writing Practice Write Correct Sentences / Fill in an Application Form

Reading Skills Reading for the Main Idea (1): Topic Sentences

Expanding Your

Vocabulary

usual + ly → usually, friend + ly → friendly, easy + ly → easily, wonder

+ ful → wonderful, care + ful → careful, beauty + ful → beautiful

1

Unit 1-1.indd 1 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 6: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

2

Text A

College — A New Experience

I Introduction

1. Introductory Remarks

College is a place many young people are longing for. They like college life for

different reasons. In this passage, the author gives us her reasons why she likes college.

2. Introductory Questions

The students are expected to go over the text quickly. Then they are required to

make a True/False response to each of the following statements:

1. The author likes college just because she loves being on her own. (F)

T: Being on her own, talking with friendly people, and having Fridays off are some

things she likes about college.

2. Before the author entered college, her parents always seemed to be around her,

saying what she should do and what she shouldn’t. (T)

3. The author feels comfortable in the dorm because there are friendly people around

to talk with. (T)

4. It seems that the author is very busy with her studies at college. (T)

5. The author likes to get up early. (F)

T: She loves to sleep in.

6. When the author was at high school she was not able to sleep late in the morning. (T)

T: She had to attend classes on weekdays.

7. The author likes college so much that she almost forgets her family in New York. (F)

T: She can still get homesick.

II Outline

Para. 1

Brings up the main idea of the article: being on my own, talking with

friendly people, and having Fridays off — these are just some things I like

about college.

Para. 2 Living at college gives me a sense of responsibility of being on my own.

Para. 3 Friendly people

Para. 4 I love having Fridays off.

Para. 5 Conclusion

Text A

Unit 1-1.indd 2 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 7: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 1 Going to College

3

III Detailed Study of the Text

1. (line 1) I’m away from home, so I have many things to adjust to.

— Since I’ve left my home, there are many things for me to get used to.

adjust to: to get used to by changing behavior or ideas

e.g. My parents had trouble adjusting to living in an apartment.

It took us a while to adjust to the climate there.

adjust 1. to become more familiar with a new situation

e.g. The lifestyle is so much different — it takes a while to adjust.

2. to change something slightly, especially to make it more correct, effective, or

suitable

e.g. If the chair is too high you can adjust it to suit you.

As a teacher you have to adjust your methods to suit the needs of those slow

children.

2. (line 2) (be) on one’s own: (to be) alone; (be) independent

e.g. He can’t be left to work on his own.

We are expected to solve the problem on our own.

The old lady is now on her own in a small town.

3. (line 3) have (some time) off: to have a rest for a period of time; be away from work or

duty

e.g. I would love to have a year off.

You’d better have a few days off.

off: not at work; at home or on holiday

e.g. She was off sick last week.

He’s off at the moment — can I get him to ring you back?

4. (line 5) a sense of responsibility: the feeling of being responsible /behaving sensibly so

that you can be trusted to do the right thing

e.g. Parents need to encourage a sense of responsibility in their children.

She feels a strong sense of responsibility towards her employees.

“sense” here means a general feeling or understanding.

e.g. Did you get any sense of how they might react?

He looked around the room with a sense of achievement.

We have the same sense of humor.

He has a very good sense of direction.

5. (line 8) handling my own life: controlling my own life

handle: to control; deal with

e.g. She couldn’t handle the pressure of her new job.

My secretary will handle all the details.

She’s very good at handling diffi cult customers.

6. (line 9) I had to go out and look for a bank where I could open an account...

Note that in the sentence the relative adverb “where” is used to introduce a relative

Unit 1-1.indd 3 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 8: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

4

clause.

e.g. The hotel where we stayed wasn’t very clean.

open an account: to start an arrangement in which a bank keeps your money safe so

that you can put more in or take money out

e.g. I’m going to open an account with another bank.

You need just one pound to open a bank account with us.

account: 1. an arrangement with a bank, shop or other organizations by which they take

care of your money or allow you to buy things and pay for them later

e.g. I’ve opened an account in the bank.

Have you got a bank account?

cf. checking account (支票存款账户,活期存款账户), deposit account (定期存款账

户), savings account (储蓄存款账户), a current account [活期存款账户= checking

account(美)]

2. a written or spoken description of an event

e.g. She gave a vivid account of her recent visit to China at the meeting yesterday.

He kept a detailed account of the suspect’s movements.

7. (line 11) … I had no clue about any banks around here or where they were located.

— I had no idea about any banks near here or the place where they were situated.

clue: a sign or some information which helps you to find the answer to a problem,

question, etc.

e.g. We now have an important clue as to the time of the murder.

Childhood experience may provide a clue as to why some adults develop eating

disorders.

Police are still looking for clues in their search for the missing girl.

be located in/by/near, etc.: to be in a particular position

e.g. The business is located in the center of the town.

The hotel is located near the historical center of the city and only a 5 minutes’ walk

from the train station.

8. (line 15) now (that): because of the fact (that)

e.g. Now that you have mentioned it, I do remember.

Now that you have grown up, you must stop this childish behavior.

9. (line 19) ... — even though I’d been here before — I was a bit confused about where I

was going.

— ... although I’d been here before, I didn’t know for sure where I was going. /I was

wondering where I was going.

even though: although (used to emphasize that something is true although something

else has happened or is true)

e. g. Even though he’s 24 now, he’s still like a little child.

I can still remember, even though it was so long ago.

be confused: to be unable to think clearly or to understand something

Unit 1-1.indd 4 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 9: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 1 Going to College

5

e.g. I’m afraid I’m a little confused about these things.

Many people are confused about the new ways of measuring temperature.

cf. confused: not clear and therefore diffi cult to understand

e.g. Your essay gets a bit confused halfway through when you introduce too many ideas

at once.

They gave confused accounts of what happened.

cf. confusing: making you feel confused

e.g. We’ve got two people called Paul James working here, so it’s a bit confusing!

The instructions are terribly confusing. Could you help me with them, please?

a bit: to some degree; rather; a little

e.g. The dress is a bit too big for me.

That was a bit silly, wasn’t it?

I’m a bit nervous.

I was hoping there’d be some food — I’m a bit hungry.

10. (line 21) be supposed to: should; must; be expected to

e.g. Everyone is supposed to know the rules.

You are supposed to report the matter to the police as soon as possible.

I’m not supposed to talk to you about this.

11. (line 27) When they found out I was looking for New Gerard…

— When they discovered I was trying to fi nd New Gerard…

Note the difference between “fi nd out” and “fi nd”:

e.g. I’ve just found a ten-pound note in my pocket.

Too late, she found out that the train had been cancelled.

12. (line 29) even now: in spite of what has happened

e.g. Even now I fi nd it hard to believe that he lied.

I’ve shown him the photographs but even now he won’t believe me.

13. (line 29) … because there are friendly people around to talk with.

Note that the preposition “with” cannot be omitted here. The phrase “to talk with” is

used to modify “people”.

e.g. You may feel sad if you have no one to speak with.

At that time I had no paper to write on and no pens to write with.

14. (line 31) Finally — to add to my likes of college — I love having Fridays off…

— The last reason why I like college life is that there is no class on Fridays at college. /

Because I don’t like going to class on Friday, this makes me more like college life…

add to: to put (one thing together with another); make a feeling or quality stronger and

more noticeable

e.g. The bridge has added greatly to the beauty of the city.

This president’s plan simply adds to our problems.

Her colleagues’ laughter only added to her anger.

15. (line 32) cope with: to succeed in dealing with a diffi cult problem or situation

Unit 1-1.indd 5 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 10: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

6

e.g. John and Sally coped with all their problems cheerfully.

She had never felt this way before, and didn’t know how to cope with it.

Poor families have to cope with a lot of strain.

16. (line 32) in a row: one after another without a break

e.g. We had three bad summers in a row.

He was elected president three times in a row.

17. (line 35) sleep in: to sleep late in the morning

e.g. We usually sleep in for a bit on Sundays.

I slept in by mistake and was very late for work.

He worked late and decided to sleep in the next morning.

IV Summary of the Text

The author regards college life as a new and different experience and gives three

reasons to explain this. First, she thinks college life makes her feel responsible for herself

and independent because she has to make decisions on everything she does. Then she

writes about the friendly people she can get help from and talk with. Lastly, she mentions

the possibility of having Fridays off. In short, she enjoys this new life in spite of the fact

that she is away from her hometown.

V Text-related Information

1. Credit Card:

Credit card is a card that identifi es its owner as one who is entitled to credit when

purchasing goods or services from certain establishments. Credit cards originated in

the United States in the 1930s; their use was wide-spread by the 1950s. They are issued

by many businesses serving the consumers, such as oil companies, retail stores and

chain stores, restaurants, hotels, airlines, car rental agencies and banks. Some credit

cards are honored in a single store, but others are general-purpose cards, for use in a

wide variety of establishments. Bank credit cards are examples of the general purpose

card. Establishments dispensing almost every form of product or service are honoring

such cards, and it is predicted that credit cards might some day eliminate the need for

carrying cash.

When a credit card is used, the retailer records the name and account number of

the purchaser and the amount of the sale, and forwards this record to the credit card

billing offi ce. At intervals, usually monthly, the billing offi ce sends a statement to the

card holder listing all the charged purchases and requesting payment immediately or in

installments. The billing offi ce reimburses the retailer directly.

Most of the work involved in credit card operations is now handled by computers.

Charges for the use of a credit card are sometimes paid directly by the card holder, and

sometimes borne by the retail establishments that accept them. In the latter case, the

Unit 1-1.indd 6 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 11: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 1 Going to College

7

cost is absorbed into the price of the merchandise. Department stores usually charge

interest to credit customers who do not settle their bills within a month, but certain

credit plans do not charge interest until a bill has been outstanding for several months.

Interest rates for overdue balances are regulated by state law. A continuing problem

involved in the use of credit cards is the ease with which they can be used fraudulently

if stolen or lost, although the liability of the owner is limited.

2. Universities and Colleges:

Universities and colleges are institutions that offer education beyond the secondary

(preparatory or high school) level. This broad category of institutions may include

colleges offering only undergraduate preparation; universities offering undergraduate

and graduate education; free-standing professional colleges offering degrees in law,

medicine, engineering and the like; and two-year community and junior colleges

offering technical, vocational and liberal arts programs.

Terminology for institutions as well as types of programs vary greatly within a

single country. In general, a college offers degree programs for undergraduate students,

but it may have master’s degree programs also. The universities are usually dedicated

to three comprehensive activities: instruction for undergraduate, graduate, and

professional degrees; research geared to expanding the frontiers of knowledge; and

outreach or dissemination of learning beyond the boundaries of the institution through

the printed word, scholarly associations, formal and non-formal instruction, and

worldwide telecommunications and computer linkages.

National systems of higher education in general are geared to serving youth

between the ages of 17 and 25. The enrollment as a percentage of the country’s total

population has been growing appreciably in many countries. Where once higher

education was reserved for a small elite, today university education in many countries

is a massive social enterprise.

Despite the ravages of two world wars and the damage and disruption of uncounted

local military contests, many nations of the world have received increasing demands for

higher education from their people and have responded by building more universities

and other types of higher education institutions. The Third-World nations in Africa,

Southeast Asia, and South America have built new universities. Some universities have

reached enormous size, such as the National Autonomous University of Mexico, which

has over 300 000 students.

Unit 1-1.indd 7 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 12: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

8

Text B

Never Too Old to Live Your Dream

I Introduction

1. Introductory Remarks

Everyone has his or her dream. Having a dream in life not only makes us stay

young and be happy, but also helps us live a meaningful life. However old you are, it is

never too late to realize your dream. It is up to you to realize your dream. But, for some

reason, some people lose their dreams, even when they are very young. This passage

tells us a story about an eighty-seven-year-old woman who taught by example that it is

never too old to live our dream.

2. Introductory Questions

1. What happened on the fi rst day of school?

2. How old was the old woman Rose?

3. Why did the woman want to go to college at such an old age?

4. What did they talk about after class?

5. What were the old woman’s four secrets to staying young, being happy and achieving

success?

6. What did the author and his schoolmates learn from the old woman?

II Outline

Paras. 1-- 9

Getting to know Rose

a. meeting Rose

b. wanting to know why she had decided to go to college

c. becoming good friends

d. Rose becoming a campus icon

Paras. 10-- 16

Rose was invited to make a speech at our football banquet.

a. four secrets to stay young, to be happy and to achieve success

b. laughing and fi nding humor each and every day

c. having a dream

d. growing up by always fi nding an opportunity in change

e. having no regrets

Para. 17

The death of the old woman

Rose showed us by example that it’s never too late to be all you can

possibly be.

Text B

Unit 1-1.indd 8 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 13: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 1 Going to College

9

III Detailed Study of the Text

1. Never Too Old to Live Your Dream

— It is never too old to realize your dream /make your dream come true.

live: to practice and represent in one’s life

e.g. He lives his believes.

He’s successful because his parents and friends encouraged him to fi nd and live his

dream.

never too… to…: (It is) not so late that one cannot do something

e.g. It’s never too late to start learning English.

It’s never too late to learn.

2. (line 1) The fi rst day of school our professor introduced himself to our chemistry class

and challenged us to get to know someone we didn’t already know.

— The first day of school our teacher told his name to our chemistry class and

suggested strongly that we should get to know someone whom we didn’t know.

challenge: to suggest strongly that someone should do something; invite someone to

enter a competition, fi ght, etc.

e.g. Mike challenged me to a game of chess.

They challenged the prime minister to call an election.

cf. challenge n.

e.g. …what made her take on that challenge at her age.

The role will be the biggest challenge of his acting career.

to face /meet a challenge

to accept / take up a challenge

3. (line 2) I stood up to look around when a gentle hand touched my shoulder. I turned

around to fi nd a wrinkled, little old lady smiling at me.

— I stood up to look around when someone touched me gently on the shoulder. I

turned around and found a wrinkled little old lady who was smiling at me.

A wrinkled person is one with lines on his /her skin, especially on his /her face.

look around: to turn to look at something behind oneself; look in various directions to

fi nd something, or to what is there

e.g. He stopped suddenly and looked around.

He looked around again for a chair.

turn around: to change position or direction so as to face the other way

e.g. Turn around and let me look at your back.

I turned my chair round to face the fi re.

wrinkled: having small lines and folds

e.g. She kissed his wrinkled face.

a wrinkled piece of brown paper

4. (line 4) Can I give you a hug?

hug: an act of putting your arms around someone and holding them tightly, especially

Unit 1-1.indd 9 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 14: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

10

to show that you like or love them

e.g. She gave her mother a big hug.

He stopped to receive hugs and kisses from the fans.

She greeted the visitors with hugs and kisses.

5. (line 6) “Why are you in college at such a young, innocent age?” I asked.

— I asked her why she went to college at such an old age.

Note the humorous use of the words “at such a young, innocent age”. In fact, what the

author wanted to know was why she was in college at such an old age.

innocent: not very experienced concerning life and the bad things people do so that you

tend to trust people too much

e.g. an innocent young child

give someone a wide-eyed, innocent look

I was thirteen years old and very innocent.

6. (line 7) She jokingly replied, “I’m here to meet a rich husband, get married, have a

couple of children, and then retire and travel.”

Note also the humorous way the old woman answered the question. She was only

kidding, which can be seen from the words: “jokingly replied”.

a couple of: two or a few people of the same kind; two or a few things of the same kind

e.g. There are a couple of girls waiting for you.

I’d just like to ask you a couple of questions before you go.

retire: to stop doing your job

e.g. She was forced to retire early from teaching because of poor health.

She was retired on medical grounds.

cf. I retired (= went to bed) late, for as always the morning would arrive too soon.

7. (line 9) “No seriously,” I asked. I wanted to know why she had decided to go to college

and what made her take on that challenge at her age.

— I asked her if she was only joking. I wanted to know why she had made the

decision to go to college and what made her decide to have that challenge at such

an old age.

“No seriously” is used in spoken English to express what the other has said is only

kidding, not serious.

cf. seriously

e.g. When the laughter died down he continued, “But seriously, folks, we do have a

major problem.”

take on: to decide to do something; agree to be responsible for someone or something

e.g. I can’t take on any extra work.

We’re not taking on any new clients at present.

8. (line 12) “I always dreamed of having a college education and now I’m getting one!”

she told me.

— She told me she always imagined and thought about going to college and then she

Unit 1-1.indd 10 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 15: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 1 Going to College

11

was a college student /she was getting a college education. /She told me that she

always longed to go to college…

dream of /about: to imagine and think about something that one would like to happen

e.g. It was the kind of trip most of us only dream about.

She dreams of running her own business.

9. (line 15) …shared a chocolate milkshake.

share: If one person shares something with another person, or two people share

something, they have or use something together.

e.g. We shared the pizza between the four of us.

Sue shares a house with three other students.

cf. share (in) something: to have the same feelings, ideas, experiences, etc.

a view that is widely shared

e.g. a view that is widely shared

They shared a common interest in botany.

I didn’t really share in her love of animals.

share something (with someone): to tell other people about your ideas, experiences and

feelings

e.g. Men often don’t like to share their problems.

Would you like to share your experience with the rest of the group?

milkshake: A milkshake is a drink made of milk and usually ice cream and fl avoring

such as fruit or chocolate, mixed quickly together until it is full of bubbles.

10. (line 15) We became instant friends.

— Immediately we became friends.

instant: happening immediately

e.g. She took an instant dislike to me.

The show was an instant success.

11. (line 17) I was always interested in listening to this “time machine” as she shared her

wisdom and experience with me.

— I was always interested in listening to her talking about her past experience as she

told her opinions, ideas and experience to me.

time machine: It is literally a machine that enables you to travel in time to the past or

the future. Here the author compares the old lady to a time machine in the sense that he

listened to her talking about her past experience.

12. (line 19) Over the course of the school year, Rose became a campus icon and easily

made friends wherever she went. She loved to dress up and she reveled in the

attention bestowed upon her from the other students. She was living it up.

— During the school year, Rose became a famous person on campus and it was easy

for her to make friends no matter where she went. She liked to wear special clothes

and enjoyed the attention given to her from the other students. She had a very

enjoyable and exciting time by doing that.

Unit 1-1.indd 11 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 16: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

12

over the course of something: during a particular time or activity

e.g. Over the course of the next few years, the steel industry was reorganized.

The company faces major challenges over the course of the next few years.

Similar expressions: during/in/throughout the course of something

icon: a very famous person or thing considered as representing a set of beliefs or a way

of life

e.g. The movie star in question happens to be a popular cultural icon.

Marilyn Monroe and James Dean are still icons for many young people.

wherever: in all places that

e.g. Wherever she goes, there are crowds of people waiting to see her.

Wherever I go, I always seem to bump into him.

dress up: to put on formal clothes for a special occasion; wear special clothes for fun

e.g. You don’t need to dress up just to go to the pub — jeans and a T-shirt will do.

It’s a small informal party — you don’t have to dress up.

He dressed up as a cowboy for the party.

revel in: to enjoy something very much; get great pleasure from a situation or an activity

e.g. She’s reveling in her newly found freedom.

He reveled in his role as team manager.

bestow something upon/on someone: to give something to someone as an honor or

present

e.g. This honor was bestowed upon her for the many contributions she has made to the

legal profession and to the community.

This award was bestowed on Whipple for his leadership.

live it up: to do things that you enjoy and spend a lot of money

e.g. Sam was living it up in London.

He’s alive and well and living it up in the Bahamas.

13. (line 25) As she began to deliver her prepared speech, she dropped her three-by-fi ve

cards on the fl oor.

— As she started to give her prepared speech, she let her three-by-fi ve cards fall onto

the fl oor unintentionally.

deliver a speech: to give a speech

e.g. It is your responsibility to arrive prepared and ready to deliver a speech.

Have you ever delivered a speech or presentation before?

14. (line 26) Frustrated and a bit embarrassed…

— Feeling annoyed and a bit shy…

frustrated: feeling annoyed, upset, and impatient, because you cannot control or change

a situation, or achieve something

e.g. He gets frustrated when people don’t understand what he’s trying to say.

Are you feeling frustrated in your present job?

cf. frustrating: making you feel annoyed, upset, or impatient because you cannot do

Unit 1-1.indd 12 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 17: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 1 Going to College

13

what you want to do

e.g. My job can be very frustrating sometimes.

He doesn’t listen to what I say and it’s so frustrating.

embarrassed: feeling nervous and uncomfortable and worrying about what people think

of you

e.g. He looked embarrassed when I asked him where he’d been.

I felt embarrassed about how untidy the house was.

cf. embarrassing: making you feel embarrassed

e.g. It’s embarrassing to be caught telling a lie.

My most embarrassing moment was trying to introduce a woman whose name I

couldn’t remember.

15. (line 27) I gave up beer for Lent and this whiskey is killing me!

— I drank whisky instead of beer and this whiskey makes me feel extremely

uncomfortable. “Lent” is a brand name for one kind of whisky.

give up: to stop doing or having something

e.g. Darren has decided to give up football at the end of this season.

She didn’t give up work when she had the baby.

16. (line 27) I’ll never get my speech back in order…

— The prepared speech was written on the cards, which she dropped to the fl oor. So

she couldn’t give the prepared speech.

17. (line 28) … she cleared her throat and began…

— … she gave a small cough and began…

clear one’s throat: to give a small cough so that one can speak clearly

e.g. She cleared her throat nervously before she began to speak.

He cleared his throat and began to speak.

18. (line 29) We do not stop playing because we are old; we grow old because we stop

playing. There are four secrets to staying young, being happy and achieving success.

— We are no longer playing not because we are old; we grow old because we are

no longer playing. There are four best ways to stay young, be happy and achieve

success.

Notice the difference between “stop doing something” and “stop to do something”:

We stopped taking pictures. (meaning “We were no longer taking pictures.”)

We stopped to take pictures. (meaning “We stopped what we were doing so that we

could start taking pictures.”)

achieve: to succeed in reaching a particular goal, status or standard, especially by

making an effort for a long time

e.g. He had fi nally achieved success.

They could not achieve their target of less than 3% infl ation.

19. (line 31) … each and every day.

The expression “each and every day” is used for emphasis.

Unit 1-1.indd 13 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 18: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

14

20. (line 32) We have so many people walking around who are dead and they don’t even

know it!

— In our life, there are a lot of people who are physically alive but who are no longer

alive spiritually and they themselves don’t even realize it!

21. (line 34) There is a big difference between growing older and growing up.

— Growing older differs greatly from growing up.

22. (line 34) If you are nineteen years old and lie in bed for one full year and don’t do one

productive thing, you will turn twenty years old.

— If you don’t do anything productive /that will produce a useful result, you’ll grow

older.

turn: to become

e.g. The leaves were already turning brown.

The weather has turned cold and windy.

She turned a deathly shade of white when she heard the news.

He’s a lawyer-turned politician (= he used to be a lawyer but is now a politician).

23. (line 37) Anybody can grow older. That doesn’t take any talent or ability.

— Anybody can grow older. Growing older doesn’t require any natural ability to do

something well.

talent: a natural ability to do something well

e.g. She showed considerable talent for getting what she wanted.

He had an obvious talent for music.

ability: a level of skill or intelligence; the fact that someone or something is able to do

something

e.g. Almost everyone has some musical ability.

Everyone has the right to good medical care regardless of their ability to pay.

24. (line 37) The idea is to grow up by always fi nding the opportunity in change.

— The suggestion /guiding principle is that we should grow up by finding the

opportunity in something new and different.

opportunity: a time when a particular situation makes it possible to do or achieve

something

e.g. You’ll have the opportunity to ask any questions at the end.

There was no opportunity for further discussion.

This is the perfect opportunity to make a new start.

25. (line 39) “Have no regrets. We elderly usually don’t have regrets for what we did, but

rather for things we didn’t do. The only people who are afraid of death are those with

regrets.”

— Don’t have sad or disappointing feelings because we have done something. We

elderly people don’t have sad feelings for what we did. We have sad feelings for

what we didn’t do. The only people who fear death are those who have sad feelings

for what they did.

Unit 1-1.indd 14 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 19: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 1 Going to College

15

regret: a feeling of sadness or disappointment that you have because of something that

has happened or something that you have done or not done

e.g. She expressed her regret at the decision.

It was with great regret that I gave up the job.

cf. regret v.

If you don’t do it now, you’ll only regret it.

We regret to inform you that your application has not been successful.

We regret having been there.

elderly: used as a polite word for “old”

e.g. an elderly couple /elderly relatives

cf. the elderly: people who are old

26. (line 41) She concluded her speech by courageously singing “The Rose.”

— At the end of her speech, she courageously sang the song “The Rose.”

conclude: to end a speech, a meeting or a piece of writing

e.g. She concluded the speech by reminding us of our responsibility.

Before I conclude, I’d like to thank you all for coming.

27. (line 42) …and live them out in our daily lives.

— …and practice and fulfi ll /realize what is expressed in the lyrics in our daily life.

live out: to experience or do something that you have planned or hoped for

e.g. The money enabled them to live out their dreams.

You really have to examine your values and live them out.

We’re determined to stand for these words and live them out in our lives.

28. (line 44) Over two thousand college students attended her funeral in tribute to the

wonderful woman who taught by example that it’s never too late to be all you can

possibly be.

— More than two thousand students were present at her funeral to show our respect

and admiration for this wonderful woman who, by her own behavior, helped us

understand that it’s never too late to realize our dream.

attend: 1. to be present at an event

e.g. The meeting was attended by 90% of shareholders.

to attend a wedding /funeral

2. to go regularly to a place

e.g. Our children attend the same school.

How many people attend church every Sunday?

tribute: something that you say, do, or give in order to express your respect or

admiration for someone

e.g. The players wore black armbands as a tribute to their late teammate.

I’d like to pay tribute to (=praise and admire publicly) the party workers for all

their hard work.

Unit 1-1.indd 15 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 20: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

16

IV Summary of the Text

The fi rst day of school, I knew Rose, who was eighty-seven years old then. I wanted

to know why she had decided to go to college and what made her take on that challenge at

her age. She told us she always dreamed of having a college education. We soon became

good friends. I was always interested in listening to her as she shared her wisdom and

experience with me. At the end of the semester, we asked Rose to speak at our football

banquet. She told us four secrets to staying young, being happy and achieving success.

The fi rst secret is to laugh and fi nd humor each and every day. The second one is to have

a dream. The third is to grow up by always finding the opportunity in change, and the

last one is to have no regrets. At the end of that year, Rose finished the college degree

she had begun all those years ago. One week after graduation Rose died peacefully in her

sleep. From this wonderful woman, we understand that it’s never too late to be all you can

possibly be.

V Text-related Information

College Degrees: In England and Wales and in the U.S. fi rst degrees include a BA for

arts subjects and BSc (in British English)/ BS (in American English) for science and social

science. Higher degrees include an MA or MSc (in British English)/ MS (in American

English) and a PhD. In Scotland degree courses last four years instead of three, and an MA

or an MSc is a fi rst degree. In the U.S., one can also earn an AA degree for two years study

in a junior college, but this is a lower degree than a BA.

In Britain, students can graduate with an ordinary degree or an honors degree, which

is better. The highest level of honors degree is called a fi rst or a fi rst class degree, and very

few students get this. The next best level is called a second or a second class degree, and

this is split into a higher level, called a two-one, and a lower level, a two-two. The lowest

level is a third or a third class degree.

Skills

Translation Skills

本书每单元翻译练习分为两项,一项是英译汉的基本技能练习,介绍并训练英译汉的一些基本

方法和技巧。本书第一册主要介绍词义选择、词义引申、词类转换、增词译等技能。一项是汉译英

练习,主要帮助学生复习掌握课文中的一些重要表达方式和词语用法。第一单元英译汉技能练习重

点是词义选择。

Skills

Unit 1-1.indd 16 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 21: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 1 Going to College

17

根据词在句中的搭配关系,联系上下文正确选择词义:

英语单词的词义比较灵活,一个词可以具有几种不同的含义。如何选择词义是英译汉时经常面

临的问题。

一个词的含义往往取决于与它搭配、组合的词对它的制约。例如,动词have在下列词组中具有不

同的含义:

have a lot of money 有很多钱 have a letter 收到一封信

have breakfast 吃早饭 have a cold 患感冒

have a cup of coffee 喝杯咖啡 have a bath 洗个澡

have a try 试一下 have a good time 玩得开心

have a coat on 穿着大衣 have to do with 和⋯交往,与⋯有关

有时候,一个词的意思很难仅仅依靠词在行文中的搭配、组合关系来判断,还必须联系上下

文,统观全句或全段才能确定这个词所具有的含义。请看下列句子中work所表示的意义:

1) Ken is working at the BBC. 肯目前在英国广播公司工作。

2) The bell is not working. 铃不响了。

3) Your idea won’t work in practice. 你的想法实际上行不通。

4) You are working hard! 你真用功啊!(你真卖力啊!)

5) My mother worked a sweater for me. 妈妈为我织了一件毛衣。

6) Do you know how to work this machine? 你知道怎么使用这台机器吗?

7) He worked his way through college. 他靠做工挣钱读完了大学。

英语单词在句中的搭配关系以及上下文是辨析词义的重要依据,英译汉时必须充分注意这两个

方面才能对单词的词义做出正确的选择。

本单元的英译汉技能练习试图通过对handle在一些句中不同意义的翻译使学生了解词义选择在

英译汉实践中的重要性。

Guided Writing

本写作实践部分由基础训练和实用英语写作两个部分组成。第一册的基础训练主要内容为句子

水平的写作、句与句衔接、主题句的写作等内容。第一册的实用写作内容包括:填表格、写信封地

址、写名片、写贺卡、写邀请便函、写邀请回函(接收和拒绝)、写感谢便笺、写致歉便笺、写通

知书。

本单元的基础训练是连词成句。在连词成句练习中要提醒学生注意主谓一致,注意动词的

时态。

本单元的实用写作是填写表格。提醒学生注意“print”这个词的意义,注意“Please print your

name and address.(请用大写印刷体写下你的姓名和地址)”和“Please sign your name.(请签

名)”的区别。注意英语姓名的组成和地址的写法。特别要注意英语和汉语姓名顺序的不同。

英语姓名的顺序:fi rst name(名字)+ middle name(中名,名与姓之间的名字)+ last name

(姓)

Christian name为教名(one’s fi rst name),family name为姓。

Unit 1-1.indd 17 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 22: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

18

Reading Skills — Reading for the Main ldea (1)

Specifi c Aim 1: To help the students be always sensitive to the Main Idea around

which the authors try to organize their materials.

Why? This may help you to read with a high degree of efficiency and

obtain maximum information from what you read with minimum

misunderstanding. In writing, however, the main idea is sometimes

not as clear as it should be and it takes skills and practice to

recognize it. When you are reading a paragraph or a passage for

the main idea, it is a good idea to try to force yourself to read a

little faster than usual. In this way you will be able to focus your

attention on the main point and the relationships between them.

Specific Aim 2: To train the students to identify the topic sentences in various

locations in the paragraph.

Why? Most paragraphs have a topic sentence. A topic sentence usually

best expresses the main idea that the author is trying to get across.

Therefore, there is no doubt that being able to identify the topic

sentence quickly will certainly help you to grasp the main idea of

a paragraph. Authors most frequently use the fi rst sentence of the

paragraph to state the main idea. However, they may place it in the

middle, at the end, or leave it unstated.

Specifi c Aim 3: To help the students get alert to the common mistakes that might

be involved in identifying the main idea of a reading passage.

Why? The following mistakes are likely to occur and thus impeding the

understanding:

1. To pick out a small part of the topic and assume it is the main

idea; it is therefore too specifi c.

2. To state a main idea that covers more than the author intended;

it is therefore too general.

3. To come up with an irrelevant idea and think it is the main idea.

Examlpe:

Movies are actually separate still pictures shown so fast that the human eyes

cannot detect the break between them. When successive images are presented rapidly

enough, we fuse them into a single moving image.

A. Movies are extremely popular. (irrelevant)

B. Modern movies make much use of slow motion. (irrelevant)

C. Motion pictures are separate pictures shown so fast that we see no break between

them. (relevant)

Unit 1-1.indd 18 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 23: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 1 Going to College

19

D. Motion pictures require an expensive camera, capable of making very rapid

multiple exposures. (irrelevant)

Key to the Exercises

Text A

First Reading

Exercise 1

1. D 2. D 3. A 4. B 5. A

While Reading

1. “having Fridays off ” means “she has no classes /does not work at school on Fridays because

she is on holiday.”

2. “that” refers to what has been mentioned in the previous sentence, that is “…I had to go

out and look for a bank where I could open an account.”

Second Reading

Exercise 2

1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. F

Exercise 3

College — A New Experience

The Main Idea: College is a new and different experience for me.

My likes of college: 1. Being on my own

2. Friendly people

3. Having Fridays off

Oral Practice

Exercise 4

(For reference.)

College is a new and different experience for me. I like college for at least three reasons.

First, it gives me a sense of responsibility and being on my own. Secondly, there are many

Key to the ExercisesKey to the Exercises

First Reading

While Reading

Second Reading

Oral Practice

College — A New Experience

The Main Idea: College is a new and different experience for me.College is a new and different experience for me.

My likes of college: 1. Being on my ownBeing on my own

2. Friendly people

3. Having Fridays offHaving Fridays off

Unit 1-1.indd 19 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 24: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

20

friendly people on campus. I can always get help from them and talk with them. And fi nally,

having Fridays off is another reason why I like college.

Vocabulary and Structure

Exercise 5

1. handle 2. account 3. aspect 4. clue 5. responsibility

6. check 7. cope 8. located 9. confused 10. comfortable

Exercise 6

1. in a row 2. slept in 3. Now that 4. added to 5. on my own

6. adjust to/cope with 7. open an account 8. have…off

9. cope with 10. was around

Exercise 7

1. around 2. about 3. on 4. to 5. on

6. off 7. in 8. with 9. in 10. to

Exercise 8

VERBS good harm friend shopping decision visit suggestionmake ★ ★ ★ ★

do ★ ★ ★job noise progress speech mistake choice exercise

make ★ ★ ★ ★ ★do ★ ★

1. do exercises 2. make friends 3. making much progress

4. doing a full-time job 5. make a choice 6. making decisions

7. make mistakes 8. do any good 9. made some very helpful suggestions

10. (have) done harm to others and themselves

Exercise 9

1. confused 2. confusing 3. now that 4. even though

5. specially 6. especially 7. found 8. fi nd out

Exercise 10

1. We had to fi nd a place where we could park our car.

2. We did not know the store where we could buy a cheap computer.

3. It was the perfect moment to arrive in the city where I was to spend the next year.

Exercise 11

1. Even though academic success is an important part of the college experience, it’s not the

Vocabulary and Structure

Unit 1-1.indd 20 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 25: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 1 Going to College

21

only part.

2. Even though I knew exercise was good for me, I didn’t like doing it.

3. We bought tickets to go to France, even though that wasn’t really the best time of a year to

go.

4. I can still remember my fi rst year at college, even though it was so long ago.

Translation Practice

Exercise 12

1. 玻璃制品——小心轻放!

2. 我得应付自己的生活。

3. 他管这家公司的账。

4. 把这留给我吧,我能处理/对付得了。

5. 有些顾客很难对付。

6. 他以前从不曾摸过武器。

7. 我们不经销这类书。

8. 这辆汽车很好驾驶。

Exercise 13

1. Even though you don’t speak French, you can still fi nd that place.

2. I want to go to a college where I can get an excellent education.

3. I soon adjusted to college life.

4. They have found out who that man was /is.

5. When is the ship supposed to leave?

Writing Practice

Exercise 14

Letterhead 45 Shanghai Rd

Xuanwu District

Nanjing

20 January 2014

Salutation Dear Dave,

Opening My English teacher gave me your name and address and said that

you’d like to have a Chinese pen friend, so here I am!

Main part My name is Li Donghui and I’m nineteen years old. I’m living in

a small town in Anhui Province, China. It’s a nice place with a

big and beautiful lake and many small hills. My father is a doctor

and my mother is a teacher of Chinese in a local high school. I’m

the only child of the family.

Translation Practice

Writing Practice

Unit 1-1.indd 21 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 26: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

22

I’m now studying English at Nanjing College of Tourism. My

favorite subjects are English Literature and Oral English.

In my spare time I like listening to music, playing basketball, and

of course practicing my oral English. You see, I want to become

an excellent tour guide for foreign visitors.

Final paragraph Anyway, that’s all about me for now. I hope you’ll write back to

tell me about yourself.Complimentary close

Signature

Best wishes,Li Donghui

Exercise 15

(For reference.)

Richard Bland College Library Registration Form

11301 Johnson Rd., Petersburg, Va. 23805

804-862-6227

Please Print

Name:

Bergman Bernard Alfred

Last First Middle

Address:

5 Hayden Dr Petersburg Virginia 23803

City State Zip

Phone: 804-564-2611 Phone: 804-562-5100 ext. 1488

Home Work

E-mail Address: [email protected]

Dictation

Exercise 16

1. common 2. every weekend 3. cope with it

4. keep you busy 5. make new friends 6. experience

7. you are not alone 8. adjust to college life 9. will go away

10. get used to

Dictation

Unit 1-1.indd 22 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 27: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 1 Going to College

23

Text B

First Reading

Exercise 1

1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T

5. F 6. T 7. F 8. T

Second Reading

Exercise 2

1. The professor challenged them to get to know each other.

2. Because she always dreamed of having a college education.

3. Every day for the next three months they left class together and talked nonstop. The author

was always interested in listening to her as Rose shared her wisdom and experience with

her.

4. She loved to dress up and she reveled in the attention bestowed upon her from the other

students. She was living it up.

5. 1. Have to laugh and find humor each and every day. 2. Have a dream. 3. Grow up by

always fi nding the opportunity in change. 4. Have no regrets.

6. She meant that anybody could grow older. That didn’t take any talent or ability. To grow

up one had to fi nd the opportunity in change.

7. She concluded her speech by courageously singing “The Rose.”

8. They attended her funeral to pay tribute to Rose who taught by example that it’s never too

late to be all you can possibly be.

Reading Skills

Exercise 3

Questions:

1. The fi rst sentence.

2. (There is) a big difference between growing older and growing up.

3. Living at college, fi rst of all, gives me a sense of responsibility, of being on my own.

4. Friendly people: that’s another aspect I like about college.

5. Finally — to add to my likes of college — I love having Fridays off…

Exercise 4

1. A topic sentence is a sentence that tells the reader what the paragraph is going to be about.

2. A paragraph is a group of connected sentences that develop a single idea or theme.

3. My hometown is famous for several amazing natural features.

Unit 1-1.indd 23 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 28: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

24

Vocabulary Practice

Exercise 5

1. embarrassed 2. delivered 3. tribute 4. talent 5. challenging

6. regrets 7. retire 8. opportunity 9. instant 10. concluded

Exercise 6

1. dress up 2. live it up 3. live out 4. cleared his throat 5. reveled in

6. dreamed of 7. in tribute to 8. take on 9. gave up 10. grown up

Expanding Your Vocabulary

Exercise 7

1. seriously 2. cheerful 3. motherly 4. meaningful 5. fearful

6. instantly 7. painful 8. peaceful 9. comfortably 10. regretful

Exercise 8

1. away 2. higher education 3. heavier 4. challenges 5. long for

6. pass 7. made 8. exciting 9. Sleep in 10. fi nding out

参考译文

Text A

上大学—新的体验

对我来说,上大学是一次不同以往的新经历。我离开了家,因此有许多情况有待适应。独立自

主、同友好的人们交谈、星期五休息,这些仅仅是我喜欢大学生活的部分原因。

首先,住校使我有了一种独立自主的责任感。父母再也不会在一旁说:“不行,今晚你不能出

去。” 或是 “你的功课做完了吗?” 做任何事情都由我自己决定,这就使我自己承担起了安排自

己生活的责任。在我进大学后的第二周,我就得外出找一家银行开户。事前,我查找了电话簿,因

为我对这儿附近的银行和它们的地点都一无所知。有人向我介绍了一家挺不错的银行:大陆储蓄银

行。我去了银行,不论是开支票户,还是储蓄户,也不论是否要取得一张万事达信用卡,都是我自

己做的主。这是我负起责任独立自主、自己做决定的一个例证。

友好的人们是我喜欢上大学的另一个原因。第一天(乃至到现在)人们对我都很好。我从纽约来到

弗吉尼亚的马利芒特大学。尽管我以前来过这儿,但我对自己该去哪儿,还是感到有点茫然。母亲

和我开车进校,但找不到我们该去的那座楼。保卫人员特别友善,他面带微笑告诉我们,哪个是我

们要找的大楼,在哪里可以停车。我的房间在新吉拉德楼的一楼,我知道我必须穿过一些玻璃门,

但母亲和我都不知道要进的是哪些门。一些高年级同学见到我便问:“你是新生吗?” 当他们知道我

们在寻找新吉拉德楼时,有一位便说:“哦,请随我们来,我们正要到那里去。” 现在我在宿舍里感

Vocabulary Practice

Expanding Your Vocabulary

Unit 1-1.indd 24 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 29: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 1 Going to College

25

到特别舒适,因为周围有许多友好的人们可以交谈。

最后,再补充一点我喜欢上大学的原因吧。我喜欢周五休息。连着上5天课,我可吃不消。还

有,我爱睡懒觉。一个星期四的夜晚,我和室友同对面宿舍里的同学去了一次华盛顿的乔治敦区。

第二天一大早我们回到了学校,我和室友(胡安妮塔)决定睡个懒觉,这在中学时是不可能的。

我的确喜欢大学里的种种事情:独立自主、与友好的人交谈、周五休息,但这并不意味着我不

想家中的一切。虽然我喜欢学校生活,但我仍然想家:纽约毕竟也是个好地方。

Text B

活到老,追梦到老

开学的第一天,老师向上化学课的同学们作了自我介绍,并鼓励我们主动去认识一些我们不认

识的人。当我站起身,四处张望时,一只温柔的手搭上了我的肩膀。我转过身,一个身材矮小、满

面皱纹的老妇人正冲我微笑。

她说:“嗨!年轻人,我叫罗兹,今年87岁。我能拥抱一下你吗?”

我笑着回答道:“当然可以!” 她给了我一个长长的热烈的拥抱。

“你为什么在如此年幼天真的年纪来上大学呢?” 我问她。

她开玩笑地回答说:“我来这儿是为了认识一个有钱的丈夫,把自己嫁出去,生上几个孩子,然

后就辞掉工作,去旅行。”

“您是开玩笑吧。”我说。我想知道她为什么会下决心上大学,是什么让她在如此高龄仍然去

主动迎接这样巨大的挑战。

“我过去一直梦想着能接受大学教育,现在我正接受着大学教育呢!” 她告诉我。

下课以后,我们走到学生会大楼,一起分享了一杯巧克力奶昔。我们很快就成了好朋友。在接

下来的三个月里,我们每天都一起离开教室,在一起谈个不停。我也总是饶有兴趣地听着这个“时

间机器”和我一起分享她的智慧与经验。

在这一学年中罗兹成了学校的偶像人物,她无论到哪里总能轻易地交上朋友。她喜欢打扮,陶

醉在其他同学对她的关注之中,充分享受着生活乐趣。

期末的时候,我们邀请罗兹到我们为足球队举办的晚宴上发言。我永远也不会忘记她对我们的

告诫。主持人介绍了她后,她走向讲台。当她开始要发表她事先准备好的讲话时,她那些3英寸宽5

英寸长的卡片不慎掉落到地上。她显得很沮丧,也有点尴尬。她俯身靠向话筒,淡淡地说:“抱歉,

我很紧张。我舍弃了啤酒,改喝 ‘兰特’ 威士忌,没想到这威士忌简直要了我的命!看来我是记不

得事先准备好的讲话了,这样,我就讲些我知道的事情吧。” 在我们的笑声中,她清了清嗓子,然后

开始说:

“我们不是因为老了而不再玩耍了,而是因为不再玩耍所以才老了。要想永葆青春、天天开心

并获得成功,有四个秘诀。”

“你必须开怀大笑,你必须在每一天都能发现一些幽默的东西。 ”

“你应该有梦想。当你失去梦想时,你也就不复存在了。从我们身边走过的许多人都是行尸走

肉,他们甚至不知道他们实际上已经死了。”

“变老和长大是截然不同的。如果你是19岁,在床上躺上整整一年,一件建设性的事情也不

Unit 1-1.indd 25 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 30: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

26

做,你仍然会长到20岁。如果我87岁时在床上躺上一年,什么都不做,我也会变成88岁。任何人都

会变老。这不需要任何才能或者本事。我认为,我们应该不停地在变化中寻找机会,使自己长大。”

“不要让自己后悔。我们年纪大的人常常不是为我们做过的事情后悔,而是为没做的事情感到

后悔。只有那些后悔的人才会害怕死亡。”

她饶有勇气地唱起了《玫瑰》这首歌作为演讲的结尾,并鼓励我们每一个人学会歌词并且在日

常生活中照此力行。

那年的年末,罗兹完成了许多年前开始修读的大学学位。毕业一个星期之后,她在睡眠中平静

地去世了。两千多名大学生参加了她的葬礼,向这位了不起的老妇人表示敬意。她以身教导我们:

想实现你的潜能,永远都为时不晚。

Unit 1-1.indd 26 16/3/24 上午9:16

Page 31: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Music

Unit

2

ObjectivesObjectives

Text A Text B

Words

interact ion, evolve , t radi t ion,

accompany, influence, amazing,

attractive, performance, mixture,

phenomenon, career, symbol

occasion, invention, communication,

export, native, religion, festival,

religious, entertain, tap

Phrases and

Expressions

go back to, such as, evolve from, be

similar to, have influence on, grow

up, go downhill, a series of, not only

...but also..., at the age of

all over the world, bring to, remind

of, bring together, far apart, go on,

clap one’s hands, tap one’s feet

Collocation play + objective perform + objective

Confusable Words grow /grow up, grow up /raise, stop to do /stop doing, most /mostly

Structures

It is difficult to say exactly how the music we call “rock” or “rock and roll” began.

Elvis Presley remained the symbol of rock and roll not only in the United

States but also around the world.

Translation

Practice选择词义

Writing Practice Write Correct Sentences / Address an Envelope

Reading Skills Reading for the Main Idea (2): Topic Sentences and Concluding Sentences

Expanding Your

Vocabulary

nation + al → national, culture + al → cultural, education + al →

educational, preach + er → preacher, drive + r → driver, act + or → actor27

Unit 1-2.indd 27 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 32: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

28

Text A

Rock and Roll

I Introduction

1. Introductory Remarks

It is difficult to say exactly how the music we call “rock” or “rock and roll” began.

Its roots go back to black African and white European music. From the seventeenth

to the twentieth century, musicians in the southern United States developed two new

forms of music, the blues and the country music. They influenced each other and

finally developed into rock and roll with the birth of the electric guitar.

Elvis Presley is considered the King of Rock and Roll. He died long ago, but his

music did not die with him and continues to influence American culture.

2. Introductory Questions

1. Do you know anything about rock and roll?

2. How did the music we call “rock and roll” begin?

3. What musical instruments do rock and roll players use?

4. Do you know any rock and roll musicians?

II Outline

Paras. 1–4

Development of rock and roll music

a. roots: interaction between the black African and the white European

music

b. development: appearance of the two new forms of music

c. formation: coming into being with the birth of the phonograph and the

electric guitar

Para. 5 King of Rock and Roll

Para. 6 Life story of Elvis Presley and his influence on American culture

III Detailed Study of the Text

1. (line1)Itisdifficulttosayexactlyhow…

Note that in the sentence the part “to say exactly how the music we call ‘rock’ or ‘rock

and roll’ began” is too long, it comes more naturally at the end of the sentence than at

the beginning. In the structure “it is adjective + to V ”, the word “it” is used here as the

Text A

Unit 1-2.indd 28 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 33: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 2 Music

29

subject and the real subject is later in the sentence.

e.g. Apparently it’s cheaper to fly than to go by train.

It’s difficult to make new friends. (= To make new friends is difficult.)

2. (line 2) Its roots go back to many different countries and...

— Its origins can be found in many different countries and...

go back to: trace back

e.g. Some of the traditions go back to the early 1800s.

This practice goes back to at least the 1950s.

3. (line5)RockmusicdevelopedmainlyfromtheinteractionofblackAfricanandwhite

European music.

— Rock music grew mainly from the process by which black African music and white

European music have an effect on each other.

develop: to grow/change over a period of time into a better or more complete form

e.g. Blossoms develop from buds.

Her friendship with him developed slowly.

Note the different meanings of the word “develop” in the following sentences:

Knowledge in this field has been developing rapidly.

It’s hard to believe that a tree can develop from a small seed.

Scientists are developing new drugs to treat the disease.

The children are beginning to develop a sense of responsibility.

The course is designed to help students develop their speaking skills.

Trouble is developing in the cities.

Did you ever get the pictures developed?

interaction: 1. a process by which two or more things affect each other

e.g. Price is determined through the interaction of demand and supply.

the interaction of carbon and hydrogen

2. the activity of talking to other people, working together with them, etc.

e.g. The book examines the interaction between teachers and their students and

between the students themselves.

There’s not enough interaction between the management and the workers.

4. (line12)ThewhiteEuropeans,mostlyEnglishandScots…

— The white Europeans, most of whom were English and Scots…

mostly: used to talk about most members of a group, most occasions, most parts of

something, etc.

e.g. They’re mostly (= Most of them are) teenagers, I think.

The story seemed to be mostly true. (= Most of it seemed true.)

In the smaller villages, it’s mostly (= usually) very quiet at night.

5. (line13)...andinstrumentssuchasguitars,horns,andfiddles.

The phrase “such as” here is used to give examples of “instruments”.

e.g. That sum of money is to cover costs such as travel and accommodation.

Unit 1-2.indd 29 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 34: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

30

It is difficult to get even basic foods such as sugar and bread.

6. (line14)...ofhowrockevolvedfromthesetwotraditions.

— ... of how rock developed gradually from these two traditions.

evolve: to develop or change by degrees

e.g. A new industry evolved from the invention of the television.

The simple plan evolved into a complicated scheme.

7. (line17)twonewformsofmusic

— The two new forms of music refer to the blues and country music.

8. (line 18) Black musicians sang the blues accompanied by a guitar.

— While black musicians sang the blues, they themselves or someone else played a

guitar.

accompany: 1. to play supporting music

e.g. The singer was accompanied at the piano by Gerald Moore.

Miss Jessop accompanied Mr. Bentley on the piano.

The singers were accompanied by string instruments such as fiddles and guitars.

2. go with someone

e.g. She asked me to accompany her to the church.

Would you like me to accompany you to your room?

9. (line19)Thismusicwassimilartoworksongs...

— This music and work songs had features that were the same. / This music almost

had the same features as work songs had...

be similar to: to be nearly alike; have the same features

e.g. Gold is similar in color to brass.

This suit is similar to our uniforms in color.

cf. same: used to mean that two or more people or things are exactly like each other. It

is always used with “the” or “this/that”.

e.g. They wear the same clothes every day. (Not: They wear same clothes ...)

That very same day, Tom phoned him.

At the same time, whites were playing country music…

worksongs: songs people sang while they were working

10. (line21)Thewords“rockandroll”probablycamefromtheblackchurchesinthe

South...

— It is likely that the words “rock and roll” originated from the black churches in the

South...

come from: to have started, been produced or first existed in a particular place, thing or

time

e.g. The term may come from a French word.

The passage she quoted came from Dickens.

Where do you come from originally?

Unit 1-2.indd 30 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 35: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 2 Music

31

11. (line 22) spiritual music: religious music; music relating to people’s religious beliefs

spiritual: relating to deep feelings and beliefs, especially religious beliefs

e.g. Have you ever listened to those spiritual songs of African-American origin?

Traditional ways of life fulfilled both economic and spiritual needs.

Painting helps fill a spiritual need for beauty.

12. (line27)Duringthistimebluesandcountrymusicianshadsomeinfluenceoneach

other.

— During the time from the seventeenth to the twentieth century blues and country

musicians had some effects on each other.

have/exercise/exertaninfluence(on/upon/over): to have an effect on

e.g. His advice had an influence on my choice.

Television has a strong influence on people.

In one way or another towns exerted an influence over the farming population.

13. (line 29) ...became popular in the late nineteenth century.

— ...were liked by a lot of people in the late nineteenth century.

popular: (someone, something, some ideas, etc.) enjoyed, liked, approved of, etc., by a

lot of people

e.g. The Tower of London is the most popular tourist attraction in Britain.

Prof. Lee has always been popular with the students.

cf. popular culture

in the late nineteenth century: “late” means “near to the end of a period of time (or an

event)”

e.g. late summer/spring, in the late eighties

I think he’s in his late twenties.

cf. late in August/the evening/2006

14. (line31)NoonethinksofearlyrockandrollwithoutthinkingofElvisPresley,the

“KingofRockandRoll”.

— When people think of early rock and roll, they will naturally think of Elvis Presley,

the “King of Rock and Roll”.

The structure “No ... without (V-ing) ” emphasizes the fact that people always associate

early rock and roll with Elvis Presley.

e.g. Don’t just say nothing. Tell us what the problem is. (= Don’t be silent ...)

No study of the United States would be complete without a discussion of

immigrants because America is a nation of immigrants.

15. (line33)Hegrewuppoor...whenhegraduatedfromhighschool.

— He spent his childhood living a poor life…when he completed his education at

high school.

“He grew up poor” means “He spent his childhood living a poor life”.

growup:to develop from being a child to being an adult

e.g. What do you want to be when you grow up?

Unit 1-2.indd 31 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 36: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

32

I grew up on farm.

I grew up in Scotland (= I lived in Scotland when I was young).

cf. Trading settlements grew up along the river.

The city grew up originally as a crossing point on the river.

cf. …the influence grew stronger after phonograph records became popular in the late

nineteenth century.

high school: a secondary school in the U.S. that includes grades 9 to 12 or grades 7 to 12

cf. secondary school: any school providing education for young people, usually

between the ages 11 and 18, after primary school but before university

16. (line37) ...and teenagerswentcrazyoverhisamazingvoiceandhisattractive

performances.

— ...and teenagers were very much interested in his amazing voice and his attractive

performances. / ... and teenagers liked ... very much.

crazy: wildly excited; enthusiastic

e.g. The kids went crazy when Michael Jackson appeared.

Both my sons are crazy about old motorbikes.

cf. You must be crazy to go walking in such awful weather.

You’re crazy to agree to buy it without seeing it.

gocrazy: become crazy

e.g. The crowd went crazy when the band came on stage.

The kids went crazy over Superman.

go: (used as a link verb) to be, become

e.g. Has anything gone wrong with your car?

Milk tends to go sour in hot weather.

He must have gone mad.

attractive: causing interest or pleasure, or very pleasing in appearance or sound

e.g. The house was set in attractive countryside near Oxford.

We need to make the club attractive to (= interesting to) a wider range of people.

The houses were situated in an attractive spot, near the river.

17. (line38)Hismusicwasanexcitingmixtureofwhitecountryandblackblues.

— His music was an exciting combination of white country and black blues.

a mixture of: a combination of two or more things that are different

e.g. The city is a mixture of old and new buildings.

We listened to the news with a mixture of surprise and horror.

country: country and western music (c and w) (also country music); popular music

which is based on a type of traditional music from the western and southern US

e.g. I’m a big fan of country.

18. (line40)Intwoyears,hewasanationalphenomenon.

— Two years later, people all over the country sang his songs, imitated his

performances, and even dressed themselves in his way.

Unit 1-2.indd 32 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 37: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 2 Music

33

phenomenon: 1. someone or something extremely successful, often because of unusual

qualities or abilities

e.g. The Beatles were a phenomenon — nobody had heard anything like them before.

Harry’s rapid success made him a phenomenon in the business world.

2. something that exists and can be seen, felt, tasted, etc., especially

something which is unusual or interesting

e.g. Homelessness is not a new phenomenon .

Language is a social and cultural phenomenon.

19. (line42)Elvis’scareerthenwentdownhill.

— Later Elvis’s career became less successful.

godownhill:to become less successful; get worse in social status, health, quality, etc.

e.g. This part of the town used to be fashionable, but it’s starting to go downhill.

After he lost his job, things went downhill.

20. (line 43) ... made a series of bad movies.

— …made a succession of bad movies.

a series of: a number of (things) that come one after another

e.g. a series of meetings / explosions / articles / lectures

There has been a series of accidents on the road.

Staff will hold a series of meetings over the next few weeks.

21. (line 44) ... but his music rarely had the life of his early songs.

— …but his music was hardly as good as his early songs.

22. (line44)Heremainedthesymbolofrockandroll,however,notonlyintheUnited

Statesbutalsoaroundtheworld.

— But he was still thought of as representing rock and roll, not only in the United

States but also around the world.

symbol: 1. someone or something that people think of as representing a particular

quality or idea

e.g. Space exploration provides a symbol of national pride.

She was put under house arrest two years ago but remained a powerful symbol in

last year’s election.

2. a picture or shape that has a particular meaning or represents an idea

e.g. The dove is a symbol of peace.

I frequently use sunflowers as symbols of strength.

cf. sign: a thing that shows that someone /something is present or exists, or that

something may happen

e.g. The doctor listened to the old man’s heart, but she could find no sign of life.

Those black clouds are a sure sign of rain.

not only ... but also: used to emphasize an additional factor or feature

e.g. He not only acts but also writes his own plays.

The place was not only cold but also damp.

Unit 1-2.indd 33 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 38: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

34

23. (line46)...buthismusicdidnotdiewithhim.

— …but his music was still popular in spite of his death.

24. (line 47) ... but the heart and soul of rock is the same heart and soul that Elvis

expressed.

— …but the most important character and spirit of rock remains the same as Elvis

expressed.

IV Summary of the Text

Rock and roll developed from various kinds of music of many countries. But it

was largely the interaction of black African and white European music during the

seventeenth century that influenced the development of rock and roll. From the 17th to

the 20th century these two types of music shaped the music of the world bringing about

two new forms of music, the blues and country music. Rock and roll formed from the

blues of the black and the country music of the white in the Southern United States.

It reached its height with the birth of the electric guitar and the appearance of Elvis

Presley, who, though he died young, remains a symbol of rock and roll today.

V Text-related Information

1. Rock/Rock and Roll/Rock-’n’-Roll:

Rock music emerged during the mid-1950s to become the major popular musical

form of young audience in the United States and Western Europe. Its stylistic scope is

too broad to be encompassed by any single definition; the only feature common to all

rock music is a heavy emphasis on the beat.

It evolved from jazz and the blues.

Rock ’n’ roll’s first superstar was Elvis Presley. With his country-and-western

background, Presley led the way for other “rockabilly” (rock plus hillbilly) artists;

with his spasmodic hip gyrations, he introduced a sexual suggestiveness that outraged

conservative adults; with his legions of teenage fans, he brought to rock ’n’ roll the cult

of personality and became the archetype of the rock star.

Since the 1950s rock music has come all the way through the renewal of rock ’n’

roll in the 1960s, the Beatles, from England, the rock music of the 1970s with much

more subdivisions: hard rock (extremely loud and electronically amplified), mellow

rock (softer, sometimes with acoustic instruments), folk-rock, country-rock (with the

character of folk and country music), heavy metal rock (with something like acid

rock), glitter rock (more of a theatrical approach), new wave rock (something of an old

wave), etc., and then the eclectic 1980s when bands became production-oriented partly

because of the sudden explosion of “vedios” on TV screens.

The scope and significance of rock remains without precedent in the history of

popular music. Beginning as a minority expression on the fringe of American society,

Unit 1-2.indd 34 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 39: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 2 Music

35

it developed into a distinct counterculture during the 1960s, and a decade later had

become a dominant cultural force, affecting and reflecting the moods of American youth

and weaving itself into the very fabric of society.

2. The Blues:

It is a kind of Black folk music characterized by minor harmonies, typically slow

tempo, and melancholy words. Usually it indicates a type of jazz originating among

Afro-Americans, often characterized by themes of complaint or unhappiness. It consists

essentially of a 12-bar chorus made up of three four-measure sequences, in AAB

form, the harmonic basis consisting essentially of chords on the tonic, dominant and

subdominant, and characterized by the use of blue notes.

3. Country Music:

Musical style that originated among whites in rural areas of the southern and

western U.S. The term “country” and “western” music was adopted by the music

industry in 1949 to replace the derogatory hillbilly music. Its roots lie in the music of

the European settlers of the Appalachians and other areas. In the early 1920s the genre

began to be commercially recorded; Fiddlin’ John Carson recorded its first hit. Radio

programs such as Nashville’s Grand Ole Opry and Chicago’s National Barn Dance fueled

its growth, and growing numbers of musicians, such as the Carter Family and Jimmie

Rodgers, began performing on radio and in recording studios. With the migration of

Southern whites to industrial cities in the 1930s and 1940s, country music was exposed

to new influences, such as blues and gospel music. Its nostalgic bias, with its lyrics

about poverty, heartbreak, and homesickness, held special appeal during a time of great

population shifts. In the 1930s “singing cowboy” film stars, such as Gene Autry, altered

country lyrics to produce a synthetic “western” music. Other variants include western

swing and honky-tonk. In the 1940s there was an effort to return to country’s root

values, but commercialization proved a stronger influence, and in the 1950s and 1960s

country music became a huge commercial enterprise. Popular singers often recorded

songs in a Nashville style, while many country music recordings employed lush

orchestral backgrounds. Country music has become increasingly acceptable to urban

audiences, retaining its vitality with diverse performers such as Willie Nelson, Waylon

Jennings, Dolly Parton, Randy Travis, Garth Brooks, Emmylou Harris, and Lyle Lovett.

Despite the influence of other styles, it has retained an unmistakable character as one of

the few truly indigenous American musical styles.

Unit 1-2.indd 35 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 40: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

36

Text B

The First American Music

I Introduction

1. Introductory Remarks

Music plays a very important role in our life. It brings us happiness and enjoyment.

Some songs remind us of our childhood and some other songs remind us of the people

we love. On many important occasions, we sing a special song. For example, there are

special songs for weddings, for birthdays and for funerals.

Music also brings the people of the world together. Even people do not share the

same language, they can share the same music. It is music that helps people of different

countries understand each other better.

In this passage, we are going to learn something about the first American music and

the role music plays in American life.

2. Introductory Questions

1. What role does music play in our life?

2. What can music bring to us?

3. How did American music begin?

4. What role does modern science play in the development of American music?

5. Do you know any American musicians?

II Outline

Paras. 1-- 6

Information about American music

a. The mixing of people and music created American music.

b. Music is a very important part of American people’s life.

c. Music is a part of the history of America.

d. Modern science has also changed music.

e. Music is one of America’s most important exports.

Paras. 7--12

The Sources of American music

a. Songs of native Americans

b. Church songs brought by first British people

c. Church music brought by other European people

d. Drinking and dancing music

e. Religious music played at camp meetings

Text B

Unit 1-2.indd 36 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 41: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 2 Music

37

III Detailed Study of the Text

1. (line2)...havecometoAmericafromallovertheworld...

— ... have come to America from all parts of the world...

all over: everywhere; in every part

e.g. They said they had cleaned up but there were bottles all over the place.

I looked all over the house to find the book.

Thousands of people from all over the world come to visit the university town.

2. (line 3) This mixing of people and music has created American music.

— The birth of American music has been the result of the mixture of people and

music from the different parts of the world.

create: 1. to cause something to exist; make something new or original

e.g. a newly created holiday resort

The government plans to create more job opportunities for young people.

2. to have something as a result; produce a feeling, situation, etc.

e.g. create confusion

His shabby appearance creates a bad impression.

The scheme probably created more problems than it solved.

3. (line4)Musicisfordancing,drinking,eating,lovingandthinking.

— People sing songs and enjoy music while they are dancing, drinking, eating,

expressing love or thinking.

4. (line 5) Some songs remind us of our childhood or youth.

— Some songs cause us to remember / to have a memory of our childhood or youth.

remind someone of/that: to cause someone to remember

e.g. The music reminded me of my old friends.

Please remind me of my promise if I forget it.

She had to remind him that he would have an examination.

5. (line6)Manyimportantoccasions,likeweddingsandfunerals,havespecialmusic.

— People sing songs specially prepared for many special and important events such as

weddings and funerals.

“like” is used as a preposition, meaning “such as; for example”. Weddings and funerals

are examples of important occasions.

e.g. I prefer clothes which are made out of natural materials like cotton and wool.

occasion: a particular time, especially when something happens or has happened, or a

special or formal event

e.g. I saw Bob Dylan play in 1968 and on that occasion he was simply brilliant.

At the wedding he sang a song specially written for the occasion.

6. (line 8) The Star-Spangled Banner: the national anthem / national song of the US

7. (line 11) It expresses the problems and feelings of its people.

— Music shows the problems and feelings of American people.

Unit 1-2.indd 37 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 42: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

38

8. (line15)Inventions…havechangedthewayweplayandlistentomusic.

— Inventions … have changed the way in which we play and listen to music.

Note that in the above sentence “in which” or “that” is omitted after “the way”.

e.g. We need tools to help us change the way in which we work.

I didn’t like the way (that/ in which) she spoke to me.

9. (line 18) ... an important form of international communication.

— …an important form of exchanging thoughts, feelings, ideas and information

between America and other countries.

communication: giving successfully (thoughts, feelings, ideas or information) to other

people through speech, writing, bodily movements or signals; understanding each other

and having a good relationship

e.g. Television is an increasingly important means of communication.

There is very little communication between mother and daughter (= they do not

have a good relationship).

Good communication is important in any relationship.

10. (line 20) folk song: a simple song (in the style) of working or country people often with

repeating words and tune

cf. folkmusic,folkdance,folksinger

11. (line 20) pop: modern music that is popular with young people, and usually consists of

simple tunes with a strong beat

cf. popsinger/concert/festival,apoprecord,popculture

12. (line20)aroundtheworld:all over the world

e.g. Young people around the world face many different challenges and problems.

World Heart Day is now celebrated by members and non-members alike in more

than 100 countries around the world.

13. (line 20) Music is one of America’s most important exports.

— American music is one of America’s most important ways to introduce its people,

history and culture into other countries.

14. (line21)Itbringsthepeopleoftheworldtogether.

— Music helps the people of the world to know each other better.

bring ... together: to cause people to be friendly with each other

e.g. The disaster brought the community together.

Any attack by a foreign power will inevitably bring the people of a country together.

The loss of their child brought the parents together.

15. (line 22) ... they can share the same music.

— ... they can understand the same music.

share: to have in common

e.g. She and Reid shared the same tastes and interests.

Moore is the only person who shares my opinion.

16. (line 25) the juke box: a music machine, found in places of entertainment, pubs, etc.

Unit 1-2.indd 38 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 43: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 2 Music

39

which plays records when a coin is put into it

17. (line34)Notallearlymusicwaschurchmusic.

— Some early music was church music and some not.

cf. No early music was church music.

e.g. Not all Americans like hamburgers. (= Some Americans like hamburgers and some

don’t.)

Not all birds can fly.

18. (line35)...andfiddle(violin)musicandEuropeansongsentertainedthepeople.

— ... and fiddle (violin) music and European songs gave pleasure to the people and

provided them with something interesting and amusing.

entertain: to keep a group of people interested or amused

e.g. She entertained the children with stories, songs and drama.

A museum should aim to entertain as well as educate.

19. (line 36) coast: the land next to or close to the sea

e.g. We drove along the Pacific coast to Seattle.

When the tanker sank, fifty thousand gallons of oil went into sea three miles off the

coast. (= in the sea three miles from the land)

cf. shore: the land along the edge of a large area of water, such as an ocean or lake

e.g. We could see a boat about a mile from the shore.

The usual word for the land at the edge of a sea or lake is “shore”. But when we are

talking about a country, or a large area of a country, we call the land next to the sea the

“coast”.

20. (line 37) ... and far apart.

— ... and far away from each other.

apart: if things or people are apart, they have an amount of space between them

e.g. Joel stood apart from the group, frowning.

The two cities are less than 30 km apart.

21. (line39)Campmeetingsoftenwentonforseveraldays.

— Camp meetings often lasted for several days.

go on: to continue without stopping or changing

e.g. This war’s been going on for years and there seems to be no way of ending it.

The noise went on for at least two hours.

The present state of affairs cannot be allowed to go on.

We can’t go on like this — we seem to be always arguing.

22. (line 42) People clapped their hands and tapped their feet to the music.

— People hit their hands each other and hit their feet lightly against the ground in

time to the music.

clap one’s hands: to hit one’s hands against each other many times to make a sound

that shows one’s approval, agreement, or enjoyment

e.g. When the teacher said that Nadia answered everything correctly, the whole class

clapped

Unit 1-2.indd 39 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 44: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

40

their hands.

She clapped her hands in excitement.

tap one’s feet: to hit the floor gently with one’s feet

e.g. I was tapping my feet to the music.

She tapped her feet as she did the math in her head.

cf. knock: to repeatedly hit (something), producing a noise

e.g. knock on the window, knock on/at the door

IV Summary of the Text

Music in America has come from all over the world, beginning formally with the

arrival of Columbus in 1492. American music has become a part of the history of America,

though it has changed a lot because of modern inventions. It has even helped foreigners

understand American culture. Its history goes back first to native Americans before

Columbus and then to people from Britain and people of other countries, who mainly

brought religious music. More recently, it goes back to religious camp meetings held for

farmers who moved west in the nineteenth century.

V Text-related Information

1. Cbristopher Columbus: (1451–1506) the Italian navigator who was the first European

to discover America in 1492, though he mistakenly thought he had found Asia.

2. American Music:

The history of American music may be roughly divided into three periods: (1) the

colonial period (the 17th and 18th centuries), dominated by British influence; (2) the

period from about 1800 to about 1930, when the United States depended heavily for its

musical culture on the importation of music and professional musicians from continental

Europe; and (3) the period since about 1930 to the present, during which American music

has attained an international importance equal to that of European music.

3. Folk Music:

It lives in oral tradition and is learned “by ear,” without the use of a written form,

primarily in rural cultures. Because folk music is relatively simple in a technical sense, it

can be performed by most members of society and lives in the traditions of families and

closely-knit social groups. It is frequently associated with the activities that it accompanies,

such as ritual, dance, and work. In those societies that have classical music traditions

under the patronage of elite institutions, folk music is often thought of as the music of

the lower educational and socio-economic strata. Although folk music is found in all so-

called high cultures, the usefulness of the concept is most conveniently used to designate a

type of music in Western culture. In the modern world folk music has assumed new roles,

Unit 1-2.indd 40 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 45: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 2 Music

41

including the reinforcement of ethnic identities, the advocacy of social change (as in the

U.S. civil rights movement), and the building of national consciousness in heterogeneous

nations. Folk music continues to be a vital force in the world’s musical life. Since the

advent of rock music, American popular music has become a major industry, capable of

employing thousands of talented young musicians, and exercising a significant musical

influence around the world.

4. The Star-Spangled Banner:

American national anthem, beginning, “O say can you see by the dawn’s early light.”

The words were written by Francis Scott Key, a young Washington attorney who, during

the War of 1812, sailed to the British fleet to obtain the release of a captured American.

Key was detained by the British and witnessed from ship the bombardment of Fort

McHenry during the night of Sept. 13–14, 1814. Defended under the command of Major

George Armistead, the fort withstood the attack, and the sight of the American flag flying

at dawn inspired Key’s verses, which were written on the way ashore in the morning. After

circulating as a handbill, the lyrics were published in a Baltimore newspaper on Sept.

20, 1814. The tune was taken from the English popular song “To Anacreon in Heaven.”

Although the army and the navy had for some years regarded “The Star-Spangled Banner”

as the national anthem, its designation as such first became official by executive order of

President Wilson in 1916. This order was confirmed by act of Congress in 1931. The large

flag that inspired the anthem, with 15 stars and stripes and originally 30-by-42-ft (9.1-by-

12.8-m), has been in the collection of the Smithsonian Institution since 1912.

Skills

Translation Skills

本单元的英译汉技能练习的重点与第一单元相同,仍然是英译汉中词义的选择。本单元练习通

过翻译develop这个词在不同上下文中的意义说明翻译过程中词义选择的重要性。

Knowledge in this field has been developing very rapidly. 这个领域的知识发展非常快。

Chicago developed into a big city in the late 1800s. 芝加哥在19世纪后期发展成了一个大城市。

The children are beginning to develop a sense of responsibility. 这些孩子正开始形成责任感。

The course is designed to help students develop their speaking skills. 该课程的目的是为了帮

助学生培养他们的演讲技能。

She’s developed some very strange habits lately. 她最近养成了一些非常古怪的习惯。

The plane developed engine trouble and was forced to land. 飞机出现了发动机故障,被迫

Skills

Unit 1-2.indd 41 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 46: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

42

着陆。

Further problems may develop if you do not deal with this now. 如果现在不予以处理,以后

可能会产生更多问题。

I’d like to develop this idea a little more fully before I go on to my next point. 在讲下一点之

前,我想把这一概念阐述得更充分些。

Guided Writing

本单元的基础训练与第一单元的内容相同,是连词成句。在练习中要提醒学生注意主谓一致,

注意动词的时态。

本单元的实用英语写作部分是要求学生掌握英文信封的格式,并能够用英文正确地书写信封。

英文信封的写法与中文信封写法不同。习惯上,收信人的姓名、地址依次写在信封的中偏右下的地

方。写信人的姓名、地址写在信封的左上角,邮票一般贴在右上角。注意英文地址和中文地址的顺

序不同。中文地址由大到小,而英文地址刚好相反,由小到大。

地址中的一些常用缩略语:

Av /Ave = Avenue La /Ln= Lane Dr = Drive

Est = Estate Pde = Parade Pk = Park

Pl = Place Rd = Road Sq = Square

Gdns = Gardens St = Street Ter = Terrace

Blvd = Boulevard Cir =Circle Rm = Room

Ste = Suite Apt = Apartment N = North

S = South E = East W = West

美国的州名可用缩略语,如:

Alabama = AL Alaska = AK California = CA

Iowa = IA New Hampshire = NH New Jersey = NJ

West Virginia = WV Wisconsin = WI Washington = WA

Reading Skills — Reading for the Main ldea (2)

The reading practice in this unit is the continuation of that of Unit One, focusing on

topic sentences and concluding sentences.

A topic sentence is a sentence that expresses the main idea of a paragraph. It tells

the reader what to expect about the information that will follow. By finding out a topic

sentence in a paragraph, we can quickly grasp the main idea of the paragraph.

As shown in the last unit, the most prominent position of a topic sentence is the

beginning of a paragraph. When this occurs, the first sentence will be a general statement

that will introduce a subject and will then be followed by sentences that will support that

statement in some important way:

Unit 1-2.indd 42 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 47: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 2 Music

43

Sleep problems can be avoided if you follow a few simple guidelines. First,

don’t drink alcoholic beverages or drinks with caffeine before bedtime. Next, do not

exercise within three hours of bedtime. Finally, plan a sleep routine. Every day, go to

bed at the same time and get up at the same time.

A topic sentence can be in the middle of a paragraph. This will occur in two

circumstances:

1. Sometimes, a paragraph begins with an introductory sentence that is meant to grab

your attention. It may be a very general statement that looks like a topic sentence, but then

is followed by a sentence that changes direction. This sentence is the one that is explained

in the rest of the paragraph, and it becomes the topic sentence:

Some people fall asleep easily. They drop off as soon as their heads hit the

pillows. Others aren’t so lucky. They toss and turn well into the night. Fortunately,

there are solutions to sleeplessness. In many cases, one can avoid sleep problems by

following a few simple guidelines. First sleepless people should refrain from drinking

alcoholic beverages or drinks with caffeine before bedtime. Next, they should not

exercise within three hours of bedtime. Finally, they need plan a sleep routine. Every

day, they should go to bed at the same time and get up at the same time.

2. You will also find a topic sentence in the middle of a paragraph when the paragraph

starts with a question.

A question will never be a topic sentence. Look for the answer to the question — this

will be the topic sentence of the paragraph. Of course, if the answer to a question is “Yes,”

or “No,” this will not be your topic sentence.

Do you know what to do if you have trouble sleeping? In many cases, one

can avoid sleep problems by following a few simple guidelines. First, don’t drink

alcoholic beverages or drinks with caffeine before bedtime. Next, do not exercise

within three hours of bedtime. Finally, plan a sleep routine. Every day, go to bed at

the same time and get up at the same time.

The explanation that follows this one-word answer will be the topic sentence.

A topic sentence can appear at the end of a paragraph. In this case, the supports will

be given first, and the topic sentence will end the paragraph either as a summary or a

conclusion.

To avoid sleep problems, you should not drink alcoholic beverages or drinks

with caffeine before bedtime. Another way to avoid sleep problems is to not exercise

within three hours of bedtime. A final way to prevent sleep problems is to plan a

sleep routine. Every day, go to bed at the same time and get up at the same time. As

can be seen, sleep problems can be avoided by following the above simple guidelines

A summary will bring together all of the points made in the paragraph. A conclusion

is where all of the points lead up to a final, important point.

Finally, a topic sentence can sometimes be found as the first and the last sentences in

a paragraph, as in the following example:

Unit 1-2.indd 43 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 48: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

44

One can avoid sleep problems by following a few simple guidelines. First,

don’t drink alcoholic beverages or drinks with caffeine before bedtime. Next, do not

exercise within three hours of bedtime. Finally, plan a sleep routine. Every day, go to

bed at the same time and get up at the same time. If you follow these guidelines, you

will be able to avoid problems with sleeping.

(Adapted from B. Belroy: http://www.cerritos.edu/reading/tutorials.htm)

Another effective way to discover the main idea of a paragraph is to read the

concluding sentence of the paragraph if there is one.

Sometimes, a paragraph finishes with a concluding sentence, which rounds off or

concludes the paragraph. The concluding sentence is similar to, but not exactly the same

as, the topic sentence.

Example 1

Choosing a college or university can be difficult. [Topic sentence] The most

difficult part is finding a university that prepares you well for your future career.

In order to get a good job, the curriculum that is taught must be thorough and up-

to-date. In addition, the professors must be highly qualified and respected in their

fields. Another difficulty in choosing a university or college is affordability. You need

to be able to pay the tuition fees and living expenses. Some institutions might be

able to offer you scholarships if you cannot afford the fees. A good location is also

very important when choosing a school. The environment should be safe and quiet

to facilitate studying. Moreover, there should be possibilities near the school for part

time or summer jobs in your major, so you can get some practical work experience.

You should consider all of these points carefully so you can choose the most

appropriate college or university for you. [Concluding sentence]

Example 2

The Rideau Canal is one of the wonders of Ontario, with a long history. [Topic

sentence] The canal was all built by hand in the 19th century, supervised by Colonel

John. It was finished in 1832 and tourists have flocked to see it since then. It is over

202 kilometers long and stretches from Kingston right into Ottawa. Today, the canal is

maintained by Parks Canada. The Rideau has had a long and interesting history and

will have a promising future. [Concluding sentence]

In many instances, the concluding sentence may also provide a bridge or

pointer to the content of the next paragraph:

My senior year of high school was challenging. [Topic sentence] My first

challenge at Wilson High School was studying enough to make good grades and stay

on the honor roll. I often studied past midnight, even though I had to get up at 6:00 a.m.

Unit 1-2.indd 44 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 49: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 2 Music

45

to be ready in time to catch the school bus. When I was studying for my chemistry

mid-term in Ms. Beasley’s class, I never went to bed at all — but I made an “A” on

the exam! The challenges I encountered during my senior year in high school help to

prepare me for college. [Concluding sentence] (Adapted from: http://itech.pjc.edu/

cpwriting/para_writing/activity.htm)

A note of caution: Sometimes, there is no topic sentence in a paragraph, or

there is no concluding sentence.

Key to the Exercises

Text A

First Reading

Exercise 1

1. C 2. D 3. D 4. C 5. A

While Reading

1. The blues and country music.

2. “this time” refers to the time from the 17th century to the 20th century.

Second Reading

Exercise 2

1. T 2. T 3. T 4. F 5. T

Exercise 3

Development of rock and roll

1. Interaction The music of both black Africans and white Europeans, who came to America during the 17th century.

A. Black Africans: heavy drumbeatsrough singing voicethe calling of a melody & answer of a chorus

B. White Europeans: less heavy beatstrong melody

Key to the Exercises

Unit 1-2.indd 45 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 50: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

46

instruments such as guitars, horns and fiddles2. Two forms of music: both developed by the black and the white musicians in the

southern United States A. the blues: played by black musicians B. country music: played by the whites3. Instruments: Both fiddles and guitars played an important role in the de-

velopment of rock and roll.4. Elvis Presley: Known as “King of Rock and Roll”, he grew up poor but

became a national phenomenon; his career went downhill, yet he still remained a symbol of rock and roll. Although he died young, his music lives forever and always expresses the heart and soul of rock and roll.

Oral Practice

Exercise 4

(For reference.)

It is difficult to say exactly how the music we call “rock” or “rock and roll” began. Rock

music developed mainly from the interaction of black African and white European music.

Black Africans used heavy drumbeats, a rough singing voice, and the calling of a melody

and answer of a chorus. The white Europeans used a stronger melody, a less heavy beat, and

instruments such as guitars, horns, and fiddles. Black musicians sang the blues accompanied

by a guitar. This music was similar to work songs. The words “rock and roll” probably came

from the black churches in the South, where people sang spiritual music and danced to the

strong rhythms, which they called “rocking and reeling”.

No one thinks of early rock and roll without thinking of Elvis Presley, the “King of Rock

and Roll”. His music was an exciting mixture of white country and black blues. With his long

hair and tight pants, he became a teenage idol. In two years, he was a national phenomenon.

Vocabulary and Structure

Exercise 5

1. influence 2. mixture 3. performance 4. symbol 5. attractive

6. career 7. traditions 8. interactions 9. accompanied 10. amazing

Exercise 6

1. have influence on 2. grew up 3. At the age of

4. not only… but also… 5. goes back to 6. such as

7. evolved from 8. is… similar to 9. a series of

10. went downhill

Unit 1-2.indd 46 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 51: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 2 Music

47

Exercise 7

1. to 2. up 3. from 4. on 5. At

6. from 7. back 8. from 9. at 10. of

Exercise 8

VERBS play role football music experiment study derviceplay ★ ★ ★

perform ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★work test piano task operation part duty

play ★ ★perform ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★

1. perform an experiment /a test 2. play the piano

3. perform this operation 4. perform this task /work

5. perform a play 6. plays a very important role /part

7. play football 8. perform a study

9. playing /performing music 10. perform community service

Exercise 9

1. grew up 2. grew 3. raised 4. grew up

5. shouting 6. to pick up 7. mostly 8. most

Exercise 10

1. It is useless to tell him what to do.

2. It is easy to see why Elvis’s music did not die with him.

3. It is impossible for him to get the money now.

4. It is a particular pleasure to talk with him the whole evening.

5. It makes me feel sad to see you sitting all alone.

Exercise 11

1. Elvis Presley was not only the “King” but also the most famous entertainer of the 20th

century.

2. I have to thank Elvis, not only for changing my life, but also for giving me all the friends!

3. Television is not only boring, but also time-wasting.

4. Not only our society but also the people in it have changed.

5. Not only the father but also the daughter wanted to see each other.

Unit 1-2.indd 47 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 52: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

48

Translation Practice

Exercise 12

1. 摇滚乐主要由非洲黑人音乐和欧洲白人音乐相互交流而发展起来的。

2. 这个村庄已经发展成一个大城市。

3. 他们正计划开发这个地区。

4. 她对摇滚乐产生了兴趣。

5. 这婴儿看样子正患感冒。

6. 你曾冲印过这些照片吗?

7. 她正在参加一个课程学习以提高自己的计算机应用技能。

8. 科学家们一直在研制新药。

Exercise 13

1. It is difficult to talk about early rock and roll without mentioning Elvis Presley.

2. This song has become popular not only in the United States but also around the world.

3. The root of the practice goes back to the 18th century.

4. His view is similar to mine.

5. This teacher still has a strong influence on me.

Writing Practice

Exercise 14

Date 8 Oct. 2007

Salutation Dear Peter,

Opening Thank you for your letter which arrived yesterday. I was sorry to hear about your accident, and I am glad to hear you’re all right now.

Main part I’m really pleased you’re coming to this country again. Would you like to come and stay with us while you’re here? You’d be welcome to stay as long as you like.

Luckily I’ll be on holiday when you’re in England, so I could show you around. Bournemouth is an interesting and lively place. There’s quite a bit of night-life. There are good beaches, and there’s some very good scenery if you like that sort of thing. Of course, there are plenty of good country pubs.

I’m glad to say we’re all well.

Final paragraph I’m really looking forward to seeing you again. Please write soon and say when you can come.Please give my regards to your parents.

Complimentary closeSignature

Yours,Ahmet

Unit 1-2.indd 48 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 53: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 2 Music

49

Exercise 15

Wang XiaohongRm 203 No 7 Jiefang Rd.Nanjing 210016P.R.C.

Jane HarradineNorth Seattle Community College9600 College Way NorthSeattle WS 98103U.S.A.

Dictation

Exercise 16

1. 13 2. musical 3. graduated 4. instead of 5. singing career

6. truck driver 7. for his mother’s birthday 8. Twenty thousand copies

9. manager 10. he also made his first film

Text B

First Reading

Exercise 1

1. F 2. T 3. T 4. T

5. T 6. F 7. F 8. F

Second Reading

Exercise 2

1. People coming from all over the world have brought their music with them and the mixing

of people and music has created American music.

2. Some songs remind us of our childhood or youth. Others remind us of the people we love.

3. The Star-Spangled Banner.

4. It has changed music. Inventions like records, radio, movies, electric instruments, tape

recorders, and videos have changed the way we play and listen to music.

5. Understanding American music can help us understand American people, their history

and culture.

6. For religious freedom.

7. To begin new farms further west.

8. To bring the country people together in a large group.

Stamp

Unit 1-2.indd 49 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 54: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

50

Reading Skills

Exercise 3

1. Topic sentence: There are three reasons why Canada is one of the best countries in the

world.

Concluding sentence: As a result, Canada is a desirable place to live.

2. Topic sentence: There are three reasons why I want to learn English.

Concluding sentence: For all these reasons, I am very excited about learning English.

3. Topic sentence: Boxing, according to the statistics, would seem less dangerous than other

sports.

Concluding sentence: Therefore, if being killed is the only criteria for measuring the danger

of a sport, then boxing would not be the most dangerous; however the danger of non-fatal

but serious injury has not been taken into account.

Exercise 4

1. The first sentence: Using robots in scientific research provides many advantages over using

real animals.

2. The last sentence: So, it is not strange that many people think of this great Swedish

inventor as a man of many contrasts.

3. Both the first and last sentences: My blind date last night was a disaster…That’s the last

blind date I’ll ever have.

Vocabulary Practice

Exercise 5

1. Festival 2. religions 3. native 4. entertain 5. clapped

6. occasion 7. exports 8. invention 9. communication 10. tapped

Exercise 6

1. remind… of 2. clapped their hands 3. went on 4. far apart

5. all over the world 6. bringing… together

7. tapped her feet /clapped her hands 8. bring… to

Expanding Your Vocabulary

Exercise 7

1. conditional 2. borrowers 3. conversational 4. occasional 5. traditional

6. employer 7. personal 8. translator 9. natural 10. operator

Exercise 8

1. sang 2. influenced 3. moved 4. paid 5. who

6. called 7. because 8. sing 9. looking for 10. suggested

Unit 1-2.indd 50 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 55: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 2 Music

51

参考译文

Text A

摇  滚  乐

很难说我们所说的“摇滚乐”是如何起源的。它的根可以追溯到许多不同的国家、不同类型的

音乐和音乐家。 摇滚乐主要由非洲黑人音乐和欧洲白人音乐发展而来。17世纪抵达美洲的欧洲人和

黑奴各有其不同的音乐。非洲黑人惯用重击的鼓声、粗糙刺耳的声音、喊叫的曲调和齐声应答。欧

洲白人,主要是英格兰人和苏格兰人,则常用较强烈的旋律、不太重的鼓声以及诸如吉他、喇叭和

提琴等乐器。摇滚乐的历史便是从这两种传统音乐发展而来的历史。

从17世纪到20世纪,美国南部的音乐家们形成了两种音乐形式:通常由黑人演奏的“布鲁

斯”(伤感的黑人民歌)和白人演奏的乡村音乐。黑人音乐家用吉他伴奏演唱“布鲁斯”。这种音乐类

似劳动号子,叙述痛苦忧伤,歌词常重复多次。“摇滚”一词可能来源于南方黑人的教堂,人们在那

里唱着圣歌,并随着强烈的节奏舞蹈,这种节奏称为“摇摆和旋转”。同时,白人演奏乡村音乐,

这种音乐大多是传统的舞曲和叙述悲伤故事的慢拍子歌曲。歌手们用弦乐器如提琴和吉他伴奏。

在此期间,“布鲁斯”音乐家与乡村音乐家之间相互有了一些影响,到19世纪末唱片普及以后,

这种影响变得强烈起来。电吉他的诞生使40年代的乡村音乐和“布鲁斯”音乐发生了变化。电吉他

的声音成了摇滚乐的声音。人们一想到早期的摇滚乐一定会想到“摇滚乐之王”埃尔维斯·普莱斯

利。埃尔维斯是一个普通的男孩,在贫穷中长大,在教堂里学会了唱歌,中学毕业后当上了一名

卡车司机。谁也不曾想到,这个背着吉他的青年会改变流行文化。但是自从他在孟菲斯录制了两首

“布鲁斯”歌曲以后,一切都变了。他唱遍了南方各地,青少年们为他那惊人的嗓音和迷人的表演

而疯狂。他演唱的音乐把白人的乡村音乐和黑人的“布鲁斯”音乐融为一体,非常激动人心。他留

长发,穿紧身裤的形象成了青少年们的偶像。两年以后,他便风靡全国。

后来,埃尔维斯的事业便走向下坡。他参了军,不再表演,又拍了一系列蹩脚电影。他继续录

唱片,但他的音乐缺少了他早期歌曲的生命力。然而,不仅在美国,而且在全世界,他仍然是摇

滚乐的象征。他死于1977年,年仅42岁,但他的音乐并未因他的死亡而消失。摇滚乐不断发展和变

化,但摇滚乐的核心和灵魂仍然是埃尔维斯所表现的那个核心和灵魂。

Text B

最早的美国音乐

第一批欧洲人是随哥伦布于1492年来到美洲的。自那时起,人们从欧洲、非洲和亚洲等世界各

地来到美洲,他们同时也带来了各自的音乐。人的交融和音乐的交融便产生了美国音乐。 音乐是我

们生活中很重要的组成部分。音乐可以伴舞、伴饮、助餐,表达爱情和思想。有些歌曲能使我们想

起童年和青年时代。还有一些歌曲会使我们想起我们所爱的人。许多重要场合,如婚礼和葬礼,都

有专门的音乐。每一个国家都有自己的国歌,如美国的《星条旗》。在美国,中学和大学还有自己

的校歌。

Unit 1-2.indd 51 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 56: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

52

音乐是美国历史的一个组成部分。音乐能表达美国人民的困惑和情感。随着岁月的流逝,音乐

也在发展和变化。

现代科学也改变了音乐。唱片、收音机、电影、电声乐器、磁带录音机以及录像机的发明,改

变了我们演奏和欣赏音乐的方式。它们使得音乐成为国际交流的一种重要形式。

美国音乐,从最早的民歌到现代的“流行音乐”,在全世界都是有名的。音乐是美国最重要

的文化输出之一,它把世界人民联结在一起。即使当人们无法理解同一种语言时,他们能欣赏同

一种音乐。许多人通过唱歌来学习和练习英语。了解美国音乐有助于了解美国人,了解他们的历

史和文化。

因此,正如一首歌中所唱的,“往自动电唱机里投10美分,朋友。”让我们来听听音乐吧。

美洲土著人在哥伦布到达之前就居住在美洲了。他们在许多场合都要唱歌,用鼓和其他一些乐

器进行伴奏。舞蹈和音乐是他们生活和宗教的一个重要组成部分。在一些特定的节日里,你仍然能

听到美洲土著人的音乐,看到他们的舞蹈。

最早来到美洲的不列颠人对宗教是很虔诚的。他们为追求宗教自由而来。他们的歌曲很简单,

在教堂里也不使用乐器。

不久以后,信仰不同形式基督教的人们来到美国。他们从欧洲带来了不同类型的教堂音乐,在

教堂内使用乐器,如管风琴和钢琴。

早期音乐并不都是教堂音乐。有的人喜欢饮酒和跳舞。许多酒馆开门营业、并用提琴(小提琴)音

乐和欧洲歌曲愉悦顾客。

美国农民不久离开了东海岸,开始进一步向西开辟新的农场。这些农场又大又分散。没有多少

城镇和教堂。宗教领袖们(称为传道士)骑着马在乡村各地向农民们传道。

为了把乡村中的人们集合成一个大的团体,这些传道士们便举行“野营布道会”。这种宗教聚会

在大帐篷里进行,有时有数千人前往听道。野营布道会常常进行数日。人们唱着流行的宗教歌曲。

这种歌曲的音乐很活泼。人们随着音乐的节拍,拍手跺脚。第一次野营布道会于1800年举行,这种

集会现在还在进行。许多流行歌星,例如埃尔维斯·普莱斯利,就是在这种集会上学会唱歌,并喜

欢上音乐的。

Unit 1-2.indd 52 16/4/15 上午10:56

Page 57: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Developing a Positive Attitude

Unit

3

ObjectivesObjectivesObjectives

Text A Text B

Words

positive, curious, complain, affect,

reflect, intensive, decline, victim,

scared, release, fragment, relatively

internal, momentary, transition,

awareness, column, communicate,

favorite, volunteer, trait, participate,

mainstream, precious

Phrases and

Expressions

in a bad mood, react to, the bottom

line, reflect on, go through, operate

on, instead of, hold up, point out, take

place, as if, after all

tune in to, what if, in turn, divide

into, write down, lead to, help out,

feel down, participate in, focus on

Collocation take + objective make + objective

Confusable Words receive/accept, affect/effect, cause/reason, live/alive

Structures

Jerry lived because of his amazing attitude.

I often thought about him when I made a choice about life instead of

reacting to it.

Translation

Practice词义引申

Writing Practice Write Correct Sentences / Design Name Cards

Reading Skills Reading for Details (1): Understanding Listing

Expanding Your

Vocabulary

re + write → rewrite, re + connect → reconnect, re + marry → remarry,

employ + ee → employee, train + ee → trainee, absent → absentee53

Unit 1-3.indd 53 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 58: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

54

Text A

Attitude Is Everything

I Introduction

1. Introductory Remarks

What attitude do we hold to life? How do we feel when we are having a bad day?

What is our reaction when something bad happens? The passage we are going to read

is about a guy who was always in a good mood and always had something positive to

say. He was the manager of a restaurant. He had several waiters who had followed him

around from restaurant to restaurant. They said they follow him just because of his

attitude. Then, what was his attitude to life? Why was he always positive in life? And

what can we learn from his attitude?

2. Introductory Questions

1. Why kind of person was Jerry?

2. Why did some waiters follow Jerry around from restaurant to restaurant?

3. What did Jerry do when an employee was having a bad day?

4. What did Jerry do when someone came to him complaining?

5. What did Jerry think of life is about?

II Outline

Paras. 1-- 6

Jerry was the kind of guy you love to hate.

a. always holding a positive attitude

b. a unique manager

c. his view on a positive attitude to life

Para. 7 The infl uence of Jerry’s positive attitude on the author.

Paras. 8 -- 18

The robbery that tested Jerry’s attitude.

a. how the robbery took place

b. he was hurt in the robbery

c. the fi rst thing going through his mind when the robbery took place

d. how he managed to stay alive

Para. 19 Conclusion: attitude is everything.

Text A

Unit 1-3.indd 54 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 59: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 3 Developing a Positive Attitude

55

III Detailed Study of the Text

1. Attitude Is Everything:

— Attitude is more important than anything else.

be /mean /everything (to someone): to be more valuable or important than anyone or

anything else

e.g. Beauty isn’t everything, you know.

Sarah and Robert mean everything to each other.

Money isn’t everything (= the most important thing).

His children are everything to him (= the most important part of his life).

2. (line 1) Jerry was the kind of guy you love to hate.

— Jerry was the type of man you take pleasure in disliking him.

guy: 1. (informal) a man

e.g. He’s a really nice guy.

Jake’s a really tough guy.

2. (pl. mainly US) used to address a group of people of either sex

e.g. Come on, you guys, let’s go.

Hey you guys! Where are you going?

love to hate: used for saying someone takes pleasure in disliking someone or

something

e.g. She’s the character that viewers love to hate.

And why do so many people love to hate Microsoft?

3. (line 1) He was always in a good mood and always had something positive to say.

— He was always cheerful /happy and positive and always said something good.

mood: the way you feel at a particular time

e.g. You’re in a good mood this morning!

Her mood seemed to change during the course of the conversation.

positive: 1. feeling happy about your life and your future; good or useful

e.g. There was a very positive response to our new design — people seemed very

pleased with it.

You’ve got to be more positive about your work.

Write down all the positive things about your life.

2. certain and without any doubt

e.g. Are you positive there’s been no mistake?

We’d met before, I was positive about that.

4. (line 2) When someone would ask him how he was doing, he would reply, “If I were

any better, I would be twins!”

— When other people would ask him if he was well or happy, he would reply that he

was very satisfi ed with everything.

Jerry’s reply “If I were any better, I would be twins!” indicates that he felt very happy

with life.

Unit 1-3.indd 55 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 60: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

56

5. (line 5) He was a unique manager because he had several waiters who had followed

him around from restaurant to restaurant.

— He was a very unusual manger who was different from other managers because he

had several waiters who had followed him wherever he worked.

unique: being the only existing one of its type or, more generally, unusual or special in

some way

e.g. I’d recognize your handwriting anywhere – it’s unique.

Do not miss this unique opportunity to buy all six pans at half the recommended

price.

follow someone around: to follow someone everywhere they go, especially when this is

annoying

e.g. She told him to go away and stop following her around.

He hates to lie in bed, and follows us around like a puppy.

6. (line 6) The reason the waiters followed Jerry was because of his attitude. He was a

natural motivator.

— The reason why the waiters followed him wherever he worked was that he had a

positive attitude to life. He was a born motivator.

motivator: A motivator is someone who makes you want to do or achieve something.

because of: used to say who or what causes something to happen or is the reason for

something; as a result of

e.g. He had to retire because of ill health.

We spent three hours waiting in the rain because of you!

7. (line 8) If an employee was having a bad day, Jerry was there telling the employee

how to look on the positive side of the situation.

— If an employee was having something bad, Jerry was there and told the employee

how to think of the good side of the situation.

Grammatically, the part “telling the employee how to look on the positive side of the

situation” is used to express an attending circumstance.

cf. …someone comes to me complaining…

8. (line 10) Seeing this style really made me curious… and asked him, “I don’t get it! You

can’t be a positive person all of the time. How do you do it?”

— When I saw his way of looking at life/ things, I felt interested and wanted to know

more about it… and told him I was puzzled about how he could be positive all the

time and asked him how he achieved it.

style: a way of doing something

e.g. Her friendly style of management works well with small groups of people.

I don’t think there is anything wrong with his style of teaching.

curious: interested in learning about people or things around you

e.g. I was curious to know what would happen next.

He was curious about how she would react.

Unit 1-3.indd 56 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 61: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 3 Developing a Positive Attitude

57

get it: to understand it

e.g. I don’t get it — it doesn’t make sense.

I told that joke to Sophia, but she didn’t get it.

cf. I’ve got it: used to say you have suddenly thought of the solution to a problem or

that you suddenly understand a situation

9. (line 16) Each time something bad happens, I can choose to be a victim or I can choose

to learn from it. I choose to learn from it.

— Every time /When something unpleasant happens, I have two choices: one is to be

someone who suffers because of it, the other is to be someone who learns from it. I

choose to be the latter.

each time /every time: whenever

e.g. I meet up with Julie every time I go to Washington.

I told him that each time he handed in a paper his name should be written in the

right hand corner of the paper.

10. (line 17) Every time someone comes to me complaining…or I can point out the

positive side of life.

— Whenever someone comes to me saying that something is wrong and they are

annoyed about it … or I can tell them about the positive side of life.

complain: 1. to say that something is wrong or not satisfactory

e.g. Lots of people have complained about the noise.

You’re always complaining!

He complained that his boss was useless and he had too much work.

2. to tell someone formally that something is wrong

e.g. If the service was so bad why didn’t you complain to the manager?

Neighbors complained to the police about the dogs barking.

point out: to tell someone about some information, often because you believe they are

not aware of it or have forgotten it:

e.g. He was always very keen to point out my mistakes.

He pointed out the importance of taking a positive attitude.

11. (line 20) “Yeah, right, it’s not that easy,” I protested.

— I said forcefully that it was very diffi cult to point out and choose the positive side

of life in that case.

The expression “Yeah, right(!)” (also “Oh yeah”, “yeah, yeah”) is informally used when

you do not believe what someone has said:

e.g. “I always miss you when I go travelling.” “Yeah, right!”

“Anyway, we’re just good friends.” “Yeah, yeah!”

“I can run faster than you any day!” “Oh, yeah?”

protest: to say that you strongly disagree with or are angry about something because

you think it is wrong or unfair

e.g. “I don’t see why I should take the blame for this!” she protested.

Unit 1-3.indd 57 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 62: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

58

A young girl was crying, protesting that she didn’t want to leave her mother.

12. (line 21) When you cut away all the junk, every situation is a choice.

— When / If you remove all the unnecessary things /the negative side of things, you

can choose the positive side of life in every situation.

cut away: to remove unwanted or unnecessary parts from something by cutting it

e.g. Cut away all the dead wood.

Cut away any dead growth on your roses.

13. (line 22) You choose how you react to situations. You choose how people will affect

your mood.

— You have the choice about how you respond to situations /behave because of a

situation. You decide how people will have an infl uence on your mood.

react to: respond to; behave in a particular way or show a particular emotion because of

something that has happened or been said

e.g. How did Wilson react to your idea?

He reacted angrily to the suggestion that he had lied.

affect: to have an infl uence on someone or something, or to cause them to change

e.g. The accident affected every aspect of her life.

It’s a disease which affects mainly older people.

cf. effect v. to achieve something and cause it to happen

e.g. They are trying to effect a change in the way that we think about our

environment.

His new knowledge effected the change in his investment habits and his leadership

skills will effect a rise in employee productivity.

n. the result of a particular infl uence

e.g. I think I’m suffering from the effects of too little sleep.

Any increase in fuel costs could have a bad effect on business.

14. (line 24) The bottom line: It’s your choice how you live life.

— The most important thing to consider is that it is you who decide how you live life /

how you live life is up to you.

the bottom line: the most important fact in a situation

e.g. The bottom line is that we need another ten thousand dollars to complete the

project.

The bottom line is that I want everyone in this state to take this opportunity to be

just a little bit more active.

15. (line 25) I refl ected on what Jerry said.

— I thought carefully about what Jerry said

refl ect on: to think carefully about something, or to say something that you have been

thinking about

e.g. He had time to refl ect on his successes and failures.

The manager demanded time to refl ect on what to do.

Unit 1-3.indd 58 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 63: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 3 Developing a Positive Attitude

59

16. (line 26) We lost touch, but I often thought about him when I made a choice about life

instead of reacting to it.

— We stopped communicating with each other /were no longer in contact; however,

when I made a life decision, I often thought about him instead of behaving in a

particular way or showing a particular emotion because of it.

lose touch: to stop communicating with each other

e.g. After high school, they lost touch.

Somewhere around 1999 we lost touch with each other.

instead of: in place of

e.g. You should be working instead of lying there in bed.

You can go instead of me, if you want.

17. (line 28) …Jerry did something you are never supposed to do in a restaurant

business…

— …Jerry did something that you will never do when you are in a restaurant

business…

18. (line 30) …was held up at gunpoint by three armed robbers.

— … was robbed by three armed robbers who threatened to shoot him.

hold up: to rob or try to rob a place or person by using violence

e.g. They held the same bank up twice in one week.

He was held up at gunpoint by a gang of masked youths.

at gunpoint: under a threat of death by shooting

e.g. They were forced at gunpoint to hand over the money.

The family were held up at gunpoint for an hour while the men raided their house.

19. (line 31) While trying to open the safe, his hand, shaking from nervousness, slipped

off the combination.

— While he was trying to open the safe, his hand was shaking because of nervousness,

and the combination slid out of his hand.

Here, “the combination” means “a lock that is opened by a set of numbers in a particular

order”.

slip off: to slide out of

e.g. His right hand slipped off the handle.

The guy had a gun and I was trying to stop and my foot slipped off the brake pedal

because I was really scared.

20. (line 35) … Jerry was released from the hospital with fragments of the bullets still in

his body.

— … Jerry was allowed to leave the hospital /was discharged from hospital and some

pieces of the bullets were still in his body.

release: 1. to let someone go free, after having kept them somewhere

e.g. Luckily he was released from hospital that night.

Police arrested several men, who were later released.

Unit 1-3.indd 59 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 64: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

60

2. to let news or offi cial information be known and printed

e.g. The new trade fi gures have just been released.

Police have released a picture of the man they want to question.

fragment: a small piece or a part

e.g. The road was covered with fragments of glass from the shattered window.

The bullet had pierced the bone, leaving behind fragments which the surgeon was

unable to remove.

21. (line 39) Want to see my scars?

— Do you want to see my scars?

22. (line 40) I declined to see his wounds, but did ask him what had gone through his

mind as the robbery took place.

— I refused to see his wounds, but I did ask him what fi rst occurred to him /what he

fi rst thought of as the robbery happened.

go through one’s mind: if something go through your mind, you think of it, or it occurs

to you

e.g. As you were reading, what ideas went through your mind?

These are thoughts that go through my mind from time to time.

take place: to happen, especially after being planned or arranged

e.g. The concert takes place next Thursday.

The next meeting will take place on Thursday.

Talks between the two sides are still taking place.

23. (line 47) “…Did you lose consciousness?” I asked.

— I asked him whether he lost consciousness.

consciousness: the condition of being awake and able to understand what is happening

around you

e.g. He lost consciousness after his accident and never recovered/regained it.

David lost consciousness (=went into a deep sleep) at eight o’clock and died a few

hours later.

24. (line 48) The paramedics were great.

— The paramedics were very good.

A paramedic is someone who has been trained to help people who are hurt or to do

medical work, but who is not a doctor or nurse.

25. (line 50) …I saw the expressions on the faces of the doctors and nurses, I got really

scared.

— ...I saw the look on the faces of the doctors and nurses, I became really frightened.

expression: the look on someone’s face, showing what they feel or think

e.g. I could tell from her expression that something serious had happened.

The expression on her face says it all.

26. (line 51) In their eyes, I read, ‘He’s a dead man.’ I knew I needed to take action.

— From their expressions, I understood /realized that they thought I would die. I

Unit 1-3.indd 60 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 65: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 3 Developing a Positive Attitude

61

knew I needed to do something.

take action: to begin to do something (to solve a particular problem)

e.g. We must take action to deal with the problem before it spreads to other areas.

We urged them to take action.

27. (line 55) She asked if I was allergic to anything.

— She asked me whether I had an allergy to something.

allergic: having an allergy

be allergic to something: (informal) if you are allergic to something, you do not like it

and try to avoid it, used humorously

e.g. His problem is he’s allergic to hard work!

My dad’s allergic to pop music.

28. (line 59) Jerry lived thanks to the skill of his doctors, but also because of his amazing

attitude.

— Jerry survived /didn’t die because of the skills of his doctors and also because of his

amazing attitude.

thanks to: because of someone or something

e.g. Thanks to Sandy, I got the job.

Actually, thanks to their parents, they lost the choice.

IV Summary of the Text

Jerry is the kind of guy you love to hate. He always held a positive attitude to life.

He was a unique manager. He had several waiters who had followed him around from

restaurant to restaurant. If an employee was having a bad day, he would tell him how to

look on the positive side of the situation. When someone came to him complaining, he

would point out the positive side of life. He believed that life was all about choice. It was

your choice how you lived life.

Jerry was once held up at gunpoint by three armed robbers during a robbery. He was

seriously hurt and was sent to the local hospital immediately.

The rubbery tested his positive attitude to life. When it took place, the fi rst thing he

thought of was that he should have locked the back door and then he thought he had two

choices: to live, or to die. He chose to live.

In the emergency room, when he learnt about his own serious situation, he decided to

take action. He told the doctors he was choosing to live.

Jerry lived thanks to the skills of his doctors, but also because of his attitude.

The Jerry’s story shows that attitude is everything.

V Text-related Information

1. Some Quotes About Positive Attitude:

Wherever you go, no matter what the weather, always bring your own sunshine.

— Anthony J. D’Angelo, The College Blue Book

Unit 1-3.indd 61 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 66: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

62

If you don’t get everything you want, think of the things you don’t get that you don’t

want.

— Oscar Wilde

If you don’t think every day is a good day, just try missing one.

— Cavett Robert

It’s so hard when I have to, and so easy when I want to.

— Annie Gottlier

Attitude is a little thing that makes a big difference.

— Winston Churchill

Every day may not be good, but there’s something good in every day.

— Author Unknown

To be interested in the changing seasons is a happier state of mind than to be hopelessly

in love with spring.

— George Santayana

Happiness is an attitude. We either make ourselves miserable, or happy and strong. The

amount of work is the same.

— Francesca Reigler

If you don’t like something, change it; if you can’t change it, change the way you think

about it.

— Mary Engelbreit

Think big thoughts but relish small pleasures.

— H. Jackson Brown, Jr., Life’s Little Instruction Book

To be upset over what you don’t have is to waste what you do have.

— Ken S. Keyes, Jr., Handbook to Higher Consciousness

Defeat is not bitter unless you swallow it.

— Joe Clark

The only disability in life is a bad attitude.

— Scott Hamilton

My riches consist not in the extent of my possessions, but in the fewness of my wants.

— J. Brotherton

There is nothing so easy but that it becomes diffi cult when you do it reluctantly.

— Publius Terentius Afer

Just because you’re miserable doesn’t mean you can’t enjoy your life.

— Annette Goodheart

Unit 1-3.indd 62 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 67: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 3 Developing a Positive Attitude

63

Text B

Developing a Positive Attitude

I Introduction

1. Introductory Remarks

The way we think affects all aspects of our life. Have you ever realized that through every

waking hour, we never stop saying things to ourselves? What have you discovered from your

talk to yourself? Many people have found that when they listen to their talk to themselves, much

of it is negative. What about you? The author of the passage comes up with some ways to help

us develop a positive attitude and better manage the stressors in our life.

2. Introductory Questions

(Please refer to Exercise 2 in the student book)

1. Do you believe that the way we think affects the way we live?

2. What is the key to living our lives free from negative thought?

3. What will you do if you fi nd communicating diffi cult, or you are afraid of arguments?

4. Do you believe it is the simplest things in life, like listening to our favorite music

and reading a great book, that give us the most pleasure?

5. What will you do if you are unsure of how to help out in your community?

6. What will you do when you feel down?

II Outline

Paras. 1-- 3

The way you think affects all aspects of your life.a. benefi ts of learning to listen to your internal dialogue b. many people fi nd much of their internal dialogue negativec. the key to living a positive life

Paras. 4-- 12

Some recommended ways to develop a positive attitude.a. listening to internal dialogueb. learning to communicatec. getting back to basicsd. helping someone oute. allowing yourself to be lovedf. allowing yourself to laugh and fi nd humor in the simplest things g. participating in new physical and mental activities to improve

confi dence levels and coping mechanismsh. fi nding other more positive things to do with your precious moments

Text B

Unit 1-3.indd 63 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 68: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

64

III Detailed Study of the Text

1. (line 1) The way you think, day in day out, affects all aspects of your life.

— How you think in your daily life infl uences all parts of your life.

day in day out: (especially of something boring) done or happening every day for a long

period of time

e.g. I have to do the same boring jobs day in day out.

It’s boring, eating the same food day in day out.

2. (line 2) internal dialogue: It is the real-time conversation that you have with yourself

about everything that’s going on in your life. It encompasses all of your self-talk,

whether positive and rational or self-destructive and negative. Internal dialogue is what

you are saying to yourself, about yourself and about the world.

3. (line 2) thought patterns: the particular ways of thinking

pattern: a particular way in which something is done, organized or happens

e.g. The pattern of family life has been changing over recent years.

changing patterns of behavior among students

The child showed a normal pattern of development.

4. (line 2) …how they may be affecting the way you handle the stressful situations of

daily living.

— …how your thought patterns may be infl uencing how you deal with the stressful

situations in your daily life.

5. (line 4) Many people have found that, when they tune in to their internal dialogue,

much of it is negative.

— Many people have discovered that when they are able to understand their internal

dialogue, much of it is negative.

tune in (to) /be tuned in (to): to realize or understand what is happening or what other

people are thinking

e.g. Try to tune in to your partner’s needs.

The company aims to be more tuned in to customer needs.

turn in (to): to watch or listen to a broadcast on radio or television

e.g. People get their information by tuning in to foreign radio stations.

More than 150 million Americans tuned in to watch the fi nal episode.

6. (line 6) “What if I fail?”

— “What will happen if I fail?

“What if…” is used to ask about something that could happen in the future, especially

something bad.

e.g. What if the train’s late?

What if you don’t pass your exams?

7. (line 6) This, in turn, affects every aspect of your life.

— As a result, this infl uences every parts of your life.

Unit 1-3.indd 64 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 69: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 3 Developing a Positive Attitude

65

in turn: 1. as a result of something

e.g. Interest rates were cut and, in turn, share prices rose.

We should help them gradually improve their living standards. This will in turn

arouse their enthusiasm.

2. one after the other, especially in a particular order

e.g. Each of us in turn had to describe how alcohol had affected our lives.

Each of us collects the mail in turn.

8. (line 8) The key to living our lives free from negative thought is to remember who we

truly are, free from our momentary emotional shifts.

— The best way to live our lives not having negative thought is to remember who we

truly are without having our momentary emotional changes.

the key to something: the best or only way to achieve something

e.g. Hard work is the key to success.

Helping people to help themselves is the key to lasting success.

free from: not having something that is unwanted or unpleasant; without

e.g. We want to give all children a world free from violence.

It is not easy being a kid today, and there is no place free from modern pressures

and the natural discomforts of youth.

momentary: lasting for a very short time

e.g. There was a momentary pause.

Davis was surprised into a momentary silence.

9. (line 11) For many, the transition to positive awareness of Self requires “small steps”

on a chosen path.

— For many people, the change from thinking of themselves negatively to positively

needs them to take some minor measures on a chosen path/make some minor

changes in their usual way of thinking.

transition: a change from one form or type to another, or the process by which this

happens

e.g. the smooth transition from full-time work to full retirement

Making the transition from youth to adulthood can be very painful.

10. (line 15) …the stressors in your life…

— … the things that cause stress in your life…

11. (line 15) Divide one or more sheets of paper into two columns and, for a few days,

write down in the left column all the negative thoughts that come into your head.

— Separate one or more sheets of paper into two columns and, for a few days, write in

the left column all the negative thoughts that occur to you.

divide into: to (cause to) separate into parts or groups

e.g. At the end of the lecture, I’d like all the students to divide into small discussion

groups.

After World War Two, Germany was divided into two separate countries.

Unit 1-3.indd 65 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 70: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

66

write down: to write something on a piece of paper

e.g. Did you write down Jo’s phone number?

This is the address. Do you want to write it down?

12. (line 20) Practice doing this in your mind until it becomes a habit.

— Do this regularly in your mind (that is, write down all the negative thoughts in the

left column and then rewrite each of them in a positive way in the right column)

until it becomes something you do without thinking about it.

Note that after the verb “practice”, we can use an “–ing” form, but not normally an

infi nitive.

e.g. Today we’re going to practice parking.

I often practice speaking the language aloud to myself.

Practice doing this until you feel you can do this well.

13. (line 20) I’ll never get this fi nished by the end of the day!

— I’ll never have fi nished this by the end of the day!

Note the structure “get something done”, meaning do something or have it done for you.

e.g. You need to get your hair cut.

I should be able to get the fi rst chapter fi nished by tonight.

14. (line 23) Don’t say the things we feel can lead to a sense of frustration, hurt, anger or

anxiety.

— Don’t say the negative things. /Don’t say the things you believe can cause /result in

a sense of frustration, hurt, anger or anxiety.

lead to: to cause something to happen or exist

e.g. Reducing speed limits should lead to fewer deaths on the roads.

Blaming often leads to complete breakdown in family communications.

Any of these feelings can lead to a sense of hopelessness and lower self-esteem.

15. (line 26) Get back to basics.

— Start to give your attention to the simplest and most important matters.

back to basics: paying more attention to the most important aspect of something

e.g. A lot of parents want schools to get back to basics.

Sometimes it just pays to get back to basics.

16. (line 26) Reconnect with old friends…

— Reestablish a relationship with old friends. /Get in touch with old friends…

17. (line 29) Help someone out.

— Help someone because they are busy or have problems.

help out: to help someone because they are busy or have problems

e.g. I helped her out when Stella became ill.

Her parents helped her out with a $500 loan.

18. (line 30) … someone with failing eyesight: someone whose eyesight is getting worse

and worse

failing: becoming weaker or less successful

Unit 1-3.indd 66 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 71: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 3 Developing a Positive Attitude

67

e.g. Failing eyesight forced him to retire early.

The change is designed to save a failing business.

19. (line 32) ... the most basic human trait: the most basic quality in human character.

trait: a particular characteristic that can produce a particular type of behavior

e.g. His sense of humor is one of his better traits.

Certain personality traits make people more likely to become victims of violent

crime.

20. (line 32) We, as a society, have become disconnected from this most basic need.

— As a society /As a large group of people who live together in an organized way, we

have felt as if that we no longer belonged to it and we no longer needed to love

each other.

21. (line 35) If you are feeling down, read some jokes, watch a funny movie or just act

“silly” once in a while.

— If you are feeling unhappy, read some jokes, watch a funny movie or sometimes

just behave in “a silly manner”.

once in a while: sometimes but not often

e.g. We meet for lunch once in a while.

I do get a little anxious once in a while.

22. (line 36) At times, it is a good thing to let yourself see the world through a child’s eyes.

— Sometimes, it is good to allow yourself to see the world from the point of view of a

child.

at times: sometimes

e.g. Life is hard at times.

You can be really annoying at times, you know.

through someone’s eyes: from the point of view of a particular person

e.g. The story is told through the eyes of a child.

Visitors can see and experience London through the eyes of the beloved Dickens

characters “Oliver Twist” and “David Copperfi eld.”

23. (line 38) Participate in new physical and mental activities to improve confidence

levels and coping mechanisms.

— Take part in new physical and mental activities to raise confi dence levels and better

people’s behaviors of dealing with diffi cult situations.

Coping mechanisms refer to behaviors that make it possible for people to deal with

a diffi cult situation or problem.

participate in: to take part in or become involved in an activity

e.g. She never participates in any of our discussions, does she?

More than 400 children participated in a clean-up of the park.

By success, Wendt means that children feel good about participating in the activity

and that they experience more success than frustration.

24. (line 40) ... the mainstream media: the newspapers, magazines, radio and television

Unit 1-3.indd 67 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 72: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

68

that are accepted by most people

25. (line 40) …focuses on information that leads to fear, negative thoughts and emotion.

— …gives a lot of attention to information that causes fear, negative thoughts and

emotion.

focus on: to give a lot of attention to one particular person, subject or thing

e.g. He felt he needed to focus more on his career.

This is a weekly magazine mainly focusing on business-related issues.

IV Summary of the Text

How we think affects how we live our life. Learning to listen to our internal dialogue

help us recognize our ways of thinking and how they affect the way we handle the stressful

situations of daily life. When listening to their internal dialogue, many people have found

much of it negative. The key to living our lives free from negative thought is to remember

who we truly are, free from our momentary emotional shifts. There are some things we can

do to develop a positive attitude. The author suggests eight ways to help us develop a more

positive attitude to life.

V Text-related Information

1. Some Internal Dialogue Quotes from Carlos Castaneda:

“The internal dialogue is what grounds people in the daily world. The world is

such and such or so and so, only because we talk to ourselves about its being such

and such and so and so. The passageway into the world of shamans opens up after the

warrior has learned to shut off his internal dialogue.”

“We talk to ourselves incessantly about our world. In fact we maintain our world

with our internal talk. And whenever we fi nish talking to ourselves about ourselves and

our world, the world is always as it should be. We renew it, we rekindle it with life,

we uphold it with our internal talk. Not only that, but we also choose our paths as we

talk to ourselves. Thus we repeat the same choices over and over until the day we die,

because we keep on repeating the same internal talk over and over until the day we die.

A warrior is aware of this and strives to stop his internal talk.”

“When a warrior learns to stop the internal dialogue, everything becomes possible;

the most far-fetched schemes become attainable.”

2. Fundamental Characteristics of Internal Dialogue:

1. Your internal dialogue is constant.

Through every waking hour, you never stop saying things to yourself.

2. Your internal dialogue happens in real time.

Unlike automatic thoughts that run through your mind, your internal dialogue

happens at normal speed.

Unit 1-3.indd 68 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 73: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 3 Developing a Positive Attitude

69

3. Your internal dialogue triggers a physiological change.

As a result of every thought you have, there is a physical reaction. This reaction can

be positive or negative, even affecting your health.

4. Your internal dialogue is heavily infl uenced by your locus of control.

No matter what the situation is, or what demands you are facing, your internal

dialogue is likely to be infl uenced by your locus of control.

5. Your internal dialogue tends to be totally monopolistic.

It crowds out or drowns out any other data, from any other source. As a result, you

may spend your time lost in the frantic self-talk that goes with it.

6. Your negative internal dialogue gets the loudest when you need it the least.

It gets loudest when the pressure is on, because it fl ows at least in part from your

personal truth. That kind of talk, if you listen to it at pivotal moments, can change

your life forever. You end up being your own worst enemy.

3. Ten Tips for Developing a Positive Attitude by Laurel Low and Jillian Woolmer:

1. Remember you have a choice in the way you perceive whatever is going on.

You have the power to choose whether you think the glass is half full or half empty.

Focus on things you are grateful for. Write down five things you are grateful for

every day. This helps you fi nd the things you are grateful for more easily.

2. Life is always moving on.

Bad times don’t last forever. Say to yourself, “This too will pass.”

3. Live in the present.

The past cannot be changed and the future may not come. Bear in mind that this

could be your last day on earth because one day it will be! Life is too short not to

make the most of every day we are lucky enough to be given. Do what you can do

and let go of the rest.

4. Pay attention to nature as it is an endless source of joy.

Take pleasure in the world around you, e.g. listen to the birds singing, bask in the

warmth of the sun on your skin, enjoy a cool breeze, notice the perfume and colour

of fl owers. Feed your spirit with beautiful scenery. Take the time to visit a beautiful

garden, or grow one of your own. If you can’t make the time, buy some fresh fl owers

so that you can still enjoy the beauty.

5. Don’t watch the news or even read the newspaper if the endless supply of bad news

items plays on your mind.

If something happens that you really need to know about, someone will tell you.

6. Count up the many good things in your life and be grateful rather than spending

time concentrating on what you don’t have.

7. Smile and the whole world smiles with you.

Smiling makes you feel so much happier, and everyone you meet is pleased to see

you as they get a smile.

Unit 1-3.indd 69 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 74: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

70

8. Be courteous on the road.

Even just the gesture of giving way to someone on the road builds a bridge of positive

feeling between you.

9. Remember that adversity can be an opportunity to learn more about yourself, other

people and how to cope with life, however unpleasant the actual lesson may be.

10. Be active, get out there and see what the rest of the world is doing.

Being active feels good and seeing what others are up to can actually inspire you to

get more involved too.

Skills

Translation Skills

本单元的英译汉练习的重点是词义的引申。引申是英汉翻译中常用手法之一。由于英汉两种语

言在长期发展和使用中形成了自己的修辞方法、搭配习惯和行文规范,这些差异使得我们在英译汉

中总觉得有些词或词组难以按原文的字面意义直译出来。为了使译文通顺达意,常常需要将原文的

词义加以引申。

引申词义是根据上下文的内在联系和逻辑关系,透过原文的表层结构用恰当的汉语词语和符合

汉语习惯的表达方法将原文词语的深层意义表达出来,因此不能主观随意,不能脱落原文意义的基

本范围。

在翻译过程中,我们首先要掌握的是如何正确地选择恰当的词语,并在必要时加以适度的引

申,只有这样才能确保最终获得准确通顺的译文。

引申词义可以从词义转换、词义具体化、词义抽象化和词的搭配四个方面来考虑。比如,在本

单元中我们选择了good这个学生最熟悉的英语词。学过一些英语的人一看到good自然而然得会想到

“好的”这一词义。然而,在一些上下文中,good的译法却并非易事。

比如说,“be in a good mood”意思是“情绪好”,“He was always in a good mood and

always had something positive to say.”译成“他总是乐呵呵的,总说些乐观向上的话”。“My

sister is good at looking after children.”译成“我姐姐很善于照料孩子”。在“I had some time off

work when my mother was ill, but my boss was good about it.”句子中“was good about it”就不

宜译成“对此很好”,应译成“对此事很宽容”。“When would be a good time to phone?”中的a

good time译成“好时间”不妥,整个句子应译成“什么时候打电话比较合适?”。

下面是练习中的其余三个句子:

There’s a good chance he’ll pass the exam. 他通过考试的机会很大。

Be good when we visit your aunt. 我们去看望你姑姑时,你要听话。

Fresh fruit and vegetables are good for you. 新鲜水果和蔬菜对你健康有益。

再看下面一些句子中的good,如果我们用“好的”来译成汉语,结果可能是句子意义不通。

Skills

Unit 1-3.indd 70 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 75: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 3 Developing a Positive Attitude

71

This ticket is good for one month. 这张票可以用一个月。

She had a good cry. 她痛哭了一场。

He would be a good man for the job. 他是做这件事的合适人选。

Guided Writing

本单元的基础训练是句子与句子衔接。在句子衔接练习中要提醒学生注意逻辑上的递进关系。

常用的表示递进关系的词语有:and, in addition, also, too, furthermore, what’s more, moreover,

additionally, by the way, incidentally, in the fi rst/ second place, equally important, again, fi nally,

last, likewise等。

比如:

The drug has powerful side effects. Moreover, it can be addictive.

The decorations were absolutely beautiful and what’s more, the children had made them

themselves.

The course is organized by Sheila Dean who, by the way, is head of marketing now.

I don’t mind picking up your things from the store. Besides, the walk will do me good.

He is old and unpopular. Furthermore, he has at best only two years of political life ahead of

him.

A new contract is in place. Additionally, staff will be offered a bonus scheme.

本单元的实用英语写作部分是根据所提供的信息设计英语名片。在社交活动中,交换名片是一

项常见的,也是很重要的活动。在对外交流中,有必要在自己的名片上印上英文。这就要求名片上

的英文写法规范,符合英语习惯。名片一般要包含以下内容:

单位(如学校、公司)名称 (Business name (if there is one))

本人姓名 (Your name)

本人职位、职称、衔头(Your position, title)

单位电话号码(一个或两个)(A phone number (or two))

传真号码(A fax number)

地址(A mailing address)

电子邮箱(Your e-mail address)

关于地址的写法,注意中文与英文的顺序不同,请参考第二单元的英文信封上地址的写法,一

般从小地名到大地名,顺序是:室号—门牌号—街道名—城市名—省/州—邮编—国家(Room —

No. — Road (Street) – City – Province /State – Post Number – Country)。

Reading Skills ––Reading for Details (1):

Understanding Listing

Supporting details in a sentence or paragraph can be organized by listing.

Clues in a paragraph that typically indicate a listing are words and, also, another,

Unit 1-3.indd 71 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 76: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

72

fi rst, second, third, fourth, fi nally. Sometimes authors use numbers (1, 2 3) or letters (a, b,

c), even though the order is not necessarily important. Their purpose is to be sure that the

reader will notice each separate item. It is important to remember that your task is to locate

all the items in the list.

EXAMPLE:

Knowing the meanings of prefixes and suffixes builds youngsters’ vocabularies by

helping them learn new words. And young readers can use them to fi gure out the meanings

of longer words. Try this activity to practice working with prefi xes and suffi xes.

First, talk with your child about the definitions of these words: view, write, happy.

Then, help him add the following prefixes and discuss the words’ new meanings: -pre

means before, as in “preview” (to view before) -re means again, as in “rewrite” (to write

again) -un means not, or the opposite of, as in “unhappy” (not happy).

Next, discuss the meanings of these words: dance, beauty, hope. Encourage your child

to add these suffi xes and point out how the defi nitions change: -er means someone who

does or is, as in “dancer” (someone who dances) -ful means full of, as in “beautiful” (full of

beauty) -less means without, as in “hopeless” (without hope).

Finally, challenge your youngster to think of other words he can create using these

prefi xes and suffi xes.

Signal words for giving listing:

fi rst, second, …another, moreover, next, then, fi nally, also, 1, 2, 3,… a, b, c,… in

the fi rst place, fi rstly, fi rst of all, to begin with, last but not least

Key to the Exercises

Text A

First Reading

Exercise 1

1. B 2. C 3. A 4. D 5. C

While Reading

1. “this style” refers to his way of always looking on the positive side of the situation.

2. His bottom line is “it’s your choice how you live life.”

First Reading

Key to the ExercisesKey to the ExercisesKey to the ExercisesKey to the ExercisesKey to the ExercisesKey to the Exercises

While Reading

Unit 1-3.indd 72 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 77: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 3 Developing a Positive Attitude

73

Second Reading

Exercise 2

1. T 2. T 3. F 4. T 5. F

Exercise 3

Attitude Is Everything

Jerry is a guy you love to hate: he was always in a good mood;

always had something positive to say;

a unique manager;

a natural motivator.

Jerry managed to keep a positive attitude all the time:

choose to be in a good mood;

choose the positive side of life.

The bottom life: It’s your choice how people will affect your mood.

The accident tested Jerry’s attitude:

Facing two choices: to live, or to die, he chose to live.

In the emergency room, he knew he needed to take action.

He asked the doctors to operate on him as if he was alive, not dead.

The lessen we learn from Jerry’s story: Attitude is everything.

Oral Practice

Exercise 4

(For reference.)

Jerry was a kind of guy you love to hate. He was always in a good mood and always had

something positive to say. He was a unique manager, for he had several waiters who had

followed him from restaurant to restaurant just because of his attitude. He was a natural

motivator. If an employee was having a bad day, he was there telling the employee how to

look on the positive side of the situation. When someone came to him complaining, he would

point out the positive side of life. He would say that life was all about choices and that it was

our choice how we lived life. So attitude is everything.

Vocabulary and Structure

Exercise 5

1. declined 2. relatively 3. released 4. affect 5. intensive

6. scared 7. positive 8. curious 9. victims 10. complaining

Exercise 6

1. react to 2. instead of 3. went through 4. point… out 5. take place

6. in a bad mood 7. as if 8. the bottom line 9. refl ect on 10. after all

Second Reading

Unit 1-3.indd 73 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 78: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

74

Exercise 7

1. in 2. up 3. away 4. to 5. on

6. up 7. through 8. to 9. on 10. out

Exercise 8

VERBS action choice breath noise look step preparation

take ★ ★ ★ ★ ★

make ★ ★ ★

sense bath lead measure demand care difference

take ★ ★ ★ ★

make ★ ★ ★

1. take action 2. took a bath 3. took a deep breath 4. make sense

5. make a difference 6. took steps/ measures 7. make a choice 8. take care

9. make preparations 10. take measures/ steps

Exercise 9

1. received 2. accept 3. affects 4. effect

5. reason 6. cause 7. alive 8. live

Exercise 10

1. When something bad happens, Jerry chooses to learn from it instead of choosing to be a

victim of it.

2. Instead of spending your time thinking about how bad things are, think about how good

they will be!

3. Instead of telling yourself that you aren’t ready, why not try adjusting your attitude to the

positive side of life?

4. I can’t understand why they choose him for the job instead of you.

5. When you are feeling down, instead of getting upset, try reading a joke book, watching a

funny movie or making up your own silly story!

Exercise 11

1. We didn’t arrive until seven o’clock because of the terrible traffi c.

2. I have no idea what you are thinking because of your unique attitude.

3. Lots of people were deciding to stay here and cut their days short because of the poor

weather.

4. I hardly know her and I even took the habit of hiding from her because of her strange

behavior.

5. Because of his poor health he was forced to give up his medical practice.

Unit 1-3.indd 74 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 79: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 3 Developing a Positive Attitude

75

Translation Practice

Exercise 12

1. 他总是乐呵呵的,总说些乐观向上的话。

2. 我姐姐很善于照料孩子。

3. 我母亲生病时我有一段时间未上班,但我老板对此事很宽容。

4. 她说一口地道的英语,是做那个工作的合适人选。

5. 什么时候打电话比较合适?

6. 他通过考试的机会很大。

7. 我们去看望你姑姑时,你要听话。

8. 新鲜水果和蔬菜对你健康有益。

Exercise 13

1. Each time /Every time something bad happened, he would learn from it instead of

complaining.

2. He lived because of the skill of the doctors and also because of his positive attitude to life.

3. Life is all about choices. The bottom line is it’s your choice how you live life.

4. When he saw the expressions on the faces of the doctors, he was really scared, but after a

few weeks of intensive care, he was released from (the) hospital.

5. I refl ected on what he told me and I couldn’t remember what had gone through my mind at

that time.

Writing Practice

Exercise 14

1. The College offers different programs to meet your needs. In addition, it offers a full range

of specialized training to serve local organizations.

2. This new machine will be very expensive to set up. Furthermore, more machines will

mean fewer jobs.

3. Sonya says she couldn’t get here through all the snow. Besides, her car’s broken down.

4. The conversation should be with everybody. In addition, it should be related to topics

interesting for both men and women.

5. I’ve been lucky to fi nd a career that I love and, what is more, I am well paid for it.

6. It is important for us to appear interested and sympathetic, but it is equally important not

to make the other person think we are too sure of ourselves.

7. First, culture and cultures are growing rapidly in importance. In the second place, there is

much more interaction going on among cultures today.

8. When you do your friend’s work for them, you’re not helping them, you’re hurting them.

And friends don’t do that to each other. Besides, as you’re paying for the education, you

might as well get something out of it.

Translation Practice

Unit 1-3.indd 75 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 80: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

76

Exercise 15

A.

ABC Company

Mr. Bob Jones

General Manager

Add: 104 Washington Avenue N. Tel: (360)832-6161

Eatonville, WA 98328, USA Fax: (252)262-7250

E-mail: [email protected]

Website: www.bjabccompanyweb.com

B.

Henan Shuren Foreign Languages College

Mr. Chen Dalong

Professor

Add: 76 Zhongyuan Rd, Xinxian Tel: (0373)3456789 (O)

Henan Province, 453002, PRC (0373)6688678 (H)

E-mail: dalong@shurenfl c.edu.cn Fax: (0373)7788345

Dictation

Exercise 16

1. especially 2. complaining about

3. relationships 4. government

5. negative 6. always remember your “WHY”

7. what you want your end result to be 8. have a desire for it

9. go through down times 10. work through them

Text B

First Reading

Exercise 1

(The purpose of the this exercise is to develop students’ ability to anticipate what the passage

is about by reading parts of a passage, especially the fi rst paragraph and the topic sentence of

each paragraph.)

Unit 1-3.indd 76 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 81: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 3 Developing a Positive Attitude

77

1. About how to develop a positive attitude /About ways to help you to develop a positive

attitude.

2. Eight pieces of advice. They are 1) listen to internal dialogue; 2) learn to communicate; 3)

get back to basics; 4) help someone out. 5) allow yourself to be loved; 6) allow yourself to

laugh and fi nd humour in the simplest things; 7) participate in new physical and mental

activities; and 8) Find other more positive things to do with your precious moments.

(Refer to the text for detailed answers.)

Second Reading

Exercise 2

1. By learning to our “internal dialogue”.

2. Much of their internal dialogue is negative.

3. Take a course in communicating effectively.

4. We might get the most pleasure.

5. The ability to love and be loved.

6. Read some jokes, watch a funny movie or just act “silly” once in a while.

7. To improve confi dence levels and coping mechanisms.

8. Information that leads to fear, negative thoughts and emotion.

Reading Skills

Exercise 3

1. Topic sentence: There are three qualities that I need to see in a good friend.

Items listed: three qualities: not tell lies, be there when I need him, criticize me when

necessary

Signal words: fi rst, second, fi nally

2. Topic sentence: Remember, though, that even the most sophisticated spell check programs

have two limitations.

Items listed: two limitations: not catch a correctly spelled but misused word, identify

only the words contained in their memory banks

Signal words: fi rst, also

3. Topic sentence: Service-learning deals with these challenges effectively.

Items listed: ways: students focus on their strengths, activities which focus on learning

styles and skills, build a bridge to academics from a work setting

Signal words: fi rst, secondly, third

Exercise 4

Topic: Teachers’ questioning

Topic sentence: We think that there are at least three reasons for this.

Items listed: three reasons

Unit 1-3.indd 77 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 82: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

78

1. children were not able to “hear” what the teacher said

Solution: the children need to be shown the error in their thought processes

2. it may not have been seen excellent by the children

e.g. a. teachers go over the children’s heads

b. teachers are unable to communicate with their students

3. it is beyond children’s development and so it “goes over their heads”

Signal words used: fi rst, second, the third reason

Vocabulary Practice

Exercise 5

1. mainstream 2. columns 3. volunteered 4. internal 5. participate

6. precious 7. trait 8. communicate 9. momentary 10. transition

Exercise 6

1. divided… into 2. participate…in 3. feeling down 4. focuses on

5. lead to 6. wrote down 7. tune in to 8. help… with

9. What if 10. in turn

Expanding Your Vocabulary

Exercise 7

1. renamed 2. addressee 3. reappeared 4. payee 5. appointee

6. rediscovered 7. examinees 8. rebuilt 9. readdressed 10. escapees

Exercise 8

1. focusing on 2. feel down 3. mostly 4. advice 5. listen to

6. without 7. instead 8. either 9. even 10. overcome

参考译文

Text A

心态最重要

杰里是那种叫你又爱又恨的家伙,他总是乐呵呵的,总能说些积极上进的话。如果有人问他最

近怎么样,他总是回答:“我要能更好,我就成双胞胎了!”

他是个与众不同的经理,因为他有好几个服务员一直跟随着他,从一家餐馆跳槽到另一家餐

馆。这些服务员跟随他的原因是因为他心态好,他天生善于激励人。如果哪一天有个雇员心情不

Unit 1-3.indd 78 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 83: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 3 Developing a Positive Attitude

79

好,杰里就会告诉他如何去看待事情积极的一面。

看到他的这种风格着实让我好奇,于是有一天我走到杰里面前问他:“我真弄不明白,你不可

能总是一直那么积极乐观?你是怎么做到的?” 杰里回答道:“每天早晨醒来我对自己说,‘杰

里,今天你有两种选择。你可以选择好心情,你也可以选择坏心情。’我选择好心情。每当什么不

愉快的事情发生时,我可以选择成为一个受害者,也可以选择从中汲取教训。我选择从中汲取教

训。每次有什么人找我抱怨,我可以选择接受他们的抱怨,也可以选择向他们指出生活中的积极一

面。我选择生活中积极的一面。”

“噢,是吧,这可没那么容易。”我提出了异议。

“就这么容易,”杰里说道。“生活全是选择。当你将所有无用的东西都去除后,剩下的每一

种处境都是一种选择。你选择如何去应付生活中的种种处境。你选择别人如何影响你的情绪。你选

择心情愉快还是心情不好。最根本的是:如何生活是你自己的选择。”

我琢磨着杰里的这席话。以后不久,我离开了餐饮业,创建了自己的公司。我们失去了联系,

可是当我要对生活做出一种选择,而非仅对之做出反应时,我常常想起他。

几年之后,我听说杰里做了一件餐饮业的人绝对不会做的事情:一天早上,他没关后门,三名

武装盗匪持枪劫持了他。他在试着打开保险柜时,他的手由于紧张而颤抖,从保险柜的密码锁上滑

了下来。匪徒在惊慌失措中朝他开了枪。幸亏杰里被发现的较早,并迅速送到了当地医院。

经过长达18个小时的手术和几个星期的特别护理,杰里出院了,但是体内还残留着子弹的

碎片。

那次事故发生大约六个月后,我见到他了。当我问他身体怎样时,他回答道:“我要能更好,

我就成双胞胎了。想看看我的伤疤吗?”

我没看他的伤疤,不过我问他抢劫发生时,脑子里想些什么。

“我第一个念头是我本应该锁上后门才对。” 杰里回答道“随后,躺在地板上时,我想起自己

有两个选择,可以选择活下来,或者死去,我选择了活下来。”

“你就不害怕吗?你失去知觉了吗?”我问道。

杰里继续说道:“救护人员真了不得,他们不停地说我会好的。但是他们推我进急救室的时

候,我看到了医生和护士们脸上的表情,我真的害怕了。在他们眼神里,我看到‘他死了’,我知

道我需要采取行动了。”

“你做了什么?”我问道。

“哦,有一个大个子护士大声问我,”杰尔说道。“她问我是否对什么过敏,我回答说‘是

的’,医生和护士们都停了下来等着我的回答,我深深吸了一口气,喊道‘子弹!’在他们的笑声

中,我告诉他们,‘我选择活下去,给我动手术吧,把我当活人,而不是死人。’”

由于医生的精湛技术,也由于杰尔惊人的心态,他活了下来。从他那儿我学到了,每一天,我

们都可以选择过得充实。

毕竟,心态最重要。

Unit 1-3.indd 79 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 84: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

80

Text B

培养积极的心态

你日复一日的思维方式影响到你生活的方方面面。学会聆听“内心的对话”将有助于你认识自

己的思维方式,并认识思维方式如何影响到你怎样处理日常生活中各种令人感到压力的处境。

当许多人倾听“内心的对话”时,他们发现,很多内容都是消极的,像“我永远也做不到”,

“要是我失败了怎么办?”这些想法会严重地影响到你的行为方式,反过来,你的行为方式又会影

响到你生活的方方面面。

生活中摆脱消极念头的关键在于牢记我们真正的自我是谁,不受自己短暂情绪波动的影响。对

许多人而言,要实现积极的自我意识的转变,需要在自己选择的道路上采取一些“小步骤”。

以下是一些帮助你培养更积极的心态,更好地处理生活中的压力的方法:

倾听与内心的对话。把一张或几张纸分成两栏,在左边一栏,把你所想到的消极念头统统写下

来,这么记上几天。再在第二栏,用一种积极的态度,把这些念头都改写一遍。在心中一直这样操

练直至成为习惯。(比如,“到今天结束时,我也肯定做不完!”可以变成“到今天结束时,我很

可能完成一大半。”)

学习沟通。不要说那些我们感到会带来失望感、伤害感、愤怒或焦虑感的事情。如果你感到与

人沟通有困难,或者是害怕与人争论,那就去选修一门有关有效沟通的课程。

返璞归真。联系上老朋友,遛遛狗,逛逛美术馆,听听你最喜欢的音乐。泡上一个长长的、让

人身心放松的澡,读本好书,给孩子讲个故事,要不就让长辈讲个故事给你听!给我们带来莫大幸

福的,恰恰是生活中最简单的事情。

帮助别人。帮助他人,虽然只是一个简单的动作,却能让我们快乐。为年纪大的邻居捎上点东

西,在本地的医院做志愿者,为视力不好的人读书。如果你还不知道怎么在社区里帮上忙,可以给

就近的志愿者中心打电话。

让自己被爱。爱与被爱的能力是人类最基本的特征。作为社会,我们已经和这个最基本的需要

相脱节了。要想培养起积极的心态,就应想办法重新与他人相互联系起来,这一点非常有帮助。

让自己大笑,从平凡事中寻找乐趣。如果你感到情绪低落,就去读几则笑话,看一场滑稽的电

影,或不时地干点“傻”事。让自己从一个孩子的眼光去看世界,有时是一件好事。

开展新的体力或脑力活动,改善自信程度和处理问题的能力。要建立自信心,方法挺简单,就

如学习一些新单词意义那么简单。

记住,主流媒体所关注的信息会导致恐惧、消极的想法和情绪。为你的宝贵时间找些别的、

更积极的事情去做,比如,读一本积极的好书,到大自然中去散步,做志愿者去帮助人们和帮助

动物。

Unit 1-3.indd 80 16/3/23 上午9:49

Page 85: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Making a Good Impression

Unit

4

ObjectivesObjectivesObjectives

Text A Text B

Words

accustomed, impression, sympathetic, required, contact, mention, claim, fault, interpersonal, dishonest, personalities

custom, vary, mark, replace, behavior, various, educate, preside, quarrel, extent, manners, appreciate

Phrases and

Expressions

get accustomed to, apply to, according to, in one’s opinion, on the other hand, get along with, deal with, in general, along with, be sure of, depend on, complain about

prevent from, cut up, fall off, to a large extent, wait on, side by side, change with time, for instance, the same as, take up

Collocation think + objective realize + objective

Confusable Words mistake/fault, common/average, custom/habit, rise/arise

StructuresIt is the simplest things in life that give us the most pleasure.Harry doesn’t know everything, but he talks as if he knew everything.

Translation

Practice词义引申

Writing Practice Write Correct Sentences / Write Greeting Cards

Reading Skills Reading for Details (2): Understanding Examples

Expanding Your

Vocabulary

friend + ship → friendship, relation + ship → relationships, member + ship → membership, dis + honest → dishonest, dis + connect → disconnect, dis + appear à disappear

81

Unit 1-4.indd 81 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 86: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

82

Text A

The First Four Minutes

I Introduction

1. Introductory Remarks

When do people decide whether or not they want to become friends? According

to Dr. Leonard Zunin, it is during the fi rst four minutes they meet someone in a social

situation. He also suggests that one should try to appear friendly and self-confident,

interested and sympathetic when he is introduced to new people. Although it may

be against one’s nature, a certain amount of play-acting may be best for the first few

minutes of contact with strangers. His advice also applies to relationships with family

members and friends.

2. Introductory Questions

1. When you meet someone for the fi rst time, what usually makes you like or dislike

that person? Why?

2. What is the most important thing that you think can make others be friendly to you

when you meet them for the fi rst time?

3. How long does it take for people to make up their minds about you when they meet

you for the fi rst time?

4. What should you do if you want to make a good fi rst impression on others?

II Outline

Para. 1According to Dr. Zunin, the fi rst four minutes is the most important in a

social situation.

Paras. 2--4 Dr. Zunin suggests what one should do during the fi rst four minutes.

Paras. 5 -- 7 The reasons for the play-acting given by Dr. Zunin

Paras. 8 -- 9 Interpersonal relations are one of the decisive elements of success.

III Detailed Study of the Text

1. (line 2) ... according to a book by Dr. Leonard Zunin.

— ... as stated by Dr. Leonard Zunin in his book.

according to: as stated by; in a way that agrees with

e.g. According to George, she’s a great player.

Text A

Unit 1-4.indd 82 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 87: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 4 Making a Good Impression

83

We are paid according to how much work we do.

2. (line 4) ... to anyone interested in starting new friendships ...

— ... to anyone who is interested in making new friends ...

(be) interested in: showing curiosity or concern about something/someone

e.g. The company is interested in selling its products overseas.

She’s interested in starting her own business.

cf. appear interested

3. (line 5) Every time you meet someone in a social situation, give him your undivided

attention for four minutes.

— Whenever you meet someone in a social situation, give him your full/complete

attention for four minutes.

undivided attention: complete/full attention

e.g. Please give the matter your undivided attention.

Each has received her undivided attention.

4. (line 10) He keeps looking over the other person’s shoulder, as if hoping to find

someone more interesting in another part of the room.

— He continues looking over the other person’s shoulder in a way that suggests he is

hoping to fi nd someone more interesting in another part of the room.

The expression “He keeps looking over the other person’s shoulder” means “He shows

indifference towards the person he’s talking to”.

keep (on) doing something: to continue doing something without stopping, or to do it

repeatedly

e.g. He keeps (on) trying to distract me.

Don’t keep (on) asking silly questions.

look over: to direct one’s eyes over (something)

e.g. The child was not tall enough to look over the wall.

Our teacher had a way of looking over her glasses at us whenever we offered a silly

answer.

look/glance over your/ someone’s shoulder: to look behind

e.g. Lucy glanced nervously over her shoulder to see who was behind her.

He also looked over our shoulders while we plotted the charts.

as if / as though: in a way that suggests that something is true or not true; with the

appearance of

e.g. You look as if you’ve had a good time.

He behaved as if nothing had happened.

interesting: holding the attention; causing curiosity

5. (line 13) If anyone has ever done this to you, you probably did not like him very

much.

— If anyone has not given his complete attention to you, it is likely that you won’t like

him very much.

Unit 1-4.indd 83 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 88: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

84

6. (line 16) in general: usually or in most situations; as a whole

e.g. I’m interested in European history in general.

We’re trying to raise awareness about the environment in general and air pollution

in particular.

In general, her work has been very good.

7. (line 18) ... we are too sure of ourselves.

— ... we are too confi dent in our own opinions (and abilities) in a way that annoys

other people. (Our showing-off will make other people feel annoyed.)

8. (line 23) That’s not my nature.

— That’s not my character. / Giving the appearance of being friendly and self-

confi dent is not my character.

9. (line 23) It would be dishonest for me to act that way.

— It would not be honest for me to pretend to be friendly and self-confi dent / for me

to appear in a friendly and self-confi dent way.

10. (line 25) In reply, Dr. Zunin would claim that a little practice can help us feel

comfortable about changing our social habits.

— As an answer, Dr. Zunin would say that a little practice can help us feel at ease

about changing our social habits.

in reply: when giving an answer (to); as an answer

e.g. She just shrugged her shoulders in reply (to their questions).

“Where are we going?” Jill asked. The driver only lifted his hand in reply, as if to

silence her.

“That won’t be necessary,” Wilson said in reply to the question.

claim: to say that something is true, state as a fact

e.g. He claimed that he saw the accident.

He claimed to be the owner of the store.

habit: usually something someone does again and again, perhaps without realizing it

e.g. He has an annoying habit of biting his nails.

When she is busy, her eating habits become irregular.

cf. custom: usually something which has been done for a long time by a group, for

example, a school, company, or society

e.g. the custom of holding exams in June

a local custom

In my country, it’s the custom (for women) to get married in white.

cf. practice: the usual way of doing things in business, law, etc.

e.g. The normal practice in this company is to send the bill as soon as the job is done.

It’s common practice in the States to tip the hairdresser.

11. (line 26) We can become accustomed to any changes we choose to make in our

personality.

— We can become/get used to any changes we decide to make in our personality.

Unit 1-4.indd 84 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 89: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 4 Making a Good Impression

85

become/be accustomed to: to become/be used to

e.g. Her eyes quickly became accustomed to the dark.

She quickly became accustomed to his messy ways.

I’m not accustomed to being treated like this.

choose to do something: to decide which one of a number of things you want to do

because it is the best or most suitable to you; to decide or prefer to do something or

behave in a particular way

e.g. He chose to learn German rather than French in school.

We chose to ignore her rudeness.

12. (line 27) It’s like getting used to a new car.

— It is similar in some way to getting used to a new car.

get /become /be used to: to be familiar with something or someone

e.g. Eventually you’ll get/become used to the smells of the laboratory.

We’re used to tourists here — we get thousands every year.

She was not used to speaking Cantonese.

13. (line 28) It may be unfamiliar at fi rst ...

— At fi rst you may not have knowledge or experience of the new car...

“It” here refers to “the new car”.

14. (line 33) contact: communication; an instance of meeting

e.g. He’s not had any contact with his son for months.

There is very little contact between the two tribes.

I’ve lost contact with most of my school friends.

15. (line 33) There is a time for everything, and a certain amount of play-acting may be

best for the fi rst minutes of contact with a stranger.

— Things should be done at the proper time. When you are in contact with a stranger

for the first few minutes, it may be best for you to give the appearance of being

friendly and self-confi dent and pay full attention to the person you meet.

play-acting: pretending; behavior intended to hide your real thoughts and feelings. In

the text, “play-acting” refers to being friendly and self-confi dent.

e.g. What he hoped to gain by his play-acting is not clear.

I dislike their play-acting.

cf. play-act: v.

e.g. Don’t take any notice of him — he’s just play-acting.

16. (line 35) complain about/of: to say that one is unsatisfi ed, annoyed or unhappy about

something or someone

e.g. She often complains about not being appreciated at work.

They have complained (to the council) about the noise.

17. (line 38) Much of what has been said about strangers also applies to relationships

with family members and friends.

— Much of what has been said about strangers also is true of / also goes for

Unit 1-4.indd 85 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 90: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

86

relationships with family members and friends.

apply to: to have an effect on or to concern a particular person, group, or situation

e.g. Do the same rules apply to part-time workers?

The offer only applies to fl ights from London and Manchester.

18. (line 40) ... problems often arise during their first four minutes together after they

have been apart.

— ... problems often begin to appear during the first four minutes when they meet

again after they have been separated for some time.

arise: to begin to happen, appear or occur

e.g. A crisis has arisen in the Foreign Offi ce.

A new diffi culty has arisen.

Children should be disciplined when the need arises.

cf. rise: to come or go upwards; reach a high or higher level or position

e.g. smoke rising from the chimney

The river has risen (by) several meters.

19. (line 41) Dr. Zunin suggests that these fi rst few minutes together be treated with care.

— Dr. Zunin suggests that we should take care in treating these fi rst few minutes.

Note the verb form used in the that-clause. When followed by a that-clause, many verbs,

such as propose, order, insist, demand, ask, request and recommend, can be used in this

way.

e.g. I demand that John go there at once.

The Opposition are insisting that the Minister resign.

In present-day English, however, various verb forms are possible, especially in an

informal style.

e.g. Her uncle suggests that she gets a job in a bank.

He suggested that she got a job in a bank.

The Opposition are insisting that the Minister resigns.

20. (line 42) If there are unpleasant matters to be discussed, they should be dealt with

later.

— If one wants to discuss unpleasant matters with others, he should deal with these

things later.

deal with: to discuss; tell about; attend to

e.g. Now let’s deal with the work of teaching.

This book deals with questions about Political Economy.

How can I deal with my work when you play that loud music?

21. (line 45) a required course: a course students must attend.

22. (line 45) ... along with reading, writing, and mathematics.

— ... together with reading, writing, and mathematics.

along with: in addition to; together with

e.g. Tobacco is taxed in most countries, along with alcohol.

Unit 1-4.indd 86 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 91: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 4 Making a Good Impression

87

California, along with Florida and Hawaii, is among the most popular US tourist

destinations.

Dunne was murdered, along with three guards.

23. (line 46) In his opinion, success in life depends mainly on how we get along with

other people.

— Dr. Zunin believes that success in life relies, to a great / large degree, on our

relationship with other people.

get along with someone: to have a comfortable or friendly relationship with someone;

get on with someone

e.g. Do you get along with your boss?

I don’t really get along with my sister’s husband.

cf. Do you and your boss get along?

24. (line 47) That is at least as important as how much we know.

— How we get along with other people is no less important than how much we know.

“That” refers to “how we get along with other people”.

at least: no less than

e.g. 1. The repairs will cost at least twenty pounds.

It will cost at least $100.

2. used to emphasize that something is good in a bad situation.

e.g. It’s a small house but at least there’s a garden.

The house still needed a lot of work, but at least the kitchen was fi nished.

IV Summary of the Text

According to Dr. Zunin, the fi rst four minutes plays an important role in making new

friends. However, some people do not usually pay enough attention to someone they fi rst

meet. When fi rst introduced to a stranger, though we may feel uncomfortable at fi rst, we

should try to appear friendly and self-confi dent rather than too sure of ourselves. A little

practice can help us feel confi dent about changing our social habits. We need not always

be totally honest in our associations with strangers and should choose the right time for

everything in our relationships with both strangers, family members and friends. In short,

interpersonal relations is one of the decisive elements of success and should be regarded as

a must in every school.

V Text-related Information

The Essence of Good Manners:

Good manners have two aspects: an inner concern for other people’s needs and

feelings, and an outer expression in certain kind of acts, by which our home training is

often judged. If we have only the outer expressions it is like having the shell without the

nut. The “nut” of good manners is thoughtfulness for others, and that just means applying

Unit 1-4.indd 87 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 92: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

88

the Golden Rule: treating others in the way that you would like to be treated.

One aspect of this thoughtfulness is to dress and conduct oneself properly. The sight of

tastefully dressed people with gracious manners adds a considerable amount of pleasure to

everyday life. Whereas the absence of it is felt as a distinct lack and a source of discomfort

and annoyance.

The differences between good manners in China and good manners in the West are

sometimes great. So if one wants to get on well among Westerners, and make them feel

comfortable in his/her presence, it is very important to learn good Western manners.

Text B

Table Manners and Customs

I Introduction

1. Introductory Remarks

In different parts of the world, there are different table manners and customs. People in

the East eat in different ways from those in the West. Even among western countries there are

differences between table manners. And what’s more, in the same country, table manners have

not always been the same and changed with time.

2. Introductory Questions

1. Do you know what is considered good /bad table manners in China?

2. Do you know what is considered good /bad table manners in the West?

3. Do table manners change with time? Give examples.

4. What would you think if your guest belched after the meal? (made a noise when air

came up from the stomach)

5. Do you keep one hand in your lap while eating?

II Outline

Para. 1 There are different table manners in different parts of the world.

Para. 2Some people in the East have taken up the table manners and customs of western people

Paras. 3-- 4In the West, there are differences between table manners in various countries.

Paras. 5-- 7 Table manners have changed with time.

Text B

Unit 1-4.indd 88 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 93: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 4 Making a Good Impression

89

III Detailed Study of the Text

1. Table Manners

The word “manners” used in the plural form means habits and customs. Table manners

are the way people behave at meals.

e.g. It isn’t good manners to make too many inquiries into people’s personal affairs.

It’s considered good manners in some societies to leave a little food on your plate.

2. (line 2) fall off: to come off (something) by falling

e.g. A button has fallen off my coat.

Has that child fallen off the bicycle again?

3. (line 3) ... there are also rules for people to follow when they are eating, but they are

not the same as those of Britain.

— …when people are eating they act according to some rules, but these rules are

different from those of Britain.

the same (...) as: used to mean two or more people, things, etc. are exactly like each

other

e.g. He gets the same pay as me but he has his own offi ce.

I think the same as you do about this.

4. (line 4) Indeed, what are considered good table manners in some other countries are

what British people try hardest to avoid.

— Indeed, certain ways of behaving at table are considered good manners in some

other countries but British people would try their best to avoid them.

5. (line 7)... to show that they have appreciated it.

— ... to show that they have enjoyed the good qualities of the food.

appreciate: to recognize and enjoy the good qualities of something; understand

something and show consideration or sympathy

e.g. You can’t fully appreciate foreign literature in translation.

I really appreciate a good cup of tea.

I appreciate your problem, but I don’t think I can help you.

You don’t seem to appreciate how busy I am.

6. (line 9) The richer and more educated people in the East have, however, to a great

extent taken up the table manners ...

— However, the richer and more educated people in the East have largely accepted

and learned to practice the table manners ...

to a great/large extent: to a great / large degree

e.g. These policies are to a large extent responsible for the region’s economic decline.

To a great extent (= Mostly) people go on holiday there to enjoy the good weather.

cf. to a certain extent / to some extent: used to mean that something is partly, but not

completely true

to a lesser/greater extent: used when comparing two things to mean that one thing has

less or more infl uence than the other

Unit 1-4.indd 89 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 94: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

90

take up: to learn or start to perform a certain activity, especially for pleasure; start or

begin something, especially a job

e.g. She has taken up golf.

She has taken up a job as a teacher.

7. (line 11) replace: to use something instead of something else; start doing something

instead of someone else

e.g. These PCs have replaced the old system network.

I’m replacing Sue on the team.

8. (line 16) ... both traditional and Western styles of eating exist side by side.

— ...there are both traditional and Western table manners.

side by side: 1. if different things or groups exist side by side, they exist in the same

place or at the same time, even though this may seem diffi cult or surprising

e.g. The two communities exist happily side by side.

They paid a visit to see how modern agriculture and wildlife can exist side by side.

2. next to each other

e.g. We walked along the beach, side by side.

The children sat side by side watching television.

3. if people work side by side, they work together to achieve something

e.g. We’ve worked side by side for years.

Local citizens worked side by side with emergency crews to pull their neighbors

out of the rubble.

9. (line 18) ... in various countries, although they are not so marked.

— ... in different countries, although it is not easy to notice these differences /

although the differences are not so obvious and easily noticed.

10. (line 24) course: a part of a meal which is served separately from the other parts

e.g. a four-course lunch

A traditional British main course consists of a meat dish with potatoes and other

vegetables.

11. (line 25) Drinking customs at table also vary in different countries.

— Drinking customs at table are also different from country to country.

vary: 1. to be different

e.g. Teaching methods vary greatly from school to school.

fl owers that vary in color and size

2. to change often

e.g. His mood seems to vary according to the weather.

cf. change: 1. to become different

e.g. Susan has changed a lot since I last saw her.

2. to stop having or doing one thing and start having or doing something

else instead

e.g. We’ve changed from traditional methods of production to an automated system.

Unit 1-4.indd 90 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 95: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 4 Making a Good Impression

91

12. (line 28) Table manners of course have changed with time.

— As time went by, table manners also have changed / become different.

13. (line 30) wait on someone: to serve food to someone at their table

e.g. The staff who waited on us at dinner were excellent.

The food was good when I got the correct order, but they seemed very unhappy to

wait on customers there.

14. (line 32) the middle age: also the Middle Ages, the period in European history between

about AD 1100 and 1500 or sometimes, in a wider sense, between AD 500 and 1500.

15. (line 32) Food was eaten off wooden dishes with the noblemen sitting above a large

salt cellar called simply “the salt”.

Note the sentence structure here: a main clause + with + N + V-ing.

eat off: to eat (one’s food) from (certain dishes)

e.g. Does the Queen really eat her meals off gold plates?

16. (line 34) Henry VIIL: (1509-1547) one of the most famous English Kings

17. (line 35) Forks were not used in England until the 17th century.

— Only in the 17th century did people in England begin to use forks.

18. (line 38) Louis XIV: (1638-1715) a King of France, who is also called the Sun King

because of the beauty and riches of his court at Versailles.

19. (line 38) prevent (from): to stop someone from doing something

e.g. The rain prevented me (from) coming.

His back inju ry may prevent him from playing in tomorrow’s game.

We were prevented from entering the site.

IV Summary of the Text

(For reference)

Table manners in our world differ from country to country and from region to region.

Western style of eating is considered to have largely infl uenced Eastern countries. But even

Western countries themselves differ in this respect. People in these countries do not use

the knife and fork in the same way. There are also differences in drinking customs. And

naturally table manners have seen many changes throughout history, from ancient times,

through the Middle Ages, to the 17th century. These changes include the kinds of food, the

containers for holding food and special rules of behavior.

V Text-related Information

1. Rules and Suggestions as to Table Manners:

1. Sit up straight on your chair, do not lean heavily against the back. Never tilt the

chair backward on two legs. You may lean the body slightly forward when you eat,

but never lower the head down toward the plate. Your arms should be held close

to your sides, so as not to touch the person next to you, and they should not rest on

the table when you are eating.

Unit 1-4.indd 91 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 96: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

92

2. Do not put much food in your mouth at a time. Keep your lips closed while

chewing. And as long as there is food in your mouth, do not try to talk.

3. Drink only when there is no food in your mouth. It is bad manners to take a

mouthful of food and then wash it down with a gulp of water. Be sure your lips are

not greasy when you drink from your glass. Try not to get your lips greasy. If you

do, you have your napkin to wipe them with.

4. Celery, radishes, olives, fruit, dry cakes, nuts, candies, potato chips, corn on the

cob, artichokes, frog’s legs, lobster claws, and bread and rolls of all kinds are

handled with the fi ngers, but for all other food the rule is “ hands off ”.

5. Try not to get into your mouth anything that will have to be taken out. But if you

have a small bone or some other object you cannot swallow, remove it in a way that

it will not be noticed. If you are eating with a spoon, take it in the spoon from your

mouth to the plate; if not, use your hand. Do not spit anything from your mouth on

to the plate or on to the fl oor.

6. Be careful not to drop any food or spill any water on the table cloth. If you have an

accident, do not do anything which will make others notice it, but always apologize

quietly to the hostess. You might say, “Oh, I am so sorry, I was very careless.”

7. Do not make any noise when you eat. It is bad manners at a Western meal to make

any noise with the mouth, such as noisily sipping the soup or smacking the lips

or the unpleasant sound of belching. And if you have to cough or choke, use your

napkin to cover your mouth.

8. Do not clean your teeth at the table or anywhere in public, either with your fi nger

or a tooth pick, not even with your tongue. If you have to get something out which

is caught between your teeth, cover your mouth with your napkin while you do so;

but it is better to leave it until you are alone sometime later.

2. Table Manners in Britain:

What should I do or not do when I am eating in Britain?

The British generally pay a lot of attention to good table manners. Even young

children are expected to eat properly with knife and fork.

We eat most of our food with cutlery. The foods we don’t eat with a knife, fork or

spoon include sandwiches, crisps, corn on the cob, and fruit.

Things you should do:

If you cannot eat a certain type of food or have some special needs, tell your host

several days before the dinner party.

If you are a guest, it is polite to wait until your host starts eating or indicates you

should do so. It shows consideration.

Always chew and swallow all the food in your mouth before taking more or taking

a drink.

You may eat chicken and pizza with your fi ngers if you are at a barbecue, fi nger

Unit 1-4.indd 92 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 97: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 4 Making a Good Impression

93

buffet or very informal setting. Otherwise always use a knife and fork.

Always say thank you when served something. It shows appreciation.

When eating rolls, break off a piece of bread before buttering. Eating it whole looks

tacky.

When eating soup, tip the bowl away from you and scoop the soup up with your

spoon.

When you have fi nished eating, and to let others know that you have, place your

knife and folk together, with the prongs (tines) on the fork facing upwards, on your

plate.

In a restaurant, it is normal to pay for your food by putting your money on the

plate.

Things you should not do:

Never lick or put your knife in your mouth.

It is impolite to start eating before everyone has been served.

Never chew with your mouth open. No one wants to see food being chewed or

hearing it being chomped on.

It is impolite to have your elbows on the table while you are eating.

Don’t reach over someone’s plate for something, ask for the item to be passed.

Never talk with food in your mouth.

It is impolite to put too much food in your mouth.

Never use your fi ngers to push food onto your spoon or fork.

It is impolite to slurp your food or eat noisily.

Never blow your nose on a napkin (serviette). Napkins are for dabbing your lips

and only for that.

Never take food from your neighbors plate.

Never pick food out of your teeth with your fi ngernails.

Things that are OK to do:

It is OK to eat and drink something while walking down the street, unless you want

to seem posh.

It is OK to pour your own drink when eating with other people, but it is more polite

to offer pouring drinks to the people sitting on either side of you.

It is OK to put milk and sugar in your tea or coffee or to drink them both without

either.

I am not used to eating with a knife and fork. What do I need to know?

We eat continental style, with fork in the left hand and the knife in the right (or the

other way round if you are left-handed). At the top of your plate will be a dessert spoon

and dessert fork.

If you are eating at a formal dinner party, you will come across many knives and

forks. Start with the utensils on the outside and work your way inward with each

Unit 1-4.indd 93 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 98: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

94

subsequent course

How to eat with a knife and fork in England?

The fork is held in the left hand and the knife in the right.

If you have a knife in one hand, it is wrong to have a fork in the other with the

prongs (tines) pointed up.

Hold your knife with the handle in your palm and your folk in the other hand with

the prongs pointing downwards.

When eating in formal situations, rest the fork and knife on the plate between

mouthfuls, or for a break for conversation.

If you put your knife down, you can turn your fork over. It’s correct to change

hands when you do this.

Skills

Translation Skills

本单元的英译汉练习的重点依然是词义的引申。具体介绍参见第三单元。

Guided Writing

本单元的基础训练是句子衔接中的转折关系。这种转折关系可以是一个句子内,也可以是单个

句子以上水平的。表示转折关系的常用的词语有:but, however, nevertheless, nonetheless, yet,

conversely, on the other hand等。

比如:

The play’s good, but not that good – I’ve seen better.

You can invite Keith to the party, but please don’t ask that friend of his.

This is one possible solution to the problem. However, there are others.

The leaves aren’t particularly dangerous, but nevertheless they are not something you’d want

your child or pet to eat.

It was a terrible accident. Nevertheless, air travel is still the safest form of transport.

December saw a more than average rainfall; however, the possibility of a drought is still

strong.

War is never welcome, nonetheless, I believe that we must defend our country.

Nuclear power is relatively cheap. On the other hand, you could argue that it's not safe.

Skills

Unit 1-4.indd 94 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 99: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 4 Making a Good Impression

95

You want to help your kids as much as you can, but on the other hand, you’ve got to be

careful to help them learn on their own.

Teaching is an interesting job. Then again, it can be very stressful too.

This trip is going to be very expensive. Still, we don’t go away very often.

My parents are happy to lend me the money. All the same, I do feel guilty about it.

Last summer there was a drought, yet some people were still watering their lawns every day.

本单元的实用英语写作部分为根据所提供的信息写贺卡。贺卡的种类很多,有生日卡、圣诞卡、

新年卡、结婚纪念卡等等。由于这些贺卡上均印有贺词,寄卡人只需署名即可,也可以在印好贺词上

方或下面再写上个人的祝愿词。本单元的练习就是要求在印有贺词的卡上添加自己个人的祝愿词。

Dear Robert, Congratulations and sincere good wishes on your birthday.

Sincerely yours,

Max Walters

To Mr. and Mrs. W. DeanWith Best Wishes

for

A Merry Christmas

and

A Happy New Year

From Mr. and Mrs. Healey

常用贺词:

圣诞节和新年贺词

1. A very merry Christmas and a wonderful New Year

2. With every good wish for Christmas and the New Year

3. Best wishes for your happiness this Christmas Season and during the coming year.

4. May you and your family capture the magic of Christmas and enjoy its every pleasure!

5. Season’s Greetings and Best Wishes for the Coming Year

生日贺词

1. Many happy returns of the day!

2. Smile, it is your birthday!

3. Don’t feel bad growing old. I am right behind you.

4. We may grow old together, but as long as we are together, I feel young.

5. Allow me to wish you many happy returns of the day.

6. Accept my best wishes for many happy returns of this day.

7. I know very well that today is your birthday, and wish you all happiness, health and

Unit 1-4.indd 95 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 100: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

96

prosperity, with many happy returns of the day.

8. With my best wishes for your future happiness.

新婚贺词

1. I wish you both the best of luck and, ever-increasing happiness as the years go by.

2. I wish you both all the luck and happiness life can offer.

3. Please accept our most sincere congratulations upon your holy matrimony with... and

very best wishes for all the good future in the world.

4. Allow me to join the chorus of congratulations upon your recent marriage.

5. My husband joins me in hoping that you have a long and happy and prosperous life together.

6. Our best wishes to the two of you for a happy marriage fi lled with all the good things.

7. My very best wishes to you for a lifetime of happiness.

8. I hope you will have nothing but joy and happiness in your life together.

9. May you always have everything you wish for a rich life together.

10. My sincere congratulations on your happy marriage and my best wishes to you two for a

lifetime of happiness.

Reading Skills –– Reading for Details (2):

Understanding Examples

Specifi c Aim 1: To help the students be aware of the common use of examples, usually

seen to illustrate a topic sentence or a general idea in text.

Why? This may help you read while associating the topic or general idea with

specifi c examples, such as a case, an event, or an instance, so as to better

understand the main idea.

Specifi c Aim 2: To train the students to identify basic patterns of the use of examples.

Why? A topic sentence “tells” in general, while specific examples help the

reader “see” and “experience” what is told.

Example:

Telling sentence: My grandma teaches me about my culture.

Specifi c examples: She comes from China and speaks Chinese to me even when I answer

in English. She loves to play Mah-jongg with her friends. When she can’t play with her friends,

she plays with me. She taught me how to make dumplings for Chinese New Year. And I can

even write Chinese calligraphy. Thanks to my grandma, I am proud of my heritage.

Signal Words for Giving Examples:

like, such as, for example, for instance, an /one example of, be illustrated by, as

illustrated by, to illustrate

Unit 1-4.indd 96 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 101: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 4 Making a Good Impression

97

Key to the Exercises

Text A

First Reading

Exercise 1

1. C 2. B 3. A 4. B 5. C

While Reading

1. Yes. I think so. And I also think he is very rude.

2. The way of appearing friendly and self-confi dent.

Second Reading

Exercise 2

1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. T

Exercise 3

The First Four Minutes

The Main Idea: Good interpersonal relations may lead to success in life.

Dr. Zunin’s advice: 1. Give your undivided attention for the fi rst four minutes in contact.

2. Appear friendly, self-confi dent as well as sympathetic.

3. Practice some play-acting for the first few minutes of contact with a

stranger.

4. Apply all these to relationship with family members and friends, too.

5. Interpersonal relations should be a required course in school.

Oral Practice

Exercise 4

(For reference.)

Success in life depends mainly on how we get along with other people. According to Dr.

Zunin, the fi rst four minutes plays an important role in making new friends. However, some

people do not usually pay undivided attention to someone they fi rst meet. When fi rst introduced

to a stranger, though we may feel uncomfortable at fi rst, we should try to appear friendly and

self-confident rather than too sure of ourselves. A little practice can help us feel confident

about changing our social habits. We need not always be totally honest in our associations

with strangers and should choose the right time for everything in our relationships with both

strangers, family members and friends. In short, interpersonal relations is one of the decisive

elements of success and should be regarded as a must in every school.

First Reading

Key to the ExercisesKey to the Exercises

While Reading

Second Reading

Oral Practice

Unit 1-4.indd 97 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 102: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

98

Vocabulary and Structure

Exercise 5

1. impression 2. sympathetic 3. required 4. arise 5. contact

6. mentioned 7. claimed 8. fault 9. dishonest 10. personalities

Exercise 6

1. got accustomed to 2. applies… to 3. in your opinion

4. on the other hand 5. get along with 6. deal with

7. in general 8. along with 9. depend on

10. complained about

Exercise 7

1. to 2. in 3. in 4. on 5. to

6. In 7. with 8. In 9. to 10. about

Exercise 8

EXPRESSIONS impression attention

pay to somebody/something ★

make an on somebody ★

turn one’s to somebody/something ★

give one’s to somebody/something ★

attract /catch somebody’s ★

have/get the that… ★

leave an on somebody ★

hold/keep somebody’s ★

escape someone’s ★

turn one’s to somebody/something ★

1. have /get the impression 2. keep /hold the students’ attention

3. turn our attention to 4. make /leave a good impression on

5. attracted/ caught my attention 6. pay attention to

7. escape his attention 8. make quite an impression on

Exercise 9

1. fault 2. mistakes 3. common 4. average

5. habit 6. custom 7. risen 8. arises

Exercise 10

1. It is the way you think that affects all aspects of your life.

Unit 1-4.indd 98 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 103: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 4 Making a Good Impression

99

2. It is the simple act of helping others that helps us to feel good.

3. It was Helen whom he bought the car from last year.

4. It was during this time that blues and country musicians had some influence on each

other.

5. It was at these meetings that many pop stars fi rst learned to sing and to love music.

Exercise 11

1. as if I were /was a child

2. as if she knew me

3. as if he were /was my boss

4. as if I were /was their servant

5. as if she hadn’t slept very much

Translation Practice

Exercise 12

1. 它的根源可以追溯到许多不同的国家、不同类型的音乐和音乐家。

2. 胜利永远属于强者。

3. 这把钥匙插不进这把锁。

4. 两年以后,他便风靡全国。(他成了全国风云人物。)

5. 最聪明的做法是把要读的章节粗略地看一遍。

6. 我正在忙着为这次长途旅行打点行装。

7. 我有了个主意。

8. 你要一般尺寸还是特大尺寸?

Exercise 13

1. He stared at me as if seeing me /he saw me for the fi rst time.

2. This rule applies to new employees /workers only.

3. Success in life depends mainly on how we get along with other people. / Success in life

depends, to a large extent, on how we get along with other people.

4. It is during these first four minutes that we decide whether or not we want to become

friends.

5. The fi rst four minutes is not the time to complain about one’s health or to mention faults

one fi nds in other people.

Writing Practice

Exercise 14

1. Some volunteers have used their free time to visit their own families. However, this is

not advised. / Some volunteers have used their free time to visit their own families; this,

however, is not advised.

2. Some volunteers are retired workers, but many are businesspeople who take time off to

Unit 1-4.indd 99 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 104: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

100

make a difference to their community.

3. There are serious problems in our country. Nonetheless, we feel this is a good time to

return.

4. I fi nd the class particularly challenging. Nevertheless, I can say that it is my favourite class

and I enjoy it.

5. Rufus had been living in the town for over a decade. Nevertheless, the people in the town

still considered him to be an outsider.

6. It is hard to say if these tasks are more diffi cult; however they are very different. / It is hard

to say if these tasks are more diffi cult. However, they are very different.

7. She does not speak our language, (and) yet she seems to understand what we say.

8. We’ve invited the boss, but she may decide not to come.

Exercise 15

(For reference.)

To Christina

Most sincerely —

Wishing You the Blessings

and Joys of Christmas

and a Happy New Year in 2016From Wang Dawei

I wish you a very happy journey home for the holiday — may you have a cheerful time

in your hometown. Also, I hope we will meet again in your country in the near future.

Dictation

Exercise 16

1. 7 seconds 2. 90 percent

3. appearance 4. hair style

5. Long hair 6. I’m confi dent

7. matters 8. make eye contact

9. you need to remember 10. making the person you meet feel good

Unit 1-4.indd 100 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 105: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 4 Making a Good Impression

101

Text B

First Reading

Exercise 1

1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T 6. T

Second Reading

Exercise 2

1. The following are considered good manners at table in Great Britain today: eating with the

mouth closed; not letting any of the food fall off the plate; using the knife only for cutting;

and not trying to take food across the table.

2. When they are richer and more educated, some people in the East have taken up the table

manners and customs of western people, such as replacing the cushions with tables and

chairs, or with the lady of the house presiding at one end of the table.

3. Western people in different countries have different table manners, although the

differences are not so marked.

4. At American meals, the knife should be put down after use, while during British meals, the

knife should be kept in the right hand all the time.

5. In Europe, water, wine or beer is drunk with meals and coffee or tea is taken afterwards,

while North America a beverage such as coffee, tea or milk is drunk with meals.

6. The women waited on the warriors and afterwards ate what they left.

7. By using their fi ngers or hands.

8. To prevent people from stabbing each other while they were eating.

Reading Skills

Exercise 3

1. The fi rst sentence is the topic sentence.

2. Example one: the fork to be put down after use or kept in hand throughout the meal. (North

America compared with Europe)

Example two: special knives for fi sh or for every course. (The British Isles and Scandinavia

compared with Belgium and Italy)

3. Topic sentence: Drinking customs at table also vary in different countries.

Examples: 1. In Europe, water, wine or beer is drunk with meals and coffee or tea is taken

afterwards.

2. In North America a beverage such as coffee, tea or milk is drunk with meals.

Exercise 4

1. Examples: Time, Newsweek, and U.S. News and World Report

Signal words: such as

2. Example(s): In Arabia, the people at a feast take pieces of food with their fi ngers and belch

Unit 1-4.indd 101 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 106: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

102

loudly to show that they have appreciated it.

Signal words: for instance

3. Example(s): People in Western countries usually kiss each other to show their greetings,

whereas in China, kissing in public is something unusual and sometimes be regarded as

impolite to somebody else.

Signal words: for example

4. Example(s): 51% of people said they would not work longer hours for more money.

Signal words: is illustrated by

5. Example(s): At weddings in Japan, China, and some other Asian countries, guests give the

bride and groom money wrapped in a special card. In Western countries, wedding guests

normally buy the bride and groom a gift. The only people who commonly give money as a

gift at Western weddings are the bride and groom’s parents, but they may also buy a gift,

too.

Signal words: for example

Vocabulary Practice

Exercise 5

1. presided 2. replace 3. various 4. extent 5. marked

6. appreciate 7. vary, vary 8. educate 9. custom 10. quarrel

Exercise 6

1. side by side 2. to a large extent 3. waited on 4. the same as

5. For instance 6. fell off 7. took up 8. prevent… from

9. cut up 10. changing with time

Expanding Your Vocabulary

Exercise 7

1. disagreed/agreed 2. leadership 3. disliked 4. disfavour

5. distrust 6. readership 7. ownership 8. disbelieve

9. fellowship 10. disarm

Exercise 8

1. polite 2. as 3. manners 4. closed 5. sure

6. order 7. For instance 8. fork 9. Although 10. feel free

Unit 1-4.indd 102 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 107: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 4 Making a Good Impression

103

参考译文

Text A

最初四分钟

人们什么时候决定他们是否想交个朋友呢?伦纳德·祖宁博士书中的答案是:在一起的最初四分

钟。在他的书《接触:最初的四分钟》中,他给那些希望开始新的友谊的人们这样的建议:“每次

你在社交场合遇见某人,请专心地注意着他四分钟。如果能这样做,很多人整个的生活可能都会

改变。”

你可能已经注意到,一般人并没有专心地关注自己刚刚遇见的那位人,总是东张西望,似乎在

寻找房间里另一边更有吸引力的人。如果有人这样对你,你大概不会喜欢他的。

作者建议:当把我们介绍给陌生人时,我们要尽量显得友好和自信。他说,一般来讲,“人们

喜欢那些喜欢自己的人。”

另一方面,我们不应该让他人觉得我们太过于自信了。对他人表示有兴趣,同情很重要,要注

意到他人的需要,担忧和愿望。

听到这样的建议,人们或许会说:“但是我不是一个友好而自信的人。这不是我的本性。让我

这样做是不诚实的。”

祖宁博士回答道,稍加练习就能使我们对改变自己的社交习惯感到坦然。我们可以习惯自己所

选择的任何性格上的改变。“这好比习惯一辆新车。起初可能对它不熟悉,但它比旧车好多了。”

但是我们表现出的友好和自信,事实上并不真的感觉如此,这样做是否不诚实呢?也许是的,

可是照祖宁博士的说法,“完全的诚实”未必总是有利于社交关系,在开始几分钟的接触当中尤其

如此。任何事情总有适合的时机,与陌生人接触的开头几分钟最好稍微假装一下。这可不是抱怨身

体不好或谈论别人有什么缺点的时候。这时把自己的见解和印象和盘托出是不适宜的。

这些已经提到的和陌生人打交道的方式也适用于家庭成员之间和朋友之间。往往在久别后重聚

的开始几分钟,夫妻之间或父母和孩子之间的关系最容易出问题。祖宁博士建议说,必须小心对待

相聚后的最初几分钟。如有什么不愉快的事情要讨论,应该留到以后再说。

作者声称人际关系课应该和阅读、写作、数学一样,成为每个学校的必修课。在他看来,生活

成功与否很大程度上取决于我们与其他人相处得怎么样。这至少和我们懂得多少知识同样重要。

Text B

餐桌礼仪和风俗

在今日英国,好的餐桌礼仪包括吃东西时不讲话;不能让食物掉落到盘子外;只在切东西时

用餐刀;不能越过桌子拿食物。世界其他地方也有进餐礼仪,但和英国的不同。事实上,一些其

他国家认为餐桌上的好礼仪,英国人却极力地避免。比如,在阿拉伯,人们在宴席上用手指拿吃

的,并且大声地打嗝以示他们真的很喜欢那些食物。

然而,富裕而且受教育多的东方人在很大程度上会接受西方的餐桌礼仪和习俗。餐桌和椅子

参考译文

Unit 1-4.indd 103 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 108: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

104

取代了以往的坐垫,与西方妇女一样,作为主持的女主人坐在餐桌的一端招待客人。然而很多日

本人仍然认为,倘若就餐不是坐在低矮桌子前的坐垫上,桌子上放着一盘食物,那就不妥了。世

界上很多地方同时接受传统的和西方的进餐方式。

在西方,不同的国家有不同的餐桌礼仪,尽管这些差异不那么明显。在北美,人们认为切完

肉后把餐刀放下来,右手拿叉吃东西比较礼貌。多数欧洲人,比如英国人,吃需要切的食物时,

始终左手持叉右手拿着餐刀。在大不列颠诸岛和斯堪的那维亚(挪威、瑞典、丹麦和冰岛),人

们用特殊的刀和叉吃鱼。然而在法国、比利时和意大利,任何菜都用同一把餐刀,只是把它在面

包上擦一下。

不同国家餐桌上用饮料的习惯也不同。在欧洲,开水,葡萄酒或啤酒与食品一起用,咖啡和

茶之后才用。在北美,人们一同食用诸如咖啡、茶或牛奶这些饮料和食品。

餐桌礼仪随着时间变化当然改变了很多。最早的食物也是最简单的。人们围着一堆火坐在地

上,每个人从火堆上的罐子里取食物,或者从烤熟的动物或飞禽上切下肉来吃。女人伺候武士

们,然后吃他们吃剩下的食物。

整个中世纪时人们用手抓东西吃。人们用木碟子吃东西,而贵族们坐在一个就叫“盐”的大

盐窖上,普通人坐在“盐”的下面。在亨利八世(1509—1547)统治期间,人们仍然用一直挂

在腰带上的折刀切食物,然后用手抓着吃。直到17世纪英国人才开始使用叉子。

餐桌礼仪不总是安静的行为。饭桌上吵架时有发生,于是在17世纪,法国国王路易十四下令

规定,所有餐具的刀尖都必须做成圆头的,以免人们在饭桌上吵架时互相刺伤。

Unit 1-4.indd 104 16/3/24 上午9:17

Page 109: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Community and Society

Unit

5

ObjectivesObjectivesObjectives

Text A Text B

Words

community, voluntary, citizen,

confine, handicapped, particular,

worthwhile, delighted, scheme,

source, concerned, variety

pioneer, obtain, pollution,

manufacture, invent, solve, disrepair,

endless,commute, poverty,

independent, private

Phrases and

Expressions

make sure, in a position, in danger

of, put up, in need of, confine to, be

concerned with, give up, carry out,

lend a hand, more than, occur to

wait on, fall into, take up, spread out,

in one’s own way, in part, grow up,

stay behind, on the move, to some

extent

Collocation bring + objective take + objective

Confusable Words lonely/alone, lend/borrow, root/source, limit/confi ne

StructuresThere are many people who have nobody near to see their need for help.

People confi ned to wheelchairs cannot go out unless somebody takes them.

Translation

Practice词类转换

Writing Practice Write Correct Sentences/ Write Invitation Letters

Reading Skills Reading for Details (3): Understanding, Cause and Effect

Expanding Your

Vocabulary

home + less → homeless, friend + less → friendless, end + less → endless

un + limited → unlimited, un + polluted → unpolluted, un + certain →

uncertain 105

Unit 1-5.indd 105 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 110: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

106

Text A

Community Service

I Introduction

1. Introductory Remarks

In the world, there are many people who need help. As for those who have nobody

around them to see their need, they can turn to community service organizations for

help. Supported by the volunteers, community service organizations carry out a variety

of tasks, providing help to the old, the handicapped, the homeless and the friendless.

2. Introductory Questions

1. What is community service?

2. Are most people today ready to help others when they are in trouble?

3. Are you sure you can always get help from others when you need it?

4. Is it necessary for our society to form an organization to give help to those who need it?

5. If you want to offer your helping hand, where do you go to get the information about

who is in need of help?

II Outline

Paras. 1-- 2 Community service is a way to help people in need.

Paras. 3-- 4 The help offered by community service

Para. 5 Ways to get the information about voluntary activities

III Detailed Study of the Text

1. (line 1) The idea of helping people comes naturally to most of us.

— As might be expected, most of us are willing to help others. / Most of us will

naturally think of helping others.

come to someone: (an idea) to enter someone’s mind

e.g. It suddenly came to her that she had been wrong all along.

Suddenly the words of the song came to me.

naturally: of course; as you would expect

e.g. The team was naturally upset about its defeat.

Naturally I want to win the game.cf. Speaking comes naturally to her.

Text A

Unit 1-5.indd 106 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 111: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 5 Community and Society

107

2. (line 2) If we see a blind person getting off a bus, we watch to make sure that he is in

no danger of falling.

— If we see a blind person getting off a bus, we watch to check he is not likely to be

hurt.

Note the structure “see somebody doing something”. Other verbs like watch, hear, listen

to, observe can be used in this structure.

cf. “see somebody do something”

make sure: to check that something has been done or fi nd out if something is true

e.g. I only came to make sure that everything was all right.

He glanced over his shoulder to make sure that there was nobody listening.

cf. make certain

e.g. Can you draw Harry a map just to make certain he’ll fi nd the hotel?

In order to make certain that the letter was delivered, he registered it.be in (no) danger of: (not) to be in a situation in which something unpleasant may

happen e.g. He was in no danger of losing his life.

While in danger of being attacked by two gunmen, she was surprisingly calm.3. (line 7) There are many people who have nobody near to see their need for help and

often nobody to give it even when the need is known.

— Many people cannot get help because there are no people nearby to learn about

their need for help and often even when people know they need help, nobody gives

it.

In the sentence, “it” refers to “help”.Notice that in the sentence the relative pronoun “who” is used to introduce a relative

clause “who have nobody near to see their need for help”.

e.g. She’s one of those people who love to be the centre of attention.

Do you know the people who live over the road?4. (line 12) It may not have occurred to you that you are in a position to help.

— You may have never had the idea that you are able to help others.

occur to: to come into (someone’s) mind

e.g. Did it ever occur to you that you would go abroad?

As soon as the thought occurred to him, he felt worse.

cf. happen to someone: If something happens to someone or something, it has an

effect on them and changes them in some way.e.g. I don’t know what I’d do if anything happened to him (= if he was hurt, became ill,

or died).

What happened to your jacket? There’s a big rip in the sleeve. What’s happened to my pen (= Where is it)? I put it down there a few moments

ago.

be in a position to do something: to be able to do something

Unit 1-5.indd 107 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 112: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

108

e.g. Perhaps I shall be in a position to help you next week.

When I know all the facts, I’ll be in a position to advise you.

cf. be in no position to do something: to be unable to do something

e.g. The poor family was in no position to bring up the twins.

I’m sorry I’m in no position to assist you now.5. (line 16) These organizations depend on voluntary help to carry out a wide variety of

tasks, volunteers giving up a little of their spare time to lend a hand.

— To complete different kinds of tasks, these organizations need the help and support

of volunteers, who use a little of their spare time to offer their help and support.

Note the absolute construction of “N + V-ing” in the sentence.

carry out: to perform or complete (a job or activity); fulfi ll

e.g. The hospital is carrying out tests to fi nd out what’s wrong with her.

Don’t blame me, I’m only carrying out my orders/instructions.

a variety of: a lot of a particular type of things that are different from each other e.g. a variety of matters/purposes

The girls come from a variety of different backgrounds. give up: 1. to agree to do something during the time you would normally spend doing

things you enjoye.g. The club secretary will need to give up an hour or two in a week to do the

correspondence.

Doing this course will mean giving up a lot of my spare time. 2. to stop doing something or having something, especially something that you

do regularly

e.g. He’s given up driving since his illness.

We’re going to give up our sports club membership after this year.

I’ve given up trying to help her.

They were forced to give up their home because they couldn’t pay the mortgage.

lend a hand: to help

e.g. I just thought I’d come up and lend a hand.

We must lend a hand with his problem.

Lend me a hand with this box.

cf. lend an ear: to listen to someone, especially in a sympathetic way

e.g. He lend an attentive ear to the words of wisdom.

The King lent an ear to the complaints of his people.6. (line 19) If you wish to take part in this worthwhile activity…

— If you want to get involved in this useful activity…

take part in: to be involved in an activity with other people

e.g. She doesn’t usually take part in any of the class activities.

About 400 students took part in the protest.worthwhile: if something is worthwhile, it is important or useful, or you gain something

Unit 1-5.indd 108 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 113: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 5 Community and Society

109

from it

e.g. He wanted to do a worthwhile job. We decided to give the money to a worthwhile cause (=one that helps people).Note the structures “it is worthwhile to do something” and “it is worthwhile doing

something”.e.g. As a musician it is worthwhile to deal both with copyright and performing right.

I thought it was worthwhile to clarify the matter. It wasn’t worthwhile continuing with the project.

If you own a computer it is worthwhile entering all your vocabulary on to a disk

from early on in your program.

7. (line 20) Think of the people most in need of help ...

— Think of the people who need help most ... be in need of: to neede.g. I felt lonely and in need of companionship.

The whole house is in need of decorating.

8. (line 21) Much of the work of community service is concerned with the care of the

elderly and the handicapped.

— Much of the work of community service is about the care of the elderly and the

handicapped.

be concerned with: to be about

e.g. The chapter is concerned with changes that are likely to take place.

I want to borrow a book which is concerned with American history.9. (line 24) … taking care of the garden may all prove diffi cult.

— … looking after the garden may all turn out to be diffi cult.

take care of: to look aftere.g. Who’s taking care of the dog while you’re away?

Her secretary always took care of the details.

prove: (used as a link verb) to turn out (to be)

e.g. These books proved interesting.

Her advice did prove sound. The young man has proved competent.

10. (line 25) Elderly people with failing eyesight are delighted ...

— A person with failing eyesight is the one whose eyesight is getting worse/poor. fail: (of health, sight, etc.) to become weake.g. She suffered from failing eyesight/hearing.

His last months in offi ce were marked by failing health.

be delighted: to be very pleasede.g. We’re delighted with our new house.

I was delighted at/by your news.

I’m absolutely delighted that you can come.

Unit 1-5.indd 109 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 114: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

110

We’d be delighted to come to dinner on Friday

11. (line 26) A helping hand and a friendly face can mean a great deal to a lonely elderly

person.— A person who comes to help and is friendly can be of great importance to an elderly

person who lives alone and who has nobody to talk to.

a helping hand: help; a person who offers helpe.g. But they’re frustrated that most of the time, they’re forced to rely on a helping hand.

Professionals should take comfort that a helping hand is available if needed.

lonely: unhappy because you are alone or do not have anyone to talk toe.g. a lonely old man

Don’t you get lonely being on your own all day?

cf. alone: without other peoplee.g. He likes being alone in the house.

She decided to climb the mountain alone.

Do you like living alone? At last, we’re alone together (= there are just the two of us here).

12. (line 28) People confi ned to wheelchairs cannot go out unless somebody takes them.

— People who are unable to walk can go out only if somebody takes them.

The word “unless” means “except if”.e.g. You can’t get a job unless you’ve got some experience (= You can only get a job if

you’ve got some experience).

Don’t come unless I telephone.

be confi ned to: to have to stay in a place, especially because one is ill e.g. The elderly woman was confi ned to a small apartment.

I was confi ned to bed for 10 days with a nasty bout of fl u.

Although confi ned to a wheelchair, she is active in social life.

13. (line 31) ... a visitor is then more than welcome.

— ... a visitor is then what they need most / is extremely welcome.The phrase “more than” means “very” and is used here to emphasize how welcome a

visitor is.

e.g. The store is more than happy (= very happy) to deliver goods to your home.

“I suppose you will be working late again tonight?” “More than likely (= very likely), yes.”

I was more than a little (= I was very) curious about the whole business.

We will be more than glad/ happy/ willing to help you in any way we can.

14. (line 37) Your school may have contact with an outside organization...

— Your school may be in communication with an outside organization...15. (line 42) ... are other sources of information, as is the public library.

— ... are other places from which you get information about voluntary activities and

the public library is also a source of information.

Unit 1-5.indd 110 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 115: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 5 Community and Society

111

source: 1. a thing, place, activity etc. that you get something from

e.g. They get their money from various sources.

a useful source of information

For me, music is a great source of enjoyment.

2. the cause of something, especially a problem, or the place where it startse.g. We’ve found the source of the trouble.

The recent name change has been the source of some confusion.

3. a person, book, or document that supplies you with informatione.g. List all your sources at the end of your essay.

I’ve heard from reliable sources that the company is in trouble.

as is/was/does, etc.: in the same way as someone or something else is, was, does, etc. e.g. Eve’s very tall, as was her mother.

I voted Labour, as did my wife.

IV Summary of the Text

It is regarded as our responsibility to give help to others when necessary. This help

is often accomplished by volunteering at a community service centre. Those who most

need help are the old and the handicapped, who may be lonely or unable to move about

freely. If you want to take part in this service, you can get information from such sources

as your school, a special committee or council, the public library, churches and youth

organizations.

V Text-related Information

1. Community Service:

It refers to service that a person performs for the benefit of his or her local

community. People become involved in community service for a range of reasons

— for some, serving community is altruistic act, for others it is a punishment. The

term “community service” therefore refers to projects that members of certain youth

organizations, such as the Boy Scouts and some high school students perform. It also

refers to an alternative sentencing technique in a justice system. And at times groups

of people will commit to perform service to the community as a gesture to the larger

community, as part of gift economics.

Examples of community service projects include (but are not limited to):

• cleaning a park

• collecting much needed items including clothes, shoes, bottle tabs, bottle cans, etc. • getting involved with Habitat for Humanity • reading to older people in nursing homes

• helping out your local fi re or police department

Unit 1-5.indd 111 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 116: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

112

• helping out at a local library

• tutoring developmentally disabled children for free

Community Service Among Youth:

Community service that engages youth is often called youth service. It is a

methodology that is simultaneously employed to strengthen young peoples’ senses

of civic engagement and nationalism, as well as assist them in meeting educational,

developmental and social goals.

In cases of community service among youth, the type of service performed is at

times similar to that performed by people convicted of crimes. It can also entail other

types of service. For example, a Boy Scout may undertake improvement projects —

such as repairing a structure.

When this form of community service is used, it is often a requirement of a

youth organization — the Scouting organization would require it in order for a Scout

to advance to the next rank. For high school students, it is often a requirement for a

student to advance to the next grade level or graduate from high school to perform a

certain number of hours of service.

The highest rank of scouting in the Boy Scouts of America, Eagle Scout , requires

each scout to prepare their own service project and lead it in their community. The

highest award in girl scouting, the Girl Scout Gold Award, involves setting up a similar

service project.

Community service is also used by college-bound high school seniors as a way of

attracting colleges to accept them. Though technically not a requirement for acceptance

for that specifi c college, most colleges generally use community service as an unoffi cial

college requirement for acceptance, though some colleges prefer work experience over

community service. The best overall community service hours is generally around 300

hours or more. Some colleges also require their own students by volunteering specifi c

number of hours in order to graduate and get a degree.

Service learning is the deliberate connection of community service to stated

learning goals. A common misconception among educators, youth workers, and young

people is the notion that service learning can be assigned. Several experts attest to the

necessity of engaging youth in deliberating, planning, implementing, and reflecting

on their community service, thereby sustaining high quality service learning. This is

intended to make community service an effective learning tool.

2. The Scouts: an organization founded in 1908 by Lord Baden Powell for children and

young people which teaches them to become disciplined, practical, and self-suffi cien3. The United Kingdom: the offi cial name for the country consisting of Great Britain and

Northern Ireland

Unit 1-5.indd 112 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 117: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 5 Community and Society

113

Text B

People on the Move

I Introduction

1. Introductory Remarks

The history of America is the history of the movement of the American people.

They moved from the East Coast to the West, from the country and the farm to the city,

and from the cities to the suburbs.

Today American people are beginning to move back to the city or are ready to move

from the suburbs to the country. It seems that this movement will continue to play an

important role in American history.

2. Introductory Questions

1. Do people in China move a lot now? Why or why not?

2. When people move, where do they usually go – from the country to the city or from

the city to the suburbs?

3. Where would you like to live? In the city or in the suburbs? Why?

II Outline

Para. 1Introduction: giving the main idea and briefl y list the supporting points

Paras. 2-- 5

Illustrate the supporting points in detail.1. Move from the East coast to the West coast2. Move from the country to the city3. Move from the city to the suburb

Paras. 6-- 9 Another big movement.

Para. 10 Conclusion: American people are always on the move.

III Detailed Study of the Text

1. People on the Move: people who move from place to place

— on the move: moving from place to placee.g. It’s hard to contact her — she’s always on the move.

The Johnsons are on the move from the city to the country.

Text B

Unit 1-5.indd 113 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 118: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

114

2. (line 1) The history of the American people is, in part, the history of movement of the

American people.

— This history of the American people is, to some extent / in a sense, the history of

the movement of the American people.

in part: to a certain extent; partlye.g. His success was due in part to luck.

The driver was in part responsible for the accident.

I admit that you are right in part.

3. (line 18) The automobile was invented.

— The automobile was made for the fi rst time.“Invent” is different from “discover” in meaning. We invent something that did not exist

before, such as a machine or method. We discover something that existed before but

was not known, such as a place, thing, or fact.e.g. Who invented the computer?

Edison invented the electric light lamp.

cf. In the sixties, oil was discovered under the North Sea.

Important minerals were discovered in some areas.4. (line 24) The cities grew up – the buildings got taller – and the cities grew out – they

spread out from the center.

— There were more and more tall buildings in the cities and they became bigger –

they extend outwards.grow up: 1. If a town or city grows up in a particular place or way, it develops there or

in that way

e.g. The city grew up originally as a crossing point on the river.

2. to gradually become an adult

e.g. I grew up in Scotland (= I lived in Scotland when I was young).

Taking responsibility for yourself is part of the process of growing up.

grow out: to become bigger in an outward directione.g. The plant is alive after all! There are new leaves growing out.

There was grass growing out in the middle of the road.

spread out: to (cause to) stretch in space or timee.g. The whole valley was spreading out before his eyes.

A hopeful future seemed to spread out before him.

5. (line 25) Apartment buildings ... took their place.

— Apartment buildings ... replaced those private houses.

take someone’s place/take the place of: to replace e.g. Natural methods of pest control are now taking the place of chemicals.

I had to fi nd someone to take Jenny’s place.

Who will take Mr. Robert’s place?

cf. replace: to start doing something instead of another person, or start being used

Unit 1-5.indd 114 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 119: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 5 Community and Society

115

instead of another thing

e.g. I’m replacing Sue in the team. Lectures have replaced the old tutorial system.

6. (line 33) In many cases, companies in the suburbs give them jobs. In other cases,

Americans need to commute to and from the cities where their jobs are.

— When they move to the suburbs, most of them get jobs there. If their jobs are in the

cities, they have to make the same journey regularly between their work and home.

commute: to regularly travel a long distance to get to worke.g. Jim commutes to Manhattan every day.

It’s exhausting commuting from Brighton to London every day.

7. (line 37) Americans have watched their big cities fall slowly into disrepair and die.

— Americans have watched their big cities gradually get into a bad condition and die.

fall into: to pass into (a certain state)e.g. He fell into serious trouble.

The company has fallen into disrepute in recent years.

If you had taken my advice, you would not have fallen into hopelessness.

8. (line 37) middle-class people: — the people of a social class that includes professional

people such as teachers, managers, but does not include people who are very rich or people who work mainly with their hands

9. (line 38) … and the very rich and the very poor stay behind.— … the very rich people and very poor people do not leave the cities, but remain

there.

stay behind: to not leave a place when other people leavee.g. I stayed behind after class.

I stayed behind to help clean up after the party.

10. (line 39) concerned Americans: worried Americans; Americans who are concerned

about public affairs

Note that when “concerned” comes before a noun, it means “worried”, but when it

comes after a noun, it means “related”.e.g. Concerned parents have complained about the dangerous playground.

She looked up with a concerned air.cf. I’d like to thank everyone concerned for making the occasion run so smoothly.

IV Summary of the Text

American people have always been moving from one place to another throughout the

history. 250 years ago, they fi rst moved from the East Coast to the West, seeking new land.

Then the Industrial Revolution led to the movement from the country to the growing cities

because people wanted to get new jobs and more comfort, but then when the cities got too

crowded, people began moving to the suburbs. As a result, these people either take up jobs

in the suburbs or move daily between the suburbs and the cities. However, today some

Unit 1-5.indd 115 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 120: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

116

Americans are moving back to the cities, while others are ready to move to the country.

V Text-related Information

1. The Colonies of the East Coast:

That refers to the 13 settlements in the east coast of the US which formed the

original United States.

2. Pioneer Americans/the Frontier Settlers:

In American history, the frontier was the westernmost area of settlement at any

given time in the expansion of the nation. Historians assume that the process of

extending the frontier westward began in 1607 with the settlement of Jamestown and

ended around 1890, when there was no longer any new land for homesteaders.

The American frontier existed near the edge of free land. Frontier settlers moved

from the Atlantic coast across 3 000 miles (more than 4 800 km) of wilderness, deserts,

and mountains until they were finally stopped by the Pacific Ocean. This advance

averaged 10 miles (16 km) a year, but in actuality movement progressed by successive

waves and at a very uneven rate. Geography and Indians generally determined the

boundaries of a particular frontier region. Within the next 100 years, pioneers pushed

the settlement line to the base of the Alleghenies. During the American Revolution,

many settlers crossed the mountains into Kentucky and Tennessee and from there

ventured into the Old Northwest and Old Southwest. Pioneers poured through the

Cumberland Gap and down the Ohio in ever-increasing numbers. By 1820, all the lands

east of the Mississippi had been carved into separate states or territories. During the

next three decades, a wave of settlers moved beyond the Mississippi to the edge of the

arid plains. The discovery of gold in California in 1848 altered the pattern of westward

migration, as hordes of settlers and prospectors passed through the Great Plains. By

1860, the line separating the settled region from the unoccupied zones had moved back

to the Rockies.

3. The Industrial Revolution:

The term “Industrial Revolution” describes the historical transformation of

traditional into modern societies by industrialization of the economy. The main defi ning

feature of the revolution was a dramatic increase in per capita production that was made

possible by the mechanization of manufacturing and other processes that were carried

out in factories. Its main social impact was that it changed an agrarian society into an

urban industrial society. The historical term “Industrial Revolution” can be applied to

specifi c countries and periods of the past, but the process known as industrialization

is still going on, particularly in developing countries. Since industrialization makes

possible long-term increases in production and income, economists seeking to create in

developing countries a process similar to the one that fi rst occurred by accident in 18th-

Unit 1-5.indd 116 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 121: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 5 Community and Society

117

century Britain have carefully studied the Industrial Revolution.

American society was an ideal vehicle for industrialization. The Puritan ethic and

a belief in free enterprise fostered technological innovation and economic growth, and

the country had enormous natural resources. In the late 18th century, Samuel Slater,

a textile worker from England, copied Arkwright’s machine designs and opened a

cotton mill in Rhode Island. Under the leadership of such entrepreneurs as Francis

Cabot Lowell, the New England textile industry continued to develop. The supply of

cotton fi ber for the textile mills was vastly increased by Eli Whitney’s invention (1793)

of the cotton gin. Another major mechanical innovation in crop harvesting was Cyrus

Mccormick’s reaper (1831). Labor-saving devices such as these freed workers to enter

the factories, which also drew upon immigrant labor.

Aided by the spread of the transportation network, the boom period in American

industrialization came in the second half of the 19th century. By the turn of the

century the United States had overtaken Britain in the output of iron and coal and

the consumption of raw cotton. Britain, with its older plants and equipment, faced

increasing economic competition from other countries and lagged behind, particularly

in the newer chemical and electrical industries; the former was led by Germany and the

latter by the United States. In the 20th century the United States also dominated the

new automobile industry, which Henry Ford revolutionized by introducing a system of

coordinated assembly-line operations. Ford’s success led to the widespread adoption of

mass production techniques in industry.

Skills

Translation Skills

转译词类:英语副词可转译成汉语的名词、动词或形容词。英语形容词转译成汉语的副词、动

词或名词。

英语中副词使用频繁而且种类繁多,有的表示时间、地点、方式,用来修饰动词;有的表示程

度,用来修饰形容词或其它副词;有的起连接作用引导从句;有的用来修饰整个句子。英语副词

在句子中的位置也比较灵活,有时在句首,有时在动词前后,有时在词语中间。翻译时首先要弄清

它的修饰关系,正确理解其含义,然后根据汉语习惯灵活处理。英语形容词或动词转译成汉语名词

时,原来修饰该形容词或动词的副词往往随着转译成汉语形容词。

下面例子可供教学参考:

Has he got his spectacles on? 他戴眼镜了吗?

It was offi cially announced that…官方宣布,⋯⋯

Skills

Unit 1-5.indd 117 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 122: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

118

She opened the window to let fresh air in. 她把窗子打开,让新鲜空气进来。

This fi lm impressed him deeply. 这部电影给了他深刻的印象。

He is physically weak but mentally sound. 他身体虽弱,但思想健康。

由于英汉两种语言在表达方式上的不同,有些英语形容词可译成汉语的副词,这种转译法在形

容词修饰的名词转译成汉语动词时更常运用。

表示心理状态的形容词在联系动词后作表语用时常转译成汉语动词。可以转译成汉语名词的英

语形容词通常有两种:一种是加定冠词表示某一类人的形容词,另一种是用来表示特征或性质的形

容词,可以根据汉语习惯转译成名词。

下面的例子可供教学参考:

He was a regular visitor. 他以前经常来。

A successful scientist must be a good observer. 一个成功的科学家一定善于观察。

They were not content with their present achievements. 他们不满足于自己现有的成就。

They did their best to help the sick and the wounded. 他们尽了最大的努力帮助病号和伤员。

I feel doubtful about what I ought to do. 我不能确定应该做些什么。

That hose is fl exible. 那水管有柔性。

Computers are more fl exible, and can do a great variety of jobs. 计算机的灵活性比较大,因此

能做多种不同的工作。

Most people considered him foolish.大多数人认为他是一个傻瓜。

She whispered a hurried good-bye to her mother and got into the car. 她匆匆地向母亲轻声道

别,钻进了汽车。

Guided Writing

本单元写作是学写句子衔接中的让步关系。表示让步关系词语有 although, though, in spite of,

despite, while, even though 等。比如:

Our new neighbours are quite nice. Their dog is a bit of a nuisance.

→ Our new neighbours are quite nice, though their dog is a bit of a nuisance.

She insisted on keeping her coat on. It was extremely warm in the house.

→ She insisted on keeping her coat on, although it was extremely warm in the house.

We arrived at the airport on time. It was raining heavily.

→ Although it was raining heavily, we arrived at the airport on time.

We arrived at the airport on time in spite of the heavy rain.

Despite the heavy rain, we arrived at the airport on time.

Even though it was raining heavily, we arrived at the airport on time.

也可以采用倒装等手段表达让步意义,如:

Stupid as I am, I can beat you in a race. (试比较:Though I am stupid, I can beat you in a

race.)

Rich as he is, yet I don’t envy him. (试比较:I don’t envy him, even though he is rich.)

本单元的实用英语写作部分,是根据所提供的信息写邀请便函。邀请某人参加亲朋好友间的非

正式聚会、聚餐、喝茶等,除了口头邀请、打电话,写便函、发E-mail等现在也很常见。这类便函

Unit 1-5.indd 118 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 123: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 5 Community and Society

119

格式较随意,只要写明:被邀请者名字、邀请内容、地点、时间和日期即可。收到邀请函后,通常

可以简单回复,说明能否前去;不能去也要简述理由以示礼貌。

下面是一些邀请信的常用格式:

Dear ________,

Will you come to luncheon with us on ________, at ________?My niece [NAME] is visiting us and I think you will enjoy meeting her. She is a

charming, and pretty girl. She is now… and is a very good company! John and Jane will be

here, and perhaps we can… after luncheon. Do say you’ll come!

Loving yours,

XXX

Dear ________,

It would give me /us great pleasure to have your presence at a reception in honor of

the American delegation.

The reception will be held in ______(PLACE), on ______ (TIME and DATE). Cocktails

will be served promptly at six to be followed at eight. I /We sincerely hope you attend.

Please let me /us know.

Sincerely yours,

XXX

Reading Skills — Reading for Details (3):

Understanding Cause and Effect

Specific Aim 1: To help students learn to read critically as well as think logically via

understanding the cause and effect relationship.

Why? The cause and effect relationship is both a common way of thinking and

a format for writing.

Specifi c Aim 2: To train students to identify two basic patterns of cause-effect writing:

single effect with multi-causes and single cause with multi-effects.

Why? A cause-effect text is often developed with a series of specifi c or factual

details and examples. It can develop in a number of ways, such as

pointing out causes fi rst or presenting effects fi rst, using one or several

causes/effects to illustrate a general idea. Students are better to start from

Unit 1-5.indd 119 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 124: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

120

the basic two patterns mentioned above.

Signal words for cause and effect

For showing the cause: because, because of, due to, result from, since, for,

one cause is, another reason is

For showing the effect: as a result, consequently, so, hence, then, leads to,

therefore, thus, a (one) result of this is, bring about, result in, so that

Key to the Exercises

Text A

First Reading

Exercise 1

1. D 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. D

While Reading

(For reference)

1. Lend a hand to the old and handicapped people. Help them, for example, clean their

houses.

2. Search the Web for the information needed.

Second Reading

Exercise 2

1. T 2. F 3. F 4. T 5. T

Exercise 3

Community Service

Main task: helping the people around you

Mainly concerned with the care of 1. the old

2. the handicapped

Key to the ExercisesKey to the Exercises

Unit 1-5.indd 120 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 125: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 5 Community and Society

121

Main forms of help: household repairs, cleaning, preparing food, taking care of garden,

reading or writing letters

Sources of information on community service:

1. your school

2. the Council of Social Service

3. the Guild of Social Welfare

4. the Citizens’ Advice Bureau

5. the Women’s Royal Voluntary Service

6. the public library

7. Churches

8. the Scouts

9. youth organizations

Oral Practice

Exercise 4

(For reference.)

Community service is known as helping the people around you. This help is often

accomplished by volunteering at a community service centre. Those who most need help are

the old and the handicapped, who may be lonely or unable to move about freely. If people

want to lend a hand in this service, they can get information from such sources as your

school, a special committee or council, the public library, churches and youth organizations.

Vocabulary and Structure

Exercise 5

1. particular 2. concerned 3. worthwhile 4. citizens 5. schemes

6. source 7. confi ned 8. variety 9. delighted 10. voluntary

Exercise 6

1. more than 2. lend a hand

3. confi ned to 4. is concerned with

5. gave up 6. in need of

7. carry out 8. in a position

9. put up 10. make sure

Exercise 7

1. of 2. after 3. off 4. with 5. of

6. of 7. of 8. in 9. to 10. in

Unit 1-5.indd 121 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 126: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

122

Exercise 8

EXPRESSIONS bring carry

_______ peace to the region ★

________ hope to people who need your help ★

the newspapers all ________ the same story ★

________ on driving like that ★

________ the people of the world together ★

________ out more research ★

________ someone some luck ★

the goods ________ the label “Made in China” ★

________ tears to one’s eyes ★

________ along a friend ★

________ a baby in one’s arms ★

________ about a change in attitudes ★

1. bring the people of the world together 2. brought about a change

3. carrying a baby in her arms 4. bring peace to

5. carry on driving like that 6. carried

7. carried 8. brought tears to his eyes

9. bring hope to 10. carry out

Exercise 9

1. lonely 2. alone 3. lend 4. borrow

5. source 6. roots 7. limit 8. confi ned

Exercise 10

1. Jerry had several waiters who had followed him around from restaurant to restaurant.

2. The girl who was injured in the accident is now in hospital.

3. The couple who live next door to us have sixteen grandchildren.

4. There were many poor and homeless people during that war who died of cold and hunger

in winter.

5. The man who answered the phone told me you were out.

Exercise 11

1. Blind children can’t swim unless a sighted swimmer goes with them.

2. I’m not going to the party unless you go too.

3. Joe can’t hear unless you shout.

4. You are not allowed into the club unless you are a member.

5. He’ll not speak to you unless you ask him a question.

Unit 1-5.indd 122 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 127: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 5 Community and Society

123

Translation Practice

Exercise 12

1. 那次访问之后,那里的人民给了他深刻的印象。

2. 我喜欢每星期五休息。

3. 恐怕刘易斯先生要到明天上午才来(办公室)。

4. 我想男孩的思维方式与女孩是不同的。

5. 祖宁认为“完全诚实”未必总是有利于社交关系。

6. 他们详细地描述了最近到中国的那次访问。

7. 他们担心河水会泛滥。

8. 他很想知道接下来会发生什么。

Exercise 13

1. I’ll phone to make sure that the meeting begins at seven this evening.

2. Please lend me a hand with this heavy box.

3. Sorry, I am not in a position to help you.

4. You won’t pass your examinations unless you study hard.

5. Many volunteers give up their leisure time to take care of these elderly people.

Writing Practice

Exercise 14

1. Although it rained a lot, we enjoyed our holidays.

2. In spite of the bad traffi c, I arrived on time. /In spite of the fact that the traffi c was bad...

3. I didn’t get the job though I had all the necessary qualifi cations.

4. While I like him personally, I don’t think what he’s doing is right.

5. Even though he has a responsible job, he is not particularly well-paid.

6. I could not sleep despite being tired /despite the fact that I was tired.

7. While she is a likable girl, she can be extremely diffi cult to work with.

8. He went ahead with the experiment even though he knew it was dangerous.

Exercise 15

(For reference.)

1.

Mr. and Mrs. Henry C. Lee request the

Pleasure of

Mr. and Mrs. Harold Smith’s

Company at the wedding reception in Room 18 of Beijing Hotel

on Saturday

October the fi rst, at eleven o’clock a.m.

Unit 1-5.indd 123 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 128: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

124

2.

Aug. 7, 2007Dear Xiao Li,

I’ve just heard from Jiang Ling that you are going to visit our city. While you’re here,

why don’t you come and stay with us for a few days or longer?

Luckily, I’ll be on holiday when you’re in our city, so I could show you around. You’ll

be greatly surprised at so many changes that have taken place here ever since you visited

the city last time.

I’m really looking forward to seeing you again. Do write soon and say when you can

come.

Yours,

Li Hong

Dictation

Exercise 16

1. leisure 2. volunteer work

3. raise 4. a few struggling students

5. as much time as possible 6. a variety of jobs

7. volunteering 8. lucky one

9. explain 10. not for pay, not for me

Text B

First Reading

Exercise 1

(The purpose of the this exercise is to develop students’ ability to anticipate what the passage

is about by reading parts of a passage, especially the fi rst paragraph and the topic sentence of

each paragraph. Draw students’ attention to the following points:

1. The history of the American people is, in part, the history of the movement of the

American people.

2. Pioneer Americans began moving from the East Coast to the West 250 years ago. They

moved west for many reasons.

3. The cities grew up — the buildings got taller — and the cities grew out — they spread out

from the center.)

(Refer to the text for detailed answers.)

Unit 1-5.indd 124 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 129: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 5 Community and Society

125

Second Reading

Exercise 2

1. T 2. T 3. T 4. F

5. T 6. T 7. F 8. T

Reading Skills

Exercise 3

1. Cause: heavy traffi c

Effect: long delays on the roads

Signal word(s): is causing

2. Cause: drug use

Effect: crime and violence

Signal word(s): the leading cause

3. Cause: there was no room to do so

Effect: some cities could not spread out

Signal word(s): because

4. Cause: wet leaves on the line

Effect: this train will arrive an hour late

Signal word(s): due to

5. Cause: the building work is taking quite a long time

Effect: costing us money

Signal word(s): (and) therefore

6. Cause: His hair was very long and covered his eyes

Effect: you could hardly see his face

Signal word(s): so that

7. Cause: I had made a lot of contacts

Effect: had good job opportunities

Signal word(s): (and…) as a result

8. Cause: icy road conditions

Effect: two roads being closed

Signal word(s): resulted in

Exercise 4

Causes → Result Cause → Result

-- -- -- --Cities have grown

very large→

about 50% of the Earth’s

population lives in urban

areas

Unit 1-5.indd 125 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 130: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

126

Vocabulary Practice

Exercise 5

1. endless 2. disrepair 3. independent 4. solve 5. manufactures

6. Poverty 7. private 8. obtained 9. pioneers 10. invented

Exercise 6

1. spreading out 2. grown up

3. in part 4. on the move

5. fell into 6. in his own way

7. to some extent 8. wait on

9. took up 10. stayed behind

Expanding Your Vocabulary

Exercise 7

1. useless 2. unfamiliar 3. unprepared 4. unnatural 5. speechless

6. unemployed 7. hopeless 8. sleepless 9. unharmed 10. meaningless

Exercise 8

1. difference 2. need 3. hand 4. lend 5. regarded

6. development 7. looking at 8. differ 9. even though 10. challenges

Causes → Result Cause → Result

1. Factory jobs attracted

people.→

Cities have grown

very large-- -- -- --

2. Better schools attracted

families to move to the

city.

→Cities have grown

very large-- -- -- --

3 . P l a c e s o f l e i s u r e ,

entertainment, and culture

made city life appear more

interesting.

→Cities have grown

very large-- -- -- --

Signal words used for cause and effect: so… that, several reasons for, resulted in, therefore

(续表)

Unit 1-5.indd 126 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 131: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 5 Community and Society

127

参考译文

Text A

社区服务

我们大多数人都会自然而然地想到帮助别人。如果见到一个盲人正从公交车上下来,我们就会

留心,确保他不会有跌倒的危险。家庭成员之间会互相帮助,尤其是照顾幼童和老人。

有许多人需要照顾,但因他们身边没有人而不为人知;有时即便知道他们需要帮助,也常会没

有人伸手去帮。因身边没人关照,像孤老、残疾人、流浪者、独居者等,就是那些可能得不到帮助

的人们。也许你自己从没有想过能帮助别人。社区服务就意味着帮助你周围的人。有一些机构设法

确保人们知道有人需要帮助,并采取一定的措施。这些机构依靠志愿者牺牲一点休闲时间来开展各

项服务工作。

如果你希望参加这一有价值的活动,你要做些什么事呢?请你考虑一下那些最需要帮助的人和

你可以提供帮助的方式。社区服务的许多工作都与照料老人和残疾人有关。老人往往无力修缮他们

的房屋,家常修理、清扫、做饭和照管花园等可能都有困难。视力不济的老人,如果有个朋友来为

他们念信或是写信,一定会感到很高兴。一个援助之手和一张友好的面孔,对于寂寞的老人来说,

意义重大。

残疾人老少都有。坐轮椅的人,如果没有人帮助,就无法外出。盲童也许喜欢游泳,但他们需

要一名视力正常的游泳者同往。有些残疾人可能根本不能外出,这时若有一位客人来访,便是最受

欢迎不过的了。医院也需要志愿者帮助。装在手推车上的流动图书馆和流动商店需要人送至各个病

房,圣诞节的装饰品需要有人张挂,晚会和音乐会也要有人组织。有的志愿者为学校放假期间的孩

子提供游戏场所,也有的陪伴学龄前儿童玩耍。

如果你打算帮忙,你要做些什么呢?你们学校可能与一个校外机构挂钩,或者学校自己就设有

社区服务项目。许多城镇都有一个委员会,称为社区服务委员会,或是社会福利协会,它们会告诉

你有关这一地区志愿活动的内容。公民咨询处和皇家妇女志愿服务会如同公共图书馆一样都是信息

的来源。教会组织、童子军和其他青年组织会把他们的活动情况告诉你。英国的多数大城市,都有

青年社区服务团体,因为正是这些地方需求量最大。如果你加入这样的团体,你将给那些需要帮助

的人们带来快乐和希望。

Text B

迁徙中的人们

美国人民的历史,从某种意义上说,是一部美国人民的迁徙史。他们从东海岸的殖民地迁往西

部的广阔空间,从乡村和农场迁往城市。近年来,美国人则又从城市迁往郊区。

250年前,美国的拓荒者们开始从东海岸迁往西部。他们西迁的原因很多。其中之一是他们可以

获得无限广阔的空间和可供耕种的土地。美国人喜欢大块大块的空间,并且喜欢自由和独立,按自

己的方式开发土地。一些土地成了农场。有些地区发现了重要的矿产,因此一些土地成了矿区。另

Unit 1-5.indd 127 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 132: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

128

一些广大的地区成了牧场。看来人人都有了足够的土地。但这是一种艰难的生活,一种艰辛劳作永

无止境的生活。

1860年后,工业革命使美国发生了变化。美国人学会了冶炼钢铁。他们开始生产石油。汽车发

明了。各种各样的工厂开始出现,在工厂周围,逐渐形成了城市。农民和乡村中的其他人迁往正在

形成中的城市,为的是找到工作,过上比较轻松的生活。在20世纪初期,城市是繁忙和令人兴奋的

地方。但也同样有着贫困和艰辛。

城市兴起了,建筑物变高了;城市在扩大,从市中心向四周延伸。带有院落和门廊的私人住宅

消失了,代之而起的是一座高过一座的公寓楼。迁往城市的人越来越多,城市变得越来越大。

有些城市不可能再向外扩展,因为没有余地。这些城市变得越来越拥挤,纽约就是其中一个最

明显的例子。人口的增长意味着小汽车、卡车、公交车的增多、噪音的增加、污染的加重和犯罪率

的升高。许多城市变得丑陋和肮脏。有的人和企业开始离开城市,迁往城外的郊区。

向郊区迁徙还在进行。美国人在寻找一小块称得上属于自己的土地。他们希望有一所带院子的

住宅,但他们仍不愿放弃城市里的好工作。在许多情况下,郊区的公司向他们提供了工作机会。在

另一些情况下,美国人则需要往返于他们工作所在的城市和住宅之间。近年来,越来越多的企业正

在迁往郊区,吸引着许多人,因此郊区正在变得拥挤起来。

美国人注意到,大城市正在慢慢地陷于年久失修而消亡。许多中产阶级的人们离开了城市,留

在城市里的都是很富或很穷的人。

热心于公众事务的美国人正在试图解决大城市的噪音、肮脏、犯罪和污染问题。他们试图改造

城市中的落后地区。他们试图吸引和留住实业界人士。他们试图美化他们的城市。许多美国人正在

准备迁回城市。

另一些美国人感到,连郊区也已变得过于拥挤。他们正在寻找未受污染的空间和独立的生活方

式,准备从郊区迁往乡村。

也许,美国人将永远处于迁徙之中。

Unit 1-5.indd 128 16/3/24 上午9:18

Page 133: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Working

Unit

6

ObjectivesObjectivesObjectives

Text A Text B

Words

relax, qualification, redundant, publici ty, benefi t , apparently, candidate , indica te , promote , investment, accomplish, evaluate

curious, block, equipment, explore, generally, search, consist, common, frequently, collection, gather, sign

Phrases and

Expressions

take a vacation, fi nd out, at work, in fact, so that, in addition to, according to, such…as, search out, fall off

except for, a set of, look over, full of, such as, search for, consist of, put up, on weekends, for fun

Collocation Verbs + school / a class or a lesson/ a course / a language / an exam

Confusable Words personnel/personal, amount/number, accomplish/perform, situation/case

StructuresThe more time a person spends at work, the more she or he accomplishes.They feel they have to spend more time on the job after normal working hours so that the people who can promote them see them.

Translation

Practice词类转换

Writing Practice Write Topic Sentences /Accept an Invitation

Reading Skills Reading for Details (4): Understanding Defi nitions

Expanding Your

Vocabulary

connect + tion → connection, act + tion → action, attend → attentionmulti + colored → multicolored, multi + national → multinational multi + party → multiparty

129

Unit 1-6.indd 129 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 134: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

130

Text A

Working Hard or Hardly Working?

I Introduction

1. Introductory Remarks

Nowadays, people work longer hours than they used to, but are they really working

harder than ever before? No, most of them spend extra, unproductive time at the offi ce

because their employers encourage them to do so, believing that the more time a person

spends at work, the more she or he accomplishes. However, the connection between

time and productivity is not always positive.

2. Introductory Questions

1. Who seem to work harder, people now or people in the past?

2. Do people really work harder when they work longer hours? How do you know?

3. Is it right that the more time a person spends at work, the more she or he

accomplishes?

4. Why are employees working longer hours now than ever before?

5. Do you believe if an employee stays at work later, he or she may do more work?

6. Do people work long hours only for more money?

II Outline

Para. 1 Americans seem to be working harder today than ever before.

Para. 2 The connection between time and productivity is not always positive.

Para. 3Employees have to spend more time on their job because employers often

consider the amount of time on the job in addition to job performance.

Para. 5

Employers believe that if the employees stay at work later, they may

actually do more work, which may encourage other employees to spend

more time at work, too.

Para. 5 People do not work long hours only for more money.

III Detailed Study of the Text

1. Working Hard or Hardly Working?

hard: with great effort

Text A

Unit 1-6.indd 130 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 135: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 6 Working

131

e.g. Look hard at this picture.

Think hard and work hard.

hardly: almost not

e.g. He could hardly wait to hear the news.

There’s hardly any coal left.

2. (line 2) ... than employees did in 1979.

Compare “employee” with “employer”. The suffi x “-ee”, when added to a verb, usually

means a person who is being treated in a particular way or a person who is in a

particular state.

e.g. the payee (= someone who is paid)

a trainee (= someone who is being trained)

an absentee (= someone who is absent)

3. (line 4) Or are they?

— Or are they really working harder today than ever before?

4. (line 5) A management consultant, Bill Meyer, decided to fi nd out.

Note “a management consultant” and “Bill Meyer” are in apposition.

e.g. The defendant, a woman of thirty, denied kicking the policeman.

fi nd out: to learn or discover (a fact that was hidden or not known)

e.g. I won’t tell you — you must fi nd out for yourself!

Please fi nd out whether there is an express train at 10:00.

cf. find: to discover, especially by searching; get (someone or something that was

hidden or lost)

e.g. I can’t fi nd my boots!

They found him somewhere to live.

5. (line 7) Meyer wrote down everything the banker did during his long workday — the

banker worked 80 hours a week.

write down: to record in writing (especially what has been said)

e.g. Why not write down your ideas on a piece of paper before you start your essay?

I wrote down the address in the back of my diary.

6. (line 9) At the end of the three-day period, Meyer reviewed the banker’s activities with

him.

at the end of: at the fi nal point or the last part of

e.g. The task was fi nished at the end of 1995.

cf. at an end: fi nished

e.g. The war was at an end.

He went on spending lavishly until his money was at an end.

She was at the end of her patience.

in the end: at last

e.g. It will turn out all right in the end.

“... reviewed the banker’s activities” means “considered/studied the banker’s activities

Unit 1-6.indd 131 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 136: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

132

carefully in order to give an opinion on them”.

7. (line 11) They discovered that the man spent 80 percent of his time doing busy work.

discover: 1. to find (something existing but not known before, often a place or a

scientifi c fact)

e.g. Columbus discovered America in 1492.

I discovered a fl y in my coffee.

2. to fi nd out (a fact, or the answer to a question)

e.g. We soon discovered the truth.

We discovered her to be a good cook.

Did you ever discover who sent you the fl owers?

Note the pattern “spend time doing something”.

e.g. I spent many years building up my collection.

He’s spent most of his life working for the same company.

8. (line 15) Apparently, many people believe that the more time a person spends at work,

the more she or he accomplishes.

— It is plain/apparent/clear that many people believe that a person will surely do

much more work if he/she spends more time on his/her work.

the more/less, etc. ..., the more/less, etc. ...: used to indicate that the increase/decrease

in the amount or degree of one thing affects the increase/decrease in the amount or

degree of another

e.g. The more he gives his children, the more they want.

The more you practise, the better you can speak English.

The more I see of him, the less I like him.

accomplish: to succeed in doing; fi nish successfully; perform

e.g. We tried to arrange a peace but accomplished nothing.

He accomplished a great deal during his fi rst year.

cf. fi nish: to reach or bring to an end; reach the end of (an activity)

e.g. What time does the concert fi nish?

When do you fi nish your college course?

I haven’t fi nished reading that book yet.

9. (line 17) In fact, many studies indicate that after a certain point, anyone’s productivity

and creativity begin to decrease.

— In fact, many studies show that after a certain period of time, everybody’s effi ciency /

working rate and creativity begin to decrease /fall off.

point: an exact moment; particular time or state

e.g. It was at that point that I saw him leave the building.

I’ve come to the point where I can’t stand her arguing any longer.

10. (line 19) Furthermore, it is not always easy for individuals to realize that their

performance is falling off.

— In addition, it is not always easy for individuals to become aware of the fact that

Unit 1-6.indd 132 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 137: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 6 Working

133

the quality of their performance is becoming worse.

fall off: to become worse or become less in quality, amount, etc.

e.g. The quality of performance has fallen off since last year.

Business fell off after Christmas.

Membership of the club has fallen off this year.

The daily number of passengers by this airline falls off.

11. (line 22) ... they often consider the amount of time on the job in addition to job

performance.

— ... they consider not only job performance but also the amount of time spent on the

job.

in addition to: as well as

e.g. In addition to the apples you asked for, I bought you some oranges.

In addition to English, he has to study a second foreign language.

12. (line 25) effectively: in an effective way

e.g. Children have to learn to communicate effectively.

A well run community service can deal effectively with this problem.

cf. effective: having a noticeable or desired effect; producing the desired result

e.g. He made an effective speech.

His efforts to improve the school have been very effective.

cf. effi cient: working well and without waste

e.g. Our effi cient new machines are much cheaper to run.

A good manager is both competent and effi cient.

13. (line 27) ... so that the people who can promote them see them.

— ... for the purpose of being seen by their employers.

so that: in order that; with the aim that; with the result that

e.g. She worked hard so that everything would be ready in time.

Nothing more was heard from him so that we began to wonder if he was dead.

14. (line 28) A group of head-hunters (people who search out executive personnel for

companies) were asked their opinions about a situation.

— A group of people who are responsible for looking for and discovering executive

personnel for companies were asked to give their opinions about a situation.

search out: to fi nd (out) or uncover by searching

e.g. The lawyer searched out the weaknesses in the witness’s statement.

He searched out the book and handed it to me.

15. (line 31) The candidates had comparable qualifi cations for the job.

— The two candidates had similar qualifi cations for the job.

comparable: roughly similar (to something else) in quality, size, number, etc.

e.g. The girls are of comparable ages.

Our prices are comparable to/with those in other shops.

The two experiences aren’t comparable.

Unit 1-6.indd 133 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 138: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

134

16. (line 33) The other would do the same job in an 80-hour week just as well.

— The other candidate would do the same job in an 80-hours week just as effectively

as the fi rst candidate.

17. (line 39) In such fi elds as advertising, ... the glamour and publicity are worth more

than any monetary benefi t.

— In the fi elds like advertising, ... the glamour and publicity are more important than

money.

such ... as: used when giving an example of something

e.g. It’s one of those gourmet shops that sells such things as smoked salmon, coffee

beans and expensive biscuits.

benefi t: advantage; profi t; good effect

e.g. He has had the benefi t of fi rst-class education.

I’ve done it for his benefi t.

It’s of great benefi t to everyone.

cf. profi t: money gain; money gained by a business or a piece of business

e.g. He sold his house at a profi t; he made a profi t of $1000 on the sale.

There’s very little profi t in selling land at present.

18. (line 41) On the other hand, many employees are not willing to spend so much extra,

unproductive time at the offi ce.

— Still, many employees don’t want to spend so many additional hours at the offi ce

without achieving very much.

on the other hand: (used for comparing different things or ideas) at an opposite point

e.g. I know this job of mine isn’t much, but on the other hand I don’t feel tired down.

He is clever, but on the other hand, he makes many mistakes.

19. (line 42) Once they finish their work satisfactorily, they want to relax and enjoy

themselves.

— As soon as they fi nish their work satisfactorily, they want to rest or do something

that is enjoyable.

once: from the moment that, as soon as

e.g. Once you show any fear, he will attack you.

Once printed, this dictionary will be very popular.

IV Summary of the Text

As shown by a recent survey, Americans work longer hours and take shorter

vacations than they did in 1979. More time on the job doesn’t necessarily mean greater

effi ciency. However, some people still work extra hours simply because they hope to

be promoted by their employers. Head-hunters of a company also tend to believe in

the seeming truth that more time leads to more work. Yet, it should be noted that this

attitude toward work does vary from person to person and from one circle of society to

another.

Unit 1-6.indd 134 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 139: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 6 Working

135

V Text-related Information

1. Working Long Bours Is Worse for Women

A Leeds University team found men and women respond very differently to

working long hours — with the greatest impact being on women.

Dr. Daryl O’Connor, a researcher at Leeds University and his team studied the

impact of stress on eating habits and looked at what causes stress at home and at work

and how people react to it.

They found that working long hours has a greater negative impact on women than

men because it makes them more likely to smoke, drink coffee and eat unhealthy food,

although both sexes were likely to increase their intake of unhealthy foods.

The researchers say that this is probably a reaction to the stress of a demanding job

and stress disrupts people’s normal eating habits and causes them to opt for unhealthy

high fat and high sugar snacks in preference to healthier food choices.

Long hours, however, appeared to have no negative impact on men’s level of

exercise, caffeine intake or smoking, but for both sexes long hours were associated with

a reduction in alcohol consumption.

The study looked at stress caused by minor events, or difficulties both in and

outside work, such as having an argument with a colleague or friend, a meeting with a

boss, giving a presentation at work, or missing a deadline.

People who experienced one or more such events during the day reported

consuming significantly more between-meal snacks than usual but fewer portions of

vegetables, and a smaller main meal.

Dr. O’Connor describes people who snack under stress as “emotional eaters” and

says they have higher levels of vulnerability and resort to food when they feel anxious

or emotionally aroused or negative about themselves.

They avoid confronting these “negative” feelings by focusing their attention on food.

Other experts say men are less likely to be affected by working long hours because

they are not expected to multi-task in the same way as women and as a rule do not have

to face domestic chores when they get home and most working women would agree.

(From: Medical Research News, 13 July, 2006)

2. Work Effi ciency — Are Employees Really Ouerworked?

American companies are assumed to lose up to 750 billion dollars due to

unproductive computer usage by employees during their work time (Washington, AFP,

2005-07-12). It is most often connected with using the Internet and company computers

for private purposes. Participating in discussion groups, conducting private e-mail

correspondence, conversing with friends through Internet communicators or making

acquisitions in e-shops are very common. Statistics show that employees can devote 2-4

hours daily for that activity! Today when labor costs are growing, employers more often

decide to monitor employee activity, using vertical applications for that purpose.

Unit 1-6.indd 135 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 140: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

136

Text B

Working for Fun and Profi t

I Introduction

1. Introductory Remarks

Garage sales and fl ea markets are popular in the United States. People often have

a garage sale to sell their unwanted things. A fl ea market is bigger than a garage sale.

It is an interesting place to visit if you want to buy something or if you want to sell

something. Don’t be surprised if you fi nd the very thing you have been looking for is in

a garage sale or in a fl ea market.

2. Introductory Questions

1. Are there any fl ea markets and garage sales in your neighborhood /in your city /in your

hometown? If yes, what can you buy there? If not, is there anything similar to them?

2. Do you know the difference between a fl ea market and a garage sale?

3. Make a list of things you need now. These might be clothes, items you need for your

room, apartment, house, or something you’d like to send to your family or friends.

How many of these items do you think you could fi nd at a fl ea market or garage sale?

II Outline

Para. 1 You come to your fi rst garage sale.

Para. 2 You friend comes to his fi rst fl ea market.

Para. 3 Garage sales and fl ea markets are popular in the United States.

Para. 4 What a fl ea market is.

Para. 5 What a garage sale is.

Para. 6Flea markets and garage sales give Americans an opportunity to work for

fun and for profi t.

III Detailed Study of the Text

1. (line 1) Everything is quiet except for a group of people and some colorful objects you

see about three blocks away.

except for: apart from; leaving out or not including

Text B

Unit 1-6.indd 136 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 141: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 6 Working

137

e.g. Everything is perfect except for the weather.

Except for one old lady, the bus was empty.

The children are all asleep except for Lorna.

block: n. the length of one side of a piece of land or group of buildings, from the place

where one street crosses it to the next

e.g. His apartment is two blocks away from the school.

You go two blocks, then turn left.

v . to prevent movement through something, or to prevent something from

happening or succeeding

e.g. A fallen tree is blocking the road.

My view was blocked by a tall man in front of me.

A group of politicians blocked the proposal.

2. (line 2) As you get closer, you notice that there are many things lying on the ground:

some Time and People magazines, a collection of toy trucks, some weight-lifting

equipment, two bicycles, and a set of chairs.

— As you come nearer, you see that there are many things lying on the ground…

collection: a group of objects or people

e.g. There was a collection of books and shoes on the fl oor.

There is always a strange collection of runners in the London Marathon.

equipment: the things that are needed for a particular purpose or activity

e.g. a useful piece of equipment for the kitchen

medical / offi ce equipment

a set of: a group of similar things that belong together in some way

e.g. a set of tools

a set of false teeth

a new set of rules to learn

3. (line 6) …and looking over the objects in the driveway.

— … and examining the objects in the driveway.

look over: to examine something to see how good, big, etc. it is

e.g. We looked over the house again before we decided to rent it.

Do you have a few minutes to look these samples over?

driveway: a wide hard path or a private road that leads from the street to a house

e.g. There was a car parked in / on the driveway.

4. (line 7) You consider taking a detour around the group of people, but you are curious.

— You think about taking a longer route in order to avoid the crowd, but you want to

know what is happening there.

detour: a way of going from one place to another that is longer than the usual way, for

example because you want to avoid a traffi c problem or to visit something

e.g. We had to make a detour around the fl ooded fi elds.

It’s well worth making a detour to see the village.

Unit 1-6.indd 137 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 142: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

138

We took a detour to avoid the town center.

5. (line 9) Was there an accident? Is this a party? No! Welcome to your fi rst garage sale!

— It was not an accident. It is not a party, either. It is a garage sale. You are welcome

to it.

6. (line 15) a large parking lot: a large area where people can leave their cars

The word “lot” means “an area of land used for a particular purpose”.

e.g. a vacant lot

7. (line 16) ... many multicolored objects: many objects of different colors

The word beginning (prefi x) “multi-” has a sense of “many; more than one”.

e.g. multicultural, multinational, multiparty

8. (line 16) At fi rst he thinks it’s an art show. Then he decides it’s a fair. He parks his car

and gets out to explore.

— At the beginning, he thinks it is an art show. Then he thinks it must be a fair. He

leaves his car somewhere and gets out to go there to fi nd out what it is like.

show: A fair is an event at which people, businesses, etc. show and sell their goods.

e.g. world trade fair, a craft / a book / an antique fair

A show is an occasion when a collection of things are brought together for people

to look at.

e.g. an agricultural show,

the Paris fashion shows,

A local artist is holding a show of her recent work.

9. (line 19) Many Americans fi nd that they can make a little extra money and have fun

being “weekend entrepreneurs.”

— Many Americans discover that they can make some additional money and at the

same time they can enjoy themselves by being “weekend businesspersons.”

10. (line 23) Flea markets are generally open spaces in or out of town that become busy

sales centers on weekends.

— Flea markets are, in most cases, held in open areas in town or out of town. These

areas become sales centers on Saturdays and Sundays.

generally: in most cases; usually

e.g. I generally get up at six.

We generally go to Beijing for our holiday.

11. (line 24) …rent a space for the day for a small amount of money and sell their

merchandise.

— … pay a small amount of money for the space they use for the day and sell their

goods.

rent: (especially American English) to pay money to someone so that you can use

something for a short period of time

e.g. We rented a car for the week and explored the area.

Shall we rent a movie this evening?

Unit 1-6.indd 138 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 143: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 6 Working

139

cf. to regularly pay money to someone so that you can use something that they own,

such as a house, some land, a machine, etc.

e.g. to live in rented accommodation / housing / property

In the long run, it is more expensive to rent a television than to buy one.

cf. rent, hire,

You can hire something for a short period of time (British English only), but rent

something for a longer period.

e.g. We can hire bikes for a day to explore the town.

We don’t own our TV, we rent it.

In American English, rent is always used. It is sometimes now used in British English

instead of hire, too. The owners of property can hire it out for a short period (British

English).

e.g. Do you hire out bikes?

The company hire out cars.

Or they can rent (out) / let (out) a building, etc.

e.g. We rent out rooms in our house to students.

They rent out one fl oor of their building to an American company.

Outside a building you could see: To let (British English), For rent (especially American

English).

To hire can also mean to employ somebody, especially in American English.

e.g. We hired a new secretary.

The storekeeper hired ten girls for the Christmas rush.

merchandise: goods that are bought or sold; goods that are for sale in a shop/store

e.g. a wide selection of merchandise

The store has the best merchandise in town.

12. (line 25) Shoppers from near and far come to get good buys on imported watches, house

plants…

— Shoppers from different places/from a very wide area come to buy imported

watches, house plants… that are of good quality and are not expensive.

near and far: used to indicate that you are referring to a large area or distance

e.g. People would gather from near and far.

Within months his reputation spread near and far.

People came from near and far to see the Christmas display.

a good / better /great, etc. buy: a thing that is worth the money that you pay for it

e.g. That jacket was a really good buy.

Best buys this week are carrots and cabbages.

cf. bad buy: something that is not worth the amount of money you paid for

13. (line 28) They search fl ea markets for special treasures that they can resell in their

own stores for lots of money.

— They examine fl ea markets carefully to fi nd unusually valuable things that they can

Unit 1-6.indd 139 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 144: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

140

sell again in their own stores to make a large amount of money.

search (…) for: to try very hard to find (something or someone), as by looking or by

inner enquiry in (something)

e.g. Firefi ghters searched the buildings for survivors.

The committee has been searching for new ways to tackle youth unemployment.

lots of: a large number, amount, quantity of (used in the same way as “a lot of” but more

informal)

e.g. The idea has attracted lots of publicity.

He’s making lots of money.

14. (line 30) …and the merchandise consists mainly of household items.

— …and the goods are mainly household items.

consist of: to be formed from the things or people mentioned

e.g. The committee consists of ten members.

Their diet consisted largely of vegetables.

15. (line 32) People frequently have garage sales before they move and on weekends when

the weather is nice.

— People often have garage sales before they move to another place and on Saturdays

and Sundays when the weather is fi ne.

frequently: often

e.g. Buses run frequently between the city and the airport.

These are some of the most frequently asked questions about the Internet.

16. (line 35) …or put signs up around the neighborhood.

— … or fix signs in the public places near the place where they live to tell people

there is going to be a garage sale.

put up: to fi x something in a place where it will be seen

e.g. to put up a notice / a poster

She put up a notice about the school trip France.

sign: a piece of paper, wood or metal that has writing or a picture on it that gives you

information, instructions, a warning, etc.

e.g. a shop / pub sign

The sign on the wall said “Now wash your hands”.

Follow the signs for the city centre.

cf. Headaches may be a sign of stress.

There is no sign of John anywhere.

neighborhood: a district or an area of a town; the area that you are in or the area near a

particular place; the people who live there

e.g. We grew up in the same neighborhood.

We searched the surrounding neighborhood for the missing boy.

He shouted so loudly that the whole neighborhood could hear him.

Unit 1-6.indd 140 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 145: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 6 Working

141

17. (line 36) Cleaning, organizing, pricing, and moving merchandise is hard work, but the

opportunity of fl ea markets and garage sales proves that many Americans work for

fun!

— It is not an easy job to clean, arrange, write price tickets on the goods, and then

move the goods, but the opportunity of fl ea markets and garage sales proves that

many Americans do this just for pleasure and enjoyment.

price: to write or stick tickets on goods to show how much they cost; fi x the price of

something at a particular level

e.g. a reasonably priced house

These goods are priced too high.

IV Summary of the Text

Garage sales and fl ea markets are popular in the United States. Many Americans fi nd

that they can make a little extra money and have fun being “weekend entrepreneurs.” Flea

markets are generally open spaces in or out of town that become busy sales centers on

weekends. People who want to sell new or used clothing, tools, furniture, or books rent a

space for the day for a small amount of money and sell their merchandise. Garage sales are

smaller than fl ea markets, and the merchandise consists mainly of household items. People

frequently have garage sales before they move and on weekends when the weather is nice.

Sometimes several families gather their unwanted household goods and sell them together.

Sometimes, to attract more customers, people even put ads in the newspapers, or put

signs up around the neighborhood. Flea markets and garage sales give many Americans an

opportunity of working for fun and profi t.

V Text-related Information

1. Garage Sale:A sale of used articles from people’s house, often takes place in a garage. In Britain,

a similar sale is called car-boot sale, an outdoor sale at which people sell unwanted

possessions, etc. from the boots of their cars.

The following is about how to operate a successful garage sale:

First, set a date and time when you can devote your full time to this sale, for gathering

up various articles as well as being able to attend the sale full time.

Second, plan just what you’re going to put in this sale, if you are going to have the sale

alone, or with two to fi ve more families.

Third, have plenty of change on hand — both silver and paper money.

Now, get down to business. A sale is work — a lot of hard work, but the returns more

than justify the effort. Clean out your closets and ANYTHING that is useless to you or you

don’t want — put it in the sale. Don’t throw anything away. People will buy just about

anything. You’d be surprised. What is one person’s trash is another’s GOLDMINE!

Unit 1-6.indd 141 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 146: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

142

Of course you need to advertise. Be specific, concise and honest. State place, date,

hours. If you have a large amount of clothing, specify some of the sizes, particularly if you

have quite a few in different sizes.

Antiques go over big regardless of state of repair or condition. Give good descriptive

details to save disappointments.

Capitalize on the season. Feature luggage at going-away to school or vacation time or

toys near Christmas.

Today, bottles of all kinds are in demand. Big bottles, little bottles, Jim Beam, Avon,

Kara Brooks, Wheaton/Nuline, old medicine, Mrs. Butterworth, miniature — all kinds, old

fruit jars, and insulators.

Some additional items that we fi nd to be in big demand: baseball cards, lawn mowers,

camping articles, guns, tools, coins, old books, comic books (old and new), aprons, old-

fashioned bonnets, salt and pepper shakers, needlework, jewelry and dishes.

Doll clothing and accessories are always in demand and especially for Barbie and

Ken or teen dolls. Toys go over big at any time. Dolls and stuffed toys make a hit with the

kiddies and they, in turn, will fi nally persuade their mothers to buy something. Children

are very persuasive!

Have a large quantity of items to sell, a big variety. And don’t be afraid to drag out

those outgrown items, old dishes, two-of-a-kind items you don’t really need and generally

“clean house”. You’ll find the money in your pocket is better than all the clutter in the

house.

Homemade items are very popular. If someone in your household sews, then sew up

aprons, doll clothes, dolls, stuffed toys from scraps of material lying around. You’ll make

use of those scraps taking up space and make money too!

Fresh produce such as tomatoes, green beans, corn, fruits, etc. will also sell, if you

should have a garden overfl owing.

String up a clothesline to display any clothing you may have.

Remember, clothing for all ages, men or women, is always in great demand. Children’s

clothing goes over best and especially about the time for school to start in the fall.

Set up card tables or ping-pong tables to display small merchandise. Place tables in a

manner that will leave room for shoppers to browse without feeling crowded. Display your

wares attractively. Be sure they are clean, usable, and priced temptingly.

People are looking for bargains. Don’t disappoint them. Remember that what you sell

is something you don’t want anyway, so whatever you get is gravy.

Take advantage of the space under the tables if you need more display room. You will

be amazed how buyers spot the smallest item under the table. Colorful table covers draw a

lot of attention to your items.

You will save yourself a lot of time answering questions if you show a price on all

merchandise. Use a heavy black-felt marking pen for lettering. If more families go in with

you, identify your price tags with a code such as G 75 cents or M 25 cents. The letters

Unit 1-6.indd 142 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 147: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 6 Working

143

designate, perhaps, the fi rst letter of the last name of the family who contributed items to

sell.

Keep all the tags and at the end of the sale, divide the tags according to code and total

the sales. You may not come out right to the penny on sales and change you had on hand

as anyone can make errors in making change for a customer.

Be sure you have electrical outlets nearby to plug in toasters, blenders, electric skillets,

irons, hair dryers, electric razors, etc., to show people that your articles do work. If you

have to use an extension cord, make sure it is in excellent condition and preferably a heavy

duty one.

If you have any fragile, rare or expensive items such as crystal, cut glass or jewelry,

be sure they are displayed on a sturdy table and up high out of reach of kiddies. They are

curious and you might be too busy to watch them.

Drinking glasses, dishes, cups will sell faster if you price them in sets of 6 for $1.00

instead of 15 cents each. Paperback books, magazines, records and items that have titles

will sell more readily if they are marked separately. If they want them collectively, they’ll

ask you. Then bundle them all up and sell them. Sell everything!

Advertising. Run an ad in your daily newspaper. If you run your ad one day only,

have it in the Thursday paper. You might like to run the ad two days to appear in both

the Thursday and Friday editions. If your sale runs through Saturday, your sale is about

over before the paper hits the street on Saturday. Therefore, 2-day advertising is usually

adequate unless your sale is continued late Saturday night and through Sunday.

However, whatever you decide to advertise — BE READY! Be ready to meet any

customer as soon as the paper hits the street, because some will come before the sale and

before you even get ready to start the next day! In addition to placing an ad in the paper,

place signs at points where people will see them. Some laundromats have bulletin boards

on which you can place notices. Advertise all you can. Work word-of-mouth all you can. If

employed, place signs on your company’s bulletin boards.

The best days for your Garage Sale are Thursday, Friday, and Saturday. Sundays are

usually a waste of time unless you’re staying at home all day doing nothing anyway.

At the end of your sale you will have met a lot of nice, friendly people. If you want to

continue selling items you might have left, you can let people know and have future sales

all lined up. A circular already prepared and passed out to each customer will help insure

future sales. You should have made money, some new acquaintances, and a weary but

happy body! (Adapted from: www.ifg-inc.com/Consumer_Reports/GarageSale.shtml)

2. Flea Market:

An open-air market usually in open spaces in or out of town, where old or new goods

are sold, usually at low prices.

3. Time: an American weekly news magazine that is sold in the US and around the world.

Unit 1-6.indd 143 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 148: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

144

4. People: a US magazine with many short articles about and pictures of well-known

people, especially people known from television and fi lm.

Skills

Translation Skills

本单元的英译汉练习侧重点仍然是词类转换:英语介词转译成汉语的动词。

英语中介词的数量并不多,但使用频率却很高。在很多情况下,英语的介词可以转译成汉语的

动词。如:

One morning, she came to my offi ce for help.(一天早上她来到我办公室,请求帮助。)英语介

词“for”译成汉语动词“请求”。

With determination and patience they realized their dream in 1903.(他们凭借毅力和耐心在

1903年实现了自己的梦想。)英语介词“with”译成汉语动词“请求”。

I have paid thousands of dollars for the camera.(我花了数千美金买了这个相机。)英语介词

“for”译成汉语动词“买”。

Everyone was thrilled and excited at the news.(听到此消息,每个人都激动不已,非常兴

奋。)英语介词“at”译成汉语动词“听到”。

For further details, write to this address.(要了解进一步详情,请写信到这个地址。)英语介

词“For”译成汉语动词“要了解”。

有时英语介词短语作表语,介词可转译为汉语动词,而连系动词则可省略不译,如:

Many of the paintings were beyond repair. 这些油画中有许多(是)无法修复了。

Guided Writing

本单元的基础训练学习写主题句(Topic Sentence)。实际上,学生在阅读技能练习中已接触了主题

句,这里是如何写写主题句。

主题句一般分成两个部分:主题部分(Topic)和限制点部分(Controlling idea)。

1. The American family is changing, but not dying.

2. There are several reasons why I decided to come to college.

Topic Controlling Idea

1. the American family changing, not dying

2. to come to college several reasons

主题句一般要求完整(complete)、清晰(clear)和具体(specifi c)。

本单元的实用英语写作部分,是要求学生根据所提供的邀请函做出简单回复,表示很高兴能够

Skills

Unit 1-6.indd 144 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 149: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 6 Working

145

被邀请,并确认自己会前去参加。

下面是几封接受邀请信的开头部分样例:

1. In reply to your invitation of May 20, I would be pleased to meet with you on next

Tuesday, June 6, at 6:00 p.m. at the Sunway Hotel Dining room…

2. I’ll be delighted to come to your luncheon on Tuesday, April the sixth, at 11: 00 a.m. at

_____ (Place)…

3. It is my pleasure to accept your invitation to deliver the State Address at a Joint Session

of the 122nd Maine Legislature on Tuesday, January 25, 2008, at 7:00 p.m.

I look forward to seeing you then.

Reading Skills — Reading for Details (4):

Understanding Defi nitions

Definition is a statement that explains the meaning of a term. Having a clear

understanding what a terms means can avoid confusion and misunderstanding.

The following are the usual patterns for a defi nition:

1. Term + means /is / is known as + defi nition

e.g. Assertiveness is standing up for your rights.

Stress is known as a mentally or emotionally upsetting condition.

2. Term + means /is /is known as + class + detail

e.g. Insomnia is a sleep disorder that prevents people from sleeping.

Marriage is a legally accepted relationship between a woman and a man in

which they live as husband and wife, or the offi cial ceremony which results in this.

Motivation can be defined as a concept used to describe the factors within an

individual which arouse, maintain and channel behaviour towards a goal.

3. By term, we mean /refer to + defi nition

e.g. By motivation, we mean goal-directed behaviour.

4. By term, we mean /refer to + class + detail

e.g. By anxiety disorder, we mean a condition characterized by extreme, chronic

anxiety which disturbs mood, thought, behavior and/or physiological activity.

Signal words for defi nition:

defi ne, is, be defi ned as, be known as, that is (i.e.), the term means, we mean, we

can state, refer to, be referred to as, be described as, be thought of as

Unit 1-6.indd 145 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 150: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

146

Key to the Exercises

Text A

First Reading

Exercise 1

1. C 2. B 3. C 4. A 5. D

While Reading

1. A person who searches out executive personnel for companies. (Draw students’ attention

to the explanation in brackets.)

2. “Both” refers to two things that a company may encourage its employees to do: to perform

productively when at work and to enjoy their leisure time after work.

Second Reading

Exercise 2

1. F 2. T 3. T 4. F 5. F

Exercise 3

Working Hard or Hardly Working?

The findings of a survey: Americans work longer hours now but take shorter vacations

than they did in 1979.

The connection between time and productivity: not always positive.

One cause of the problem: Employees have to spend more time on the job because em-

ployers often consider the amount of time on the job in addi-

tion to their job performance.

Employers’ belief: If the employees stay at work later, they may actually do more work.

Employees may work long hours for things other than monetary benefi t, such as the glam-

our and publicity.

One solution for the employees who are not willing to spend so much extra, unproductive

time at work: Find a company that encourages people to perform productively when at

work and to enjoy their leisure time after work.

Oral Practice

Exercise 4

(For reference.)

Americans work longer hours and take shorter vacations than they did before. Many

While Reading

Second Reading

Oral Practice

Key to the ExercisesKey to the Exercises

First Reading

Unit 1-6.indd 146 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 151: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 6 Working

147

people believe that the more time a person spends at work, the more he or she accomplishes.

However, the connection between time and productivity is not always positive. Many studies

show that after a certain point, anyone’s productivity and creativity begin to decrease. In

spite of this, many people still work extra hours. Part of the problem is understandable. Some

people work long hours simply because they hope to be promoted by their employers, who

think that if the employees stay at work later, they may actually do more work.

Vocabulary and Structure

Exercise 5

1. accomplished 2. benefi ts 3. investment 4. qualifi cation 5. redundant

6. publicity 7. evaluate 8. relaxed 9. indicates 10. promoted

Exercise 6

1. In addition to 2. searched out 3. such… as 4. fell off 5. so that

6. take a vacation 7. In fact 8. found out 9. according to 10. at work

Exercise 7

1. off 2. to 3. for 4. out 5. at

6. between 7. On, on 8. at 9. down 10. out

Exercise 8

VERBS school a class / a lesson a course a language an examattend ★ ★ ★go to ★ ★learn ★teach ★ ★ ★take ★ ★ ★fail ★ ★

1. failed 2. take /attend 3. take 4. attend / go to/ take

5. failed 6. go to /attend 7. teach 8. learnt

Exercise 9

1. personnel 2. personal 3. amount 4. number

5. accomplished 6. perform 7. situation 8. case

Exercise 10

1. The more friends you have, the happier you will feel.

2. The more you practice your English, the more profi t you’ll make.

3. The more tickets you can sell, the better.

4. The farther north you move, the colder it will be.

Vocabulary and Structure

Unit 1-6.indd 147 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 152: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

148

5. The harder he tried, the less progress he seemed to make.

Exercise 11

1. I hurried so that I wouldn’t be late.

2. We need to finish the paper before Friday so that we can go on vacation during the

weekend.

3. He spoke very loudly so that everybody in the room could hear what he said.

4. We moved to London so that we can visit our friends more often.

5. Please arrive early so that we can start /will be able to start the meeting on time.

Translation Practice

Exercise 12

1. 谁会想到,这个背着吉他的青年会改变流行文化。

2. 他留长发、穿紧身裤,很快成了青少年的偶像。

3. 联系上老朋友,遛遛狗,逛逛美术馆,听听你最喜欢的音乐。

4. 中午,她回家吃午饭。

5. 我们都知道晚到的行李会第一个下飞机。

6. 你赞成还是反对这项计划?

7. 他戴着帽子出去了。

8. 对不起,我不理解你的意思—能再说一遍吗?

Exercise 13

1. We ordered some extra vegetables in addition to our usual dishes.

2. I want to leave now so that I won’t be late.

3. The police were trying to search out the real robber.

4. Apparently, many people believe that the more time a person spends on his study, the

better the examination results.

5. In my opinion, perhaps working hard is his only solution.

Writing Practice

Exercise 14

1. Exercise can benefi t us in several important ways.

2. There are several reasons why I decided to come to college.

3. People can avoid an embarrassing situation by taking certain steps.

4. Sleep problems can be avoided if you follow a few simple guidelines.

5. My hometown, Hangzhou, is famous for its West Lake.

6. Beijing is a wonderful place to visit for several reasons.

Writing Practice

Unit 1-6.indd 148 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 153: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 6 Working

149

Exercise 15

December 12, 2007 Dear Catherine,

Thank you very much for the invitation to your Christmas party. I will be very happy to

come. My brother is also interested in having a look. I do appreciate the chance the De-

partment arranged for us students to get acquainted with many new friends, students as

well as teachers. I will also try to bring some food, but right now I don’t yet know what it

is. I’ll let you know when it conjures up in my mind.

Thanks again and best wishes,

Liu Ying

Dictation

Exercise 16

1. relatively 2. aspects 3. No matter how busy you are 4. handle

5. what must be in your life 6. go back over it 7. Repeat until

8. includes these values 9. politely

10. give it the attention

Text B

First Reading

Exercise 1

1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T

5. F 6. F 7. T 8. T

Second Reading

Exercise 2

1. Because many Americans fi nd that they can make a little extra money and have fun being

“weekend entrepreneurs.”

2. In open spaces in or out of town.

3. Mainly household items.

4. On weekends when the weather is nice.

5. To attract more customers.

6. They put ads in the newspapers, or put signs up around the neighborhood.

Dictation

First Reading

Second Reading

Unit 1-6.indd 149 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 154: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

150

Reading Skills

Exercise 3

1. Term defi ned: special education

Defi nition: instruction that is specially designed, at no cost to you as parents, to meet

your child’s unique needs

Signal words: is defi ned as

2. Term defi ned: a positive attitude

Defi nition: more than just doing positive things, a positive lifestyle, an active, day-

by-day approach to your life, balancing work, personal life, and family,

health, and time off for yourself

Signal words: means, means, means

3. Term defi ned: self-confi dence

Defi nition: the belief in your own ability when doing anything, by viewing yourself

positively and realistically about yourself and your environment.

Signal words: refers to

4. Term defi ned: a dreamer

Defi nition: a person who spends a lot of time thinking about or planning enjoyable

events that are not likely to happen

Signal word: is

5. Term defi ned: culture

Defi nition: learned patterns of behavior and attitudes shared by groups of people

Signal words: is defi ned as

Exercise 4

1.

Term defi ned Defi nition

pop culture

1. what happens around us everyday

Signal word: is

2. the latest trends and styles that the teenagers wear everyday

Signal word: is

2.

Term defi ned Defi nition

a geek someone who is passionate about a certain topic or idea

a computer geek

one who spends as much of his free time as possible on his

computer and enjoys learning new hardware and software related

tips and tricks

a book geek one that reads a lot, in fact can probably speed read

Unit 1-6.indd 150 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 155: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 6 Working

151

Vocabulary Practice

Exercise 5

1. search 2. curious 3. blocks 4. signs 5. gather

6. consists 7. generally 8. frequently 9. explore 10. collection

Exercise 6

1. for fun 2. except for 3. full of 4. consisting… of 5. searching… for

6. put up 7. look over 8. a set of 9. such as 10. on weekends

Expanding Your Vocabulary

Exercise 7

1. recognition 2. multicultural 3. introduction 4. communication 5. directions

6. organization 7. multi-purpose 8. multi-million 9. multimedia 10. production

Exercise 8

1. survey 2. while 3. mainly 4. extra 5. way

6. a variety of 7. gain 8. a good idea 9. commuting 10. activities

参考译文

Text A

辛勤工作还是无所事事?

最近的一份调查指出,如今许多公司雇员的工作时间都比1979年长,而休假时间却比1979年时

短。看来美国人现在的工作比以往任何时候都更为辛苦。事实果真如此吗?管理顾问比尔·迈耶决

心弄明白这个问题。他用3天时间来观察一位工作努力的投资银行家。这位银行家每周工作80小时,

迈耶记下了他在3个漫长的工作日里所做的一切。在3天结束的时候,迈耶同这位银行家一起回顾了

他的各项活动。他们发现了什么呢?他们发现,此人80%的时间都在瞎忙,例如,出席没有必要的会

议、打冗长的电话、整理和打开他那两个大公文皮包。

很显然,许多人都认为,一个人在工作上花的时间越多,他的成绩便越大。然而,时间与工效

之间的关系并不总是成正比的。事实上,许多研究证明,任何人的工作效率和创造力在达到某一点

以后,都会开始下降。此外,要让人们意识到他们的工作效率正在下降,并不总是一件容易的事。

问题的部分原因是可以理解的。当雇主评估其雇员时,他们除了考虑工作表现以外,还要考虑

工作时间的长短。雇员们都知道这一点。因此他们的工作时间都比9年前更长,而休假却比9年前更

短。虽然许多工作人员可以在正常的每周40小时以内有效地完成工作,但他们还是认为,他们必须

在正常的工作时间以后用更多的时间来工作,以便让那些能提升他们的人看到这一点。

一群物色人才的人(为公司寻找业务领导人才的人)曾被问及他们对某一情况的看法。某重要公司

Unit 1-6.indd 151 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 156: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

152

有一业务领导职位,但有两名可供选择的候选人。他们的资格相似。例如,两人都很可靠,一人能

在一周40小时的工作时间内很好地完成其所担任的工作,另一人则在一周80小时工作时间内同样也

能很好地完成同样的工作。按照一位物色人才专家的看法,每周工作80小时的候选人会得到这份工

作。这位候选人花费在工作上的时间可以鼓舞其他雇员也花费较多的时间用于工作。雇主认为,雇

员工作时间越长,他们实际上做的工作也越多。

人们长时间工作并不仅仅是为了得到更多的钱。在广告、演艺和新闻等领域内,魅力和知名度

比任何钱财更有价值。然而,许多雇员并不情愿在办公室花费那么多的无效时间。一旦他们按照要

求做完工作,他们就希望轻松和享受一番。对这些人来说,解决的办法就是找到一家能鼓励人们两

者兼顾的公司。

Text B

累有所得,乐在其中

这是一个晴朗的周末的上午。你决定去散步。一切都很安静,除了你看到在三条马路以外,有

一群人和一些五颜六色的东西。走近时,你发现地上摆着很多东西:《时代周刊》,《人物》杂

志,一套玩具卡车,一些举重设备,两辆自行车以及一套椅子。人们在忙着停车,下车,浏览车行

道上摆放的物品。你本想从一群人旁边绕过去,但你很好奇,是出交通事故了吗,还是在办社交聚

会?都不是。欢迎你第一次来到宅前出售。

同一天上午,你的朋友开着车在一个十字路口拐弯时拐错了方向,来到一个挤满了人而不是车

的停车场。他看到许多五颜六色的物品。一开始,他以为在办画展,然后他发现这是一个集市。他

停好车,下车来看个究竟。他第一次来到了跳蚤市场。

宅前出售和跳蚤市场在美国十分流行。许多美国人发现当“周末企业家”既能赚点外快又能给

他们带来乐趣。他们把儿童服装、家用器具、玩具和书籍,拿到宅前出售或跳蚤市场上重新出售。

跳蚤市场通常设在城里或郊外的空地上,一到周末这就变成了忙碌的销售中心。人们如果想卖

新的或用过的衣服、工具、家具、或书籍,只需在当天花很少的钱租上一块地方,就可以销售他们

的商品了。购物者从四面八方赶来,想买到一些便宜的进口手表、室内植物、杂志、照相机、儿童

服装、以及枕套和珠宝这样的手工制品。有的购物者还买卖古董。他们在跳蚤市场上搜罗一些特别

的珍品,然后在自己的商店里用高价再次卖出。

宅前出售比跳蚤市场小,所卖的商品主要是家居用品。在宅前出售,盘子、壶、锅、书籍、儿

童服装很便宜也很常见。人们常常在搬家之前和天气晴朗的周末举办宅前出售。有时,几户人家把

他们不想要的家用物品凑在一起卖。商品越多,吸引的顾客当然也就越多。有时,为了吸引更多的

顾客,人们甚至在报纸上登广告,或是在附近挂起广告牌。

对这些商品进行清洗、分类、定价和搬运很累,但跳蚤市场和宅前出售的存在表明许多美国人

乐在其中。

Unit 1-6.indd 152 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 157: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Realizing Our Dreams

Unit

7

ObjectivesObjectivesObjectives

Text A Text B

Words

conceive, eventual ly , pursuit ,

reward, memorable, feat, conceal,

toss, recycle, attempt, witness,

effi cient

l a t t e r , c a t e g o r y , d i s t i n g u i s h ,

motivation, possess, downfall ,

advantage, resource, knack, convince,

disappointed, strive, reality

Phrases and

Expressions

agree with, pursuit of, at one’s

fi ngertips, in the words of, be made of,

set one’s mind on, start out, believe it

or not, work on, give birth to

believe in, fall into, make of,

distinguish… from, go after, aim

small, rise above, to the fullest, shoot

for the stars, put one’s mind to

Collocation verb + idea verb + mind

Confusable Words late/later, invent/discover, made of/made from, sense/meaning

StructuresV + whatever…

Wilbur had his mind set on something more exciting.

Translation

Practice增词释

Writing Practice Write Topic Sentence / Decline an Invitation

Reading Skills Reading for Details (5): Understanding Classifi cation

Expanding Your

Vocabulary

state + ment → statement, develop + ment → development, improve +

ment → improvement, self + confi dence → self-confi dence, self + educated

→ self-educated, self + awareness → self-awareness153

Unit 1-7.indd 153 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 158: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

154

Text A

The Birth of a Dream

I Introduction

1. Introductory Remarks

You can fulfi ll your dream you think of, develop in your mind and believe in. A

good example of this is the Wright brothers, who had an idea which in the end became

their dream and lifelong interest. Their determination to make that dream come true

bore fruit – an achievement that changed world travel.

What idea or ideas are you working on? Don’t say you can’t do this or that because

you are not a scientist. Don’t say you are not smart enough. Your dream can be

achieved. First, give birth to that dream with an idea. A simple idea that anyone of us

can think of and develop in our mind!

2. Introductory Questions

1. When did the Wright brothers achieve their dream of human fl ight?

2. Where did the Wright brothers make the world’s fi rst fl ight in a machine that was

heavier than air and powered by an engine?

3. What started their dream of human fl ight?

4. Why did many people hardly believe the Wright brothers had done what they

claimed?

5. What made the Wright brothers decide to seriously pursue fl ying?

6. What can we learn from the Wright brothers’ lifelong pursuit of human fl ight?

II Outline

Paras. 1-- 2 Introduction: a dream is born from a simple idea

Paras. 3-- 7

The birth of the airplane.

a. two brothers had an idea which became their dream

b. the Wright brothers fl ew the world’s fi rst power-driven, heavier-than-

air and man-controlled machine

c. how the dream started

d. the Wright brothers enjoyed learning new things

e. the Wright brothers realized their dream in 1903

Text A

Unit 1-7.indd 154 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 159: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 7 Realizing Our Dreams

155

Para. 8A simple idea conceived in the minds of two young men who did not

fi nish high school.

Paras. 9-- 10

Your dream can be achieved.

a. excuses for not working on an idea or ideas

b. give birth to your dream with a simple idea

III Detailed Study of the Text

1. (line 1) Whatever the mind can conceive and believe, it can achieve.

— You can achieve anything that you can think of, develop in your mind and you

believe in.

whatever: 1. used to say that it is not important what happens, what you do because it

does not change the situation

e.g. Whatever I suggest, he always disagrees.

2. any or all of the things that are wanted, needed, or possible

e.g. Help yourself to whatever you want.

The children were allowed to do whatever they liked.

He’ll be ready to accept whatever help he can get.

I am willing to pay whatever price you ask.

conceive: to think of a new idea, plan, etc. and develop it in your mind

e.g. Scientists fi rst conceived the idea of the atomic bomb in the 1930’s.

He conceived the idea of transforming the old power station into an arts centre.

2. (line2) Would you agree with the statement that a dream is born from an idea — a

simple idea conceived in the mind?

— Would you think it acceptable that a dream comes from an idea, a simple idea that

you think of?

statement: something that someone says or writes offi cially

e.g. He refused to give a statement to the police.

The government is expected to issue a statement about the investigation to the

press.

We were not surprised by their statement that the train services would be reduced.

be born from: to come from; originate from

e.g. The idea of the invention was born from the observation.

The idea was born from our determination to teach creative problem solving, a skill

seldom touched upon in the high school curriculum.

3. (line 4) …which eventually became their passionate and consuming dream.

— …which (the idea) in the end became their powerful and vital dream.

eventually: in the end, especially after a long time or a lot of effort, problems, etc.

e.g. Although she had been ill for a long time, it still came as a shock when she

eventually died.

(续表)

Unit 1-7.indd 155 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 160: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

156

It might take him ages but he’ll do it eventually

passionate: having very strong feelings or emotions

e.g. He had a passionate belief in justice.

The Italians are said to be the most passionate people in Europe.

The child’s mother made a passionate plea for help.

The family moved to Bramley in Surrey when she was fi ve and there she developed

a passionate interest in wild fl owers.

consuming: a consuming feeling is so strong that you think of little else

e.g. a consuming hatred

consuming interest/passion (=a strong feeling of interest, or something you are

extremely interested in)

During this period, politics became his consuming interest.

Though he didn’t realize it at the time, cricket was his life and consuming interest.

4. (line 5) Their relentless pursuit of that dream was rewarded with an accomplishment

that changed world travel.

— Their determination to make that dream come true bore fruit – an achievement that

changed world travel.

relentless: strict, cruel, or determined, without ever stopping

e.g. After a decade of relentless efforts, we have gradually made some achievements in

our overseas operations.

This relentless pursuit of growth and increased profi t at any cost is questionable.

pursuit of: trying to get, achieve, or fi nd something in a determined way

e.g. I’m reminded of a quote from Aldous Huxley: “Happiness is not achieved by the

conscious pursuit of happiness; it is generally the by-product of other activities.”

The author argues that freedom and the pursuit of freedom must walk hand in

hand with responsibility.

be rewarded with: to achieve something through hard work and effort

e.g. The team have worked hard and their efforts have been rewarded with success.

His effort was rewarded with world-wide popularity.

accomplishment: something that is successful, or that is achieved after a lot of work or

effort

e.g. Getting the two leaders to sign a peace treaty was his greatest accomplishment.

The building represents the greatest accomplishment that we could ever imagine to

accomplish in our lives.

The award will be made to an individual for his/her personal accomplishment.

5. (line 11) sustained fl ight: fl ight that lasted for a (relatively) long time

sustained: continuing for a long time

e.g. The president’s speech was greeted by sustained applause.

I have a child who has trouble focusing and maintaining a sustained effort on

homework and class work.

Unit 1-7.indd 156 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 161: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 7 Realizing Our Dreams

157

6. (line 11)This memorable feat took place at Kitty Hawk, North Carolina on a cold

windy morning.

— This unforgettable and impressive achievement was made at Kitty Hawk, North

Carolina on a cold windy morning.

memorable: likely to be remembered or worth remembering

e.g. Some memorable moments also have come during the singing of the national

anthem.

The most memorable occasions are often the ones you didn’t plan.

For Clarissa Grey, the summer had been memorable because she had been

consistently happy.

feat: something diffi cult needing a lot of skill, strength, bravery, etc. to achieve it

e.g. They climbed the mountain in 28 days, which was a remarkable feat.

He led his team to victory for the tenth time, a feat no captain had achieved before.

7. (line 14) The dream started with an idea that was planted in their minds by a toy

given to them by their father.

— The toy given by their father made them begin to have an idea, which led to their

dream.

plant an idea in somebody’s mind: to make someone begin to have an idea, especially

so that they do not realize that you gave them the idea

e.g. Someone must have planted the idea of suicide in his mind.

Both of them strongly encouraged me to get a Ph.D., and had they not encouraged

me and planted the idea in my mind, I don’t think I would have ever thought of

going that far in my education.

cf. It was this toy that permanently planted the idea of fl ying machines in the brothers’

heads.

8. (line 15) In the words of the boys, “Late in the autumn of 1878, our father came into

the house one evening with some object partly concealed in his hands, and before we

could see what it was, he tossed it into the air. Instead of falling to the fl oor, as we

expected, it fl ew across the room...”

— According to the boys, one evening in the late autumn of 1878, their father came

into the house with his hands holding an object partly concealed. The father threw

it into the air before they knew what it was. They expected it would fell to the fl oor,

but it didn’t. It fl ew across the room…

in the words of/ in someone’s words: using someone’s words

e.g. Jones was, in the judge’s words, “an evil man”.

Their personal life is, in their words, a mess.

late: 1. (happening or being) near the end of a period of time

e.g. It was late at night.

We talked late into the night.

It was late summer when it happened.

Unit 1-7.indd 157 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 162: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

158

2. (happening or arriving) after the planned, expected, usual or necessary time

e.g. This train is always late.

You’ll be late for your fl ight if you don’t hurry up.

conceal: 1. to hide something carefully

e.g. The shadows concealed her as she crept up to the house.

The path was concealed by long grass.

He was carrying a concealed weapon.

2. to hide your real feelings or the truth

e.g. She tried to conceal the fact that she was pregnant.

I tried to conceal my surprise when she told me her age.

conceal something from somebody

She was taking drugs and trying to conceal it from me.

Is there something you’re concealing from me?

toss: to throw something carelessly

e.g. He glanced at the letter and then tossed it into the bin.

The bull tossed him up into the air.

9. (line 23) This simple toy made of bamboo, cork and stretched rubber bands,

fascinated the Wright brothers and sparked their lifelong interest in human fl ight.

— This simple toy which is made of bamboo, cork and stretched rubber bands, greatly

interested the Wright brothers and started their interest in human flight which

lasted for the whole of their life.

fascinate: to interest someone a lot

e.g. Science has always fascinated me.

Anything to do with aeroplanes and fl ying fascinates him.

spark: to cause the start of something

e.g. This proposal will certainly spark another countrywide debate about how to

organize the school system.

The recent interest rises have sparked new problems for the Government.

10. (line 27) Initially, they recycled broken parts…

— At the beginning, they collected and treated broken parts so that they could be used

again…

initially: at the beginning

e.g. Initially, most people approved of the new scheme.

Stan initially wanted to go to medical school.

Initially, I thought I would only stay there a year.

recycle: to collect and treat rubbish to produce useful materials which can be used

again

e.g. The department is now advising other customers on how to recycle their waste.

They recycle more than half their waste paper.

Unit 1-7.indd 158 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 163: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 7 Realizing Our Dreams

159

11. (line 28) Their interest moved to bicycles and in 1893, they opened the Wright Cycle

Company…

— They turned their interest to bicycles and in 1893, they started the Wright Cycle

Company...

12. (line 30) But Wilbur (the older brother) had his mind set on something more exciting.

He decided to seriously pursue fl ying.

— But the older brother Wilbur decided he was going to do something more exciting

and was determined to do it. He decided to make an earnest effort to realize the

dream of human fl ying.

set one’s mind on (doing) something: to be determined to have or achieve something

e.g. They set their mind on something and they really work hard to achieve it.

With hard work and determination, they can accomplish anything they set their

mind on.

I’ve set my mind on getting a college degree.

cf. put/ set/ turn one’s mind to something: to decide that one wants to achieve

something and try very hard to do it

e.g. I think anyone can lose weight if they set their mind to it.

You can do anything if you put your mind to it.

Note the structure “have + Object + V-ed”

e.g. The fi lm in my camera is fi nished and I need to have it developed.

All he had to do was to stay in focus and have his mind set on his goal.

13. (line 33) … after unsuccessful attempts at human fl ight.

— … after they failed a lot of times in their attempt to fl y an airplane.

attempt: n. an act of trying to do something, especially something diffi cult

e.g. All attempts to control infl ation have failed.

She passed her driving test at the fi rst attempt.

He made no attempt to be sociable.

None of our attempts at contacting Dr James was successful.

v. to try to do something, especially something diffi cult

e.g. He attempted to escape through a window.

He attempted a joke, but no one laughed.

14. (line 34) What started out as a hobby soon became a passion.

— Initially, it was a hobby and before long it became a very great liking.

start out: to begin happening or existing in a particular way, especially when this

changes later

e.g. The Star started out as a small weekly newspaper.

Some businesses start out as hobbies.

passion: 1. a very strong liking for something

e.g. I hope he turns his passion for football towards something else.

Gardening was her great passion.

Unit 1-7.indd 159 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 164: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

160

2. a very strong belief or feeling about something

e.g. He spoke with considerable passion about the importance of art and literature.

The issue arouses strong passions.

15. (line 38) Believe it or not, they did not have a university degree …

— It is true, although it seems unlikely, that they did not have a university degree…

believe it or not: used when you are saying something that is true but surprising

e.g. He’s upstairs doing his homework, believe it or not.

He enjoys school, believe it or not.

16. (line 40) They were not scientists in the true sense of the word.

— According to the exact meaning of the word “scientist” /Strictly speaking, they were

not scientists.

in the true sense (of the word): in the exact meaning (of the word)

e.g. The media industry is not like any ordinary “industry” in the true sense of the word.

She is a real artist in the true sense of the word.

cf. in a strict sense: in the most limited meaning of a word, phrase, etc.

e.g. In a strict sense, frost refers simply to a temperature of zero degrees Celsius or less.

17. (line 41) In fact, many of their peers who did not witness their accomplishment,

had trouble believing that two bicycle mechanics from Dayton, Ohio did what they

claimed.

— In fact, many other mechanics who did not seen their achievement, could hardly

believe that two bicycle mechanics from Dayton, Ohio achieved their dream of

human fl ight.

peer: a person who is the same age or has the same social position or the same abilities

as other people in a group

e.g. Do you think it’s true that teenage girls are less self-confi dent than their male peers?

American children did less well in math than their peers in Japan.

witness: to experience important events or changes; see something happen, especially a

crime or accident

e.g. During August, we have witnessed the increase in number of the inpatients as well

as outpatients.

Several residents claim to have witnessed the attack.

18. (line 44) What idea or ideas are YOU working on?

— What idea or ideas are you thinking of and developing in your mind?

work on: to spend time producing or improving something

e.g. He’ll have to work on getting fi t before the game.

His dancing technique is good, but he needs to work on his fi tness.

He has spent the last two years working on a book about childcare.

19. (line 45) Have you limited yourself by saying you are not smart enough? Or have you

joined the majority in saying that everything has already been invented or discovered?

— Have you stopped yourself from working on an idea because you believe you are

Unit 1-7.indd 160 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 165: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 7 Realizing Our Dreams

161

not clever enough? Or have you said, as most people do, there is nothing for you to

invent or discover because everything has been invented or discovered?

20. (line 49) With a super computer between your ears and the personal computer at your

fi ngertips, your dream can be achieved.

— With your intelligence and the personal computer readily available, your dream

can become a reality.

Here the expression “a super computer between your ears” refers to your brain /

intelligence.

at one’s fi ngertips: if you have something at your fi ngertips, you can get it and use it

very easily

e.g. He has all the latest statistics at his fi ngertips.

Even with remote controls at our fingertips, we are likely to stay tuned to the

channel we have been watching.

We have all the facts and fi gures at our fi ngertips.

21. (line 51) First, give birth to that dream with an idea. A simply idea that ANYONE of

us can conceive!

— First, start to have that dream with an idea, with a simple idea anyone can think of

and develop in his or her mind.

give birth to: 1. to make something important start to exist

e.g. It was this event that gave birth to the peace movement.

The fi lm gave birth to a TV show of the same name.

2. if a woman or female animal gives birth to a baby, she produces a baby

from her body

e.g. She gave birth to twins.

At 9:40 Claudia gave birth to a nine-pound baby boy.

IV Summary of the Text

A dream is born from an idea — a simple idea conceived in the mind. Back in the

19th century two brothers had an idea which in the end became their dream. With their

determination and patience, their dream was rewarded with an accomplishment that

changed world travel. Their dream was started by a toy given to them by their father. To

fulfi ll their dream, they spent many hours researching, testing their machines and making

improvements after unsuccessful attempts at human fl ight. In 1903, their dream came true.

With your intelligence and the personal computer at your fi ngertips, your dream can

also be achieved. First, give birth to that dream with an idea. A simple idea that ANYONE

of us can conceive!

Unit 1-7.indd 161 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 166: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

162

V Text-related Information

1. The Wright Brothers:

The childhood

On April 16, 1867, Milton and Susan Wright welcomed their third child into their

household near Millville, Indiana. The newest member of the family, Wilbur, had two

older brothers to contend with: Reuchlin, 6, and Lorin, 4. Little did Susan Wright know

that she had given birth to the fi rst half of one of the world’s most famous inventive

partnerships. The other half of the duo, Orville, was born four years later, on August 19,

1871, in the family’s newly-built home at 7 Hawthorn Street in Dayton, Ohio. Orville’s

sister, Katharine, was also born in that house on his third birthday.

As youngsters, Wilbur and Orville looked to their mother for mechanical expertise

and their father for intellectual challenge. Milton brought the boys various souvenirs

and trinkets he found during his travels for the church. One such trinket, a toy

helicopter-like top, sparked the boys’ interest in fl ying. In school, Wilbur excelled, and

would have graduated from high school if his family had not moved during his senior

year. A skating accident and his mother’s illness and subsequent death kept him from

attending college. Orville was an average student, known for his mischievous behavior.

He quit school before his senior year to start a printing business.

The Wright cycle shop

The fi rst time Wilbur and Orville referred to themselves as “The Wright Brothers”

was when they started their own printing fi rm at the ages of 22 and 18. Using a damaged

tombstone and buggy parts, they built a press and printed odd jobs as well as their own

newspaper.

In 1892, the brothers bought bicycles. They began repairing bicycles for friends,

then started their own repair business. They opened up a bicycle shop in 1893, and

three years later, made their own bicycles called Van Cleves and St. Clairs. While

nursing Orville, who was sick with typhoid in 1896, Wilbur read about the death of a

famous German glider pilot. The news led him to take an interest in fl ying. On May 30,

1899, he wrote to the Smithsonian Institution for information on aeronautical research.

Within a few months after writing to the Smithsonian, Wilbur had read all that was

written about fl ying. He then defi ned the elements of a fl ying machine: wings to provide

lift, a power source for propulsion, and a system of control. Of all the early aviators,

Wilbur alone recognized the need to control a flying machine in its three axes of

motion: pitch, roll, and yaw. His solution to the problem of control was “wing warping.”

He came up with the revolutionary system by twisting an empty bicycle tube box with

the ends removed. Twisting the surface of each “wing” changed its position in relation

to oncoming wind. Such changes in position would result in changes in the direction of

fl ight. Wilbur tested his theory using a small kite, and it worked.

Unit 1-7.indd 162 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 167: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 7 Realizing Our Dreams

163

The world’s fi st airplane

In August of 1900, Wilbur built his fi rst glider. He then contacted the U.S. Weather

Bureau for information on windy regions of the country. Reviewing the list, he chose

a remote sandy area off the coast of North Carolina named Kitty Hawk, where winds

averaged 13 m.p.h. He and Orville then journeyed to Kitty Hawk where they tested

the 1900 glider. The following year, they tested a new and improved glider with a 22-

foot wingspan. A disappointing performance by the 1901 glider prompted the Wright

brothers to construct a wind tunnel to test the effectiveness of a variety of wing shapes.

Using the results of the wind tunnel experiments, they constructed their 1902 glider.

Testing it at Kitty Hawk in October, they met with success, gliding a record 620 feet.

Once again they returned to Dayton and began work on developing a propeller and an

engine for their next effort, a fl ying machine.

Having designed a propeller with the same principles they used to design their

wings, Wilbur and Orville then built their own 4-cylinder, 12-horsepower engine.

They built the 1903 Flyer in sections in the back room of their cycle shop at 1127 West

Third in Dayton. When completed, it was shipped down to Kitty Hawk and assembled.

On December 14, 1903, Wilbur won a coin toss and made the fi rst attempt to fl y the

machine. He stalled it on take-off, causing some minor damage. The plane was repaired,

and Orville made the next attempt on December 17. At 10:35 a.m., he made the fi rst

heavier-than-air, machine powered flight in the world. In a flight lasting only 12

seconds and covering just 120 feet, Orville did what men and women had only dreamed

of doing for centuries… he fl ew. (Adapted from: www.hfmgv.org/exhibits/wright)

2. Kitty Hawk:

In 1903, Orville Wright telegraphed home the triumphant news of the fi rst powered

flight. The telegraph was dispatched from Kitty Hawk. This, along with the isolation

of the area and the unusual names themselves, led to the subsequent confusion as to

where the fi rst fl ight actually occurred.

The actual location of the first flight was some four miles away in what is now

known as Kill Devil Hills but newspapers had picked up the dateline of Kitty Hawk.

The origin of the name Kitty Hawk is still a matter of local debate. Most people

agree that it is a Native American name for this area. The word originally appeared on

English settlers’ maps as “Chickehawk” or “Chickahawk” in the early 1700’s. By the late

1700’s, local residents spelled the name as we do today, with old land deeds referring to

settlements as “Kittyhuk”, “Kittyhark”, “KittyHawk”, and “Kitty Hawk”.

Unit 1-7.indd 163 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 168: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

164

Text B

Believing in Ourselves to Realize Our Dreams

I Introduction

1. Introductory Remarks

There are two types of people in life — the people who get things done and the

people who wish they got things done. What makes these two types of people be

different from each other? What makes one person a doer and another person just a

dreamer? Our author is trying to give her answer. She asks us to dream big and aim

high, and even if we miss, we know what to change when we try again. To accomplish

our goals we have to rise above our fears and believe in ourselves.

2. Introductory Questions

1. What makes one person go after what he or she wants and another person simply sit

and wish that it would happen?

2. Do you believe we all can achieve anything if we put our minds to it? Why or why not?

3. Do you believe the saying “aim small, miss small”? Why or why not?

4. What type of people do you think you fall into, the doer or the dreamer? Why do you

think so?

5. Do you agree with the statement that “believing in ourselves in the key to realize our

dreams”? Why or why not?

II Outline

Paras. 1-- 3

Two types of people.

a. two types of people in life and the difference between them

b. people have the ability to accomplish their goals and realize their

dreams

Paras. 4-- 6

The writer’s own experience.

a. her love of doing hair and make-up

b. her desire to live life to the fullest and realize her dreams

Paras. 7-- 9

Why people remain complacent.

a. aim small, miss small

b. fear

Para. 10 Conclusion: believe in ourselves.

Text B

Unit 1-7.indd 164 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 169: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 7 Realizing Our Dreams

165

III Detailed Study of the Text

1. (line 2) Sadly, most people fall into the latter category.

— Unfortunately, most people belong to the second type.

fall into: to belong to or be part of a particular group, area of responsibility, range of

things, or type of things

e.g. Many illnesses fall into the category of stress-related illnesses.

Leaders fall into two categories.

latter: being the second of two people or things, or the last in a list just mentioned

e.g. In the latter case, buyers pay a 15% commission.

I agree with you that over time, more and more products will fall into the latter

category.

cf. former:

category: a group of people or things that are all of the same type

e.g. There are three categories of accommodation — standard, executive and deluxe.

The novels are divided up into three categories: historical, romantic, and crime.

2. (line 2) What is it that distinguishes these two types of people from each other? What

makes one person go after what he or she wants and another person simply sit and

wish that it would happen?

— What makes these two types of people be different from each other? What makes

one person try to get what he or she wants and another person just do nothing to

get things done but wish they got things done?

distinguish: to be the thing that makes someone or something different or special

e.g. The factor that distinguishes this company from the competition is customer

service.

He has a spark of genius that distinguishes him from the other actors.

While he is nothing but a man, there is something about him that distinguishes him

from every other man.

go after: to try to get something

e.g. I can’t decide whether to go after the job or not.

Our company is going after the software market in southern California.

Once you graduate, a degree from Duke should give you the confi dence to go after

the job with the greatest challenge — not the greatest salary.

3. (line 5) The difference is the level of motivation and self-confi dence.

— What makes them be different from each other is that they differ in their level of

motivation and self-confi dence.

motivation: 1. enthusiasm for doing something

e.g. He’s a bright enough student — he just lacks motivation.

There seems to be a lack of motivation among the staff.

2. the need or reason for doing something

e.g. What was the motivation for the attack?

Unit 1-7.indd 165 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 170: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

166

The motivation behind the decision is the desire to improve our service to our

customers.

4. (line 6) If people possess these two things, they can achieve anything they put their

minds to.

— If people have these two things, that is, motivation and self-confi dence, they can

accomplish anything that they are determined to do.

put one’s mind to something: to decide you are going to do something and to put a lot

of effort into doing it

e.g. If you’d just put your mind to it, I’m sure you could do it.

Whatever she put her mind to, she would set a goal to achieve it and do it.

If you put your mind to it, you can always fi nd a way forward that works for you

and your employees.

Creative thinking is something you can do if you just put your mind to it.

5. (line 6) All people have the ability to accomplish their goals and realize their dreams,

no matter how far-fetched they may seem — especially college students.

— All people are able to reach their goals and make their dreams come true, however

unlikely their goals and dreams may seem to be true. This is especially true of

college students.

far-fetched: very unlikely to be true, and diffi cult to believe

e.g. The project seemed to be a far-fetched idea at that time.

That possibility is not as far-fetched as it may seem from outside.

6. (line 8) We have the resources at our fi ngertips to develop our skills.

— There are the resources available to us to develop our skills.

resource: 1. something such as useful land, or minerals such as oil or coal, that exists

in a country and can be used to increase its wealth

e.g. The three central problems are energy, mineral resources, and food.

The country is rich in natural resources.

2. (plural) all the money, property, skills etc. available that you have to use

when you need them

e.g. She had no fi nancial resources.

Only limited resources are available to the police.

3. (plural) personal qualities, such as courage and determination, that you

need to deal with a diffi cult situation

e.g. He proved that he has considerable inner resources.

7. (line 10) I’m talking about anything in life that people want to pursue.

— I’m talking about anything in life that people want to go after.

8. (line 11) underprivileged children: extremely poor children

underprivileged: lacking the money, possessions, education, opportunities, etc. that the

average person has

e.g. Children from underprivileged family background are statistically more likely to

Unit 1-7.indd 166 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 171: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 7 Realizing Our Dreams

167

become involved in crime if they are misled.

She has done much to help underprivileged children all over the world.

9. (line 13) What made me start thinking about this was my own desire to go to

cosmetology school.

— The thing that made me start thinking about this (“this” refers to what has been

mentioned in the previous paragraph) was my own desire to go to cosmetology school.

10. (line 14) … and seem to have a natural knack for it, so I would like to develop that

skill.

— … and appear to have an inborn skill/ ability for doing hair and make-up, so I

would like to develop it.

knack: a skill or an ability to do something easily and well

e.g. She has a knack for remembering faces.

She has a knack for making everyone feel comfortable and relaxed.

11. (line 17) at one time or another: at a certain time

e.g. At one time or another all of us are under stress.

I’m sure that every one of us has at one time or another felt the urge to step back

into the past, even if only briefl y.

12. (line 18) If we ever have a slow weekend, I quickly convince one of them to let me

color or highlight their hair.

— If we ever had a weekend during which we were not busy or did not have a lot of

things to do, I quickly persuaded one of them to let me color or highlight their hair.

convince: 1. to persuade someone to do something

e.g. One by one we met with these children and spoke to them about the importance of

their life and convinced them to change their lifestyle by taking interest in learning.

I hope this will convince you to change your mind.

2. to make someone feel certain that something is true

e.g. The offi cials were eager to convince us of the safety of the nuclear reactors.

He’ll try to convince you of Mitchell’s innocence.

highlight: 1. to make some parts of your hair a lighter color than the rest

e.g. She may have highlighted her hair or dyed her hair black.

2. to mark written words with a special colored pen, or in a different color on

a computer

e.g. Use the cursor to highlight the name of the document you want to print.

3. to make a problem or subject easy to notice so that people pay attention to it

e.g. Your resume should highlight your skills and achievements.

This report highlights some of the problems faced by old people in winter.

13. (line 22) I have been thinking about life and what people make of it, and I realized the

key is in the old cliché, “You only live once.” I don’t want to tell my grandchildren

someday that I have regrets.

— I have been thinking about life and want to know what opinions other people have

Unit 1-7.indd 167 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 172: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

168

about it, and I understood that the most important thing about life is we live only

once as is expressed by an old cliché (the old and overused saying). Therefore

I want to live life to the fullest /live it with a meaning. I don’t want to tell my

grandchildren in future that I feel sorry about my life.

About the cliché “You only live once”, people usually say we only live once. For

example:

“We only live once, but if we work it right once is enough.”

“We only live once, and there should not be room for any regrets.”

“I believe we only live once. Therefore live life to its fullest.”

“We only live once. Live it with a meaning.”

“We only live once. Let’s make the most of it!”

“We only live once, so we all deserve to live life to our fullest potentials and achieve all

our dreams, after all, what is the point of having dreams if you won’t even try to make

them come true.”

make of: to understand someone or the meaning of something in a particular way

e.g. Have you read Dawson’s letter? What do you make of it?

What do you make of the new boss?

14. (line 26) I want to be able to tell them that I lived life to the fullest and realized my

dreams.

— I want to be able to tell them that I lived a life in the best or most complete way and

made my dreams come true.

to the fullest /full: in the best or most complete way

e.g. Ed believes in living life to the full.

It affects us directly — a balanced diet means we have the necessary energy to carry

on living life to the full.

When I heard we were going to write a paper on how we could live life to the

fullest, I was very excited.

15. (line 30) So why do they remain complacent, keeping it only a dream?

— So why do they remain satisfied with their present situation, not making their

dreams a reality?

complacent: feeling so satisfi ed with your own abilities or situation that you feel you do

not need to try any harder

e.g. a complacent smile/attitude

We can’t afford to become complacent about any of our products.

16. (line 33) Society has taught us that we should aim small so we are not disappointed if

we miss.

— We have been told that we should not aim at a high level af achievement or we’ll

get disappointed if we don’t reach our aim.

aim small: to intend to have or hope to achieve a modest goal; not try to achieve a lot

e.g. “Aim small — miss small” is exactly the sort of lesson we all need to remember

Unit 1-7.indd 168 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 173: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 7 Realizing Our Dreams

169

when setting goals.

I fi gured if I aimed small, it would pay off more.

17. (line 34) We should dream big and aim high, and if we miss, we know what to change

when we try again.

— We should have an ambitious goal and intend to aim at a high level of achievement,

and even if we fail to accomplish our goal, we know what to change when we try

again.

dream big: to have a big dream; imagine something ambitious that you would like to

happen; be very ambitious

e.g. Actor James Caviezel has always dreamed big. But as a child, his dreams did not

include acting.

Carlos dreamed big, wanting to be a Major League player.

aim high: to aim at a high level of achievement; try to achieve a lot

e.g. My parents always encouraged me to aim high.

The problem was that he never aimed high or had a plan.

18. (line 36) The complacency that runs rampant in this nation, even in our generation, is

sure to be our downfall.

— More and more people, even people of our generation feel satisfi ed with their own

abilities and their present situation and they don’t want to try harder to pursue

their dreams and goals, which will inevitably lead to our downfall.

complacency: a feeling of calm satisfaction with your own abilities or situation that

prevents you from trying harder

e.g. What annoys me about these boys is their complacency — they seem to have no

desire to expand their horizons.

There’s no room for complacency if we want to stay in this competition.

rampant: getting worse quickly and in an uncontrolled way

e.g. He said that he had encountered rampant prejudice in his attempt to get a job.

Disease is rampant in the overcrowded city.

19. (line 37) The main thing that separates the doers from the dreamers in life is fear.

If we spend our whole life afraid to shoot for the stars, all we will have to show for

ourselves is a life of mediocrity.

— The main thing that distinguishes the doers from the dreamers in life is fear. If

we spend our whole life without daring to aim high, all we will have to show for

ourselves is a not very good life.

“The doers” are those who get things done in life and “the dreams” are those who wish

they got things done.

shoot for the stars: to be very ambitious and try hard to achieve something, even though

it may be very diffi cult

e.g. If you’re ready to move on in your career, keep your feet fi rmly on the ground while

shooting for the stars.

Unit 1-7.indd 169 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 174: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

170

Make sure your students know what kinds of opportunities are out there, and try to

encourage them to shoot for the stars.

20. (line 41) To accomplish our goals we have to rise above our fears and believe in

ourselves.

— To fulfi ll our aims, we should not allow our fears to affect us and we should trust

ourselves and be confi dent that we will be successful.

rise above: to not allow something bad to affect your behavior or upset you

e.g. Andrews will be remembered as a man who rose above his faults to become a

champion of his people.

I want to inspire you with the story of a man who rose above his disability and

built a happy, successful life for himself and his family through hard work.

21. (line 41) If each of us strives to make our dreams a reality, think of what an amazing

place our world could be.

— If everyone tries very hard to make our dreams come true, imagine what a nice

place our world could become.

strive: to try very hard to do something or make something happen, especially for a long

time or against diffi culties

e.g. I was still striving to be successful.

They strove to get me a good education.

IV Summary of the Text

There are two types of people in life — the people who get things done and the people

who wish they got things done. What makes these two types of people different from each

other? Our author believes it is the difference in the level of motivation and self-confi dence.

If people possess these two things, they can achieve anything they put their minds to. So we

should dream big and aim high, and even if we miss, we know what to change when we try

again. The main thing that separates the doers from the dreamers in life is fear. To accomplish

our goals we have to rise above our fears and believe in ourselves.

V Text-related Information

1. Some Quotes for Aim:

Ambition never comes to an end.

— Yoshida Kenko

An average person with average talents and ambition and average education, can

outstrip the most brilliant genius in our society, if that person has clear, focused goals.

— Mary Kay Ash

Anybody can do just about anything with himself that he really wants to and makes

up his mind to do.

— Norman Vincent Peale

Unit 1-7.indd 170 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 175: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 7 Realizing Our Dreams

171

2. Some Quotes About Self-confi dence:

Trust yourself, then you will know how to live.

— Johann Wolfgang Von Goethe

We confide in our strength, without boasting of it; we respect that of others,

without fearing it.

— Thomas Jefferson

We will either fi nd a way, or make one.

— Hannibal

What seems impossible one minute becomes, through faith, possible the next.

— Norman Vincent Peale

What we need are more people who specialize in the impossible.

— Theodore Roethke

What we need is not the will to believe, but the wish to fi nd out.

— Bertrand Russell

Whatever we expect with confi dence becomes our own self-fulfi lling prophecy.

— Brian Tracy

When you are alone you are all your own.

— Leonardo Da Vinci

When you engage in systematic, purposeful action, using and stretching your

abilities to the maximum, you cannot help but feel positive and confident about

yourself.

— Brian Tracy

3. Some Quotes About Motivation:

Dream as if you’ll live forever, live as if you’ll die today.

Every accomplishment starts with the decision to try.

Shoot for the moon. Even if you miss, you’ll land among the stars.

Success is not fi nal, failure is not fatal: it is the courage to continue that counts.

You can close your eyes to the things you do not want to see, but you cannot close

your heart to the things you do not want to feel.

Unit 1-7.indd 171 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 176: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

172

Skills

Translation Skills

本单元的英译汉技能练习的重点是增词译。增词译也就是在译文中增加原文虽无其词而有其义

的一些词,使译文通顺而且更加忠实地表达原文的意思。增词译的通常情况有两种,一种是根据意

义上或修辞的需要,如增加表示时态意义的词,增加英语不及物动词�含的宾语意义的词,另一种

情况是根据句法上的需要,增加原文中所省略的词。本单元练习试图通过翻译一些句子,来说明在

翻译过程中增加译文字词的必要性。

这里再提供一些例子供教学中参考:

My father was severely crippled and very short, and when we would walk together, his hand

on my arm for balance, people would stare. 我的父亲腿瘸得十分厉害,个子又矮。当我们在一起走

路时,他的手总搭在我的臂上以保持身体平衡,人们总是盯着看。

Once there, he would cling to the handrail until he reached the lower steps that the warmer

tunnel air kept ice-free. 一旦到了那儿,他便手抓扶手一直走到底下的台阶时才放开手,因为那里通

道的空气暖和些,下面几级台阶没有结冰。

In Manhattan the subway station was the basement of his offi ce building, and he would not

have to go outside again until we met him in Brooklyn on his way home. 曼�顿的地铁站就在他

办公楼的地下一层,他无须再走出楼来。下班回家路上,我们会在布鲁克林接他。

Guided Writing

本单元的基础训练部分是上一单元的继续,仍然是写主题句。要提醒学生在写主题句时要注意

主题句中要含有主题部分(Topic)和限制点部分(Controlling idea)。

本单元的实用英语写作部分是根据所提供的邀请信写一份回复,婉言谢绝。一般来说,谢却的

复信中要对邀请表示感谢,告诉对方不能出席,对不能前去表示遗憾,并应阐明不能应邀的原由。

常用的开头:

Thank you for your invitation to speak at .

I sincerely appreciate your inviting me to .

I appreciate your invitation to participate next month in .

I would like to express my appreciation for your asking me to speak at the .

告诉对方不能出席:

Unfortunately, I have been scheduled to on the same day.

Although I think the entire day would be most worthwhile, I have a previous commitment

and thus cannot attend the conference at this time.

Unfortunately, I will be visiting during the meeting and cannot break away even

for a day, so I will have to decline the invitation.

Skills

Unit 1-7.indd 172 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 177: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 7 Realizing Our Dreams

173

Unfortunately I shall be out of town on December 7th and will not, therefore, be able to be

present at the banquet you are holding.

结尾:

If you have other meetings in the future that will feature the same subject, I would be glad to

speak, schedule permitting.

We wish you good luck with your _________ and thank you for thinking of us.

下面是几封谢却邀请函:

Mr. and Mrs. George MailerPresent their compliments to Mr. and Mrs. Robert Smith, and regret that a previous

engagement prevents them from accepting the kind invitation to dinner on Friday, March 26th.

Sincere yours George Mailer.

Dear Mrs. Mailer

Thank you very much for your kind invitation to luncheon on the sixteenth. But I am sorry to tell you that I am not able to come as my plans have been changed, and I will be re-turning to Dalian on Monday.

Sincerely yours,William Hanson

Dear ___,I have heard so much about ______ (someone) from _____ (someone else) that I almost

feel as though I knew him. I would certainly enjoy meeting his mother!But unfortunately I will leave on ______ (date, e.g. Friday, the seventh of May), and

therefore cannot accept your invitation for luncheon on that day.It was thoughtful of you to invite me, and I am extremely sorry I cannot accept, but I

do hope you will ask me again some time! Sincerely yours, William Hanson

Unit 1-7.indd 173 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 178: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

174

Dear Prof. ,

Thank you for your invitation. Unfortunately, I will not be able to give a talk at (place) on April 14, 2007. I regret that I must decline as I have a previous commitment.

You may want to invite (someone) in my place. He is well-acquainted with the work we do here at (place). If you would like to pursue this option, please con-tact him directly at (phone number).

Sincerely yours, William Hanson

Reading Skills — Reading for Details (5):

Understanding Classifi cation

Classification is writing that organizes, or sorts, things into categories. By

understanding classifi cation, we can know how a writer develops material by relating parts

to wholes. In classifi cation, the writer associates similar things or processes by grouping

them into classes. He can classify organisms, mechanisms, processes according to shapes,

magnitudes, effects, and so on. In division, the writer develops a topic by breaking it down

into smaller parts.

In his classifi cation, the writer often uses an organizing principle, which is how he

sorts the group of thing, not the categories themselves.

Signal words for classifi cation:

be divided into, be separated into, be classed into, fall into, be classifi ed into, be

subdivided into, be grouped into, types, classes, kinds, sorts, groups, categories,

fi eld, parts

Signal words for the organizing principle in classifi cation:

according to, based on, in terms of

The following are some examples of classifi cation:

1. Parents seemed to fall into two categories according to whether they controlled in a

fairly direct, autocratic way or by means of a supportive but fi rm interest.

2. Public water systems are further classified into community water systems or

noncommunity water systems.

3. Typically, seasonal businesses fall into one of two categories: those that can shut

down in the off-season and those whose owners have to fi nd another way to maintain cash

fl ow during the rest of the year.

Unit 1-7.indd 174 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 179: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 7 Realizing Our Dreams

175

Key to the ExercisesKey to the Exercises

4. Massage at sporting events generally falls into two categories: Pre-event and Post-

event treatment. They differ from one another in four main ways: Goals, Effects, Timing

and Application of the treatment.

5. The people who hate you fall into two categories: the stupid, and the envious. The

stupid will like you in fi ve years, the envious: never. (John Wilmot)

6. The causes of falls can be divided into two categories: personal factors and

environmental factors.

Key to the Exercises

Text A

First Reading

Exercise 1

1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F 6. T 7. F 8. T

While Reading

1. The Wright brothers successfully flew “the world’s first power-driven, heavier-than-air

machine in which man made free, controlled, and sustained fl ight.”

2. Human fl ight.

Second Reading

Exercise 2

1. B 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. C

Exercise 3

The Birth of a Dream

In the 19th century, two brothers’ relentless pursuit of a dream was rewarded with an accomplishment that changed world travel.

When and where the Wright brothers achieved their dream.

On Friday December 17, 1903 at 10:35 a.m.They flew “the world’s first power-driven, heavier-than-air machine in which man made free, controlled, and sustained flight.” This memorable feat took place at Kitty Hawk, North Carolina on a cold windy morning.

Unit 1-7.indd 175 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 180: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

176

How the dream started. It started with an idea by a toy given to them by their father. The toy fascinated the Wright brothers and sparked their life-long interest in human fl ight.

Great thinkers. They enjoyed learning new things.They recycled broken parts, built a printing press and opened their own printing offi ce.Their interest moved to bicycles and in 1893, they opened the Wright Cycle Company.Wilbur had his mind set on something more exciting. He de-cided to seriously pursue fl ying. The brothers spent many hours researching, testing their machines and making improvements after unsuccessful attempts at human fl ight. With determination and patience they realized their dream in 1903.

Oral Practice

Exercise 4

(For reference.)

As youngsters, Wilbur and Orville had their interest in fl ying sparked by a toy their father

gave them. One evening in the autumn of 1878, their father came home with some object

partly concealed in his hands, and before they could see what it was, he tossed it into the

air. It fl ew across the room till it struck the ceiling, where it fl uttered awhile, and fi nally sank

to the floor. This simple toy fascinated them and sparked their lifelong interest in human

flight. They started a printing firm and later they opened a bicycle shop that repaired and

made bicycles. The older brother had his mind set on something more exciting. He decided

to seriously pursue flying. They spent many hours researching, testing their machines and

making improvements after unsuccessful attempts at human flight. What started out as a

hobby soon became a passion. With determination and patience they realized their dream in

1903.

Vocabulary and Structure

Exercise 5

1. pursuit 2. memorable 3. feat 4. effi cient 5. witness

6. eventually 7. concealed 8. rewarded 9. conceived 10. attempt

Exercise 6

1. believe it or not 2. is made of 3. gave birth to 4. working on

5. at your fi ngertips 6. agree with 7. pursuit of 8. In the words of

9. set his mind on 10. started out

Unit 1-7.indd 176 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 181: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 7 Realizing Our Dreams

177

Exercise 7

1. to 2. on 3. of 4. on 5. out

6. at 7. at 8. in 9. in 10. of

Exercise 8

1. crossed /went through /entered your mind 2. had no idea 3. change her mind

4. make up my mind 5. accepted the idea 6. read his mind 7. focus her mind

8. speak her mind 9. came to my mind 10. conceived an idea

Exercise 9

1. late 2. later 3. discovered 4. invented

5. made from 6. made of 7. sense 8. meaning

Exercise 10

1. do whatever they liked

2. eat whatever you want

3. agree with whatever you hear

4. achieve whatever you can think of

5. enjoy whatever you’re doing

Exercise 11

1. Many thousands lost their loved ones and had their lives changed forever.

2. The old factory is falling to pieces and we need to have it rebuilt.

3. The fi lm in my camera is fi nished and I need to have it developed.

4. All he had to do was to stay in focus and have his mind set on his goal.

5. The children had their eyes fi xed on my bag as I was about to take out a plastic bag full of

erasers.

Translation Practice

Exercise 12

1. 他腿瘸得十分厉害,身材矮小。

2. 虽说许多活动父亲都不能参加,但他还是试着以某种方式去参与。

3. 妈妈,妈妈,听我告诉你。孩子快要出生了。

NOUNS change conceive cross have get read developidea ★ ★ ★ ★ ★mind ★ ★ ★ ★ ★

enter accept speak come to focus go through make upidea ★ ★ ★mind ★ ★ ★ ★ ★

Unit 1-7.indd 177 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 182: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

178

4. 她盼望着假日的到来。

5. 他一坐下来就讲开了,滔滔不绝地讲个没完。

6. 当地上有雪或冰时,行走对他来说就成了不可能的事了,甚至有帮助都不行。

7. 我在一个小时后再次打电话给她的时候,她房里的护士告诉了我一件不可思议的事情。

8. 那时他母亲靠帮人家洗衣谋生。

Exercise 13

1. You can do whatever you want, but you have to conceive a plan fi rst.

2. Before we could see what it was, he tossed it into the air.

3. Believe it or not, a toy fascinated the Wright brothers and sparked their lifelong interest in

human fl ight.

4. In the words of the writer, “with determination and patience, and after unsuccessful

attempts, they fi nally realized their dream.”

5. Their efforts were rewarded with an accomplishment that changed world travel.

Writing Practice

Exercise 14

1. Topic: leadership skills

Topic sentence: Leadership skills can be classifi ed into three levels: personal, team, and

organizational.

2. Topic: people pollute their environment

Topic sentence: A recent survey shows that people pollute their environment in various

ways.

3. Topic: going to school

Topic sentence: I love going to school at least for three reasons.

4. Topic: working from home

Topic sentence: There are several advantages of working from home.

5. Topic: fi xing cars

Topic sentence: There is a lot of work involved in fi xing cars.

Exercise 15

Dear Xu Dahai,

Thank you very much for your kind invitation. I do wish I could attend your

graduation party. I know it will be lots of fun. Unfortunately, my parents have already

invited some of our relatives over for a celebration and therefore I am unable to attend your

party. I wonder if you could come on Monday evening so that you can tell me all about the

party.

Yours,

Wang Ling

Unit 1-7.indd 178 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 183: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 7 Realizing Our Dreams

179

Dictation

Exercise 16

1. perfected 2. 25

3. 30 4. 40

5. fi gures

6. receive much attention

7. fl ew their plane

8. a factory to make airplanes

9. see the improvements of the plane

10. how the airplane changed the world and our lives

Text B

First Reading

Exercise 1

1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. T 6. T 7. F 8. T

Second Reading

Exercise 2

1. The people who get things done and the people who wish they got things done.

2. The level of motivation and self-confi dence.

3. The skill for doing hair and make-up.

4. Life and what people make of it.

5. She wants to tell them that she lived life to the fullest and realized her dreams.

6. We should aim small so we are not disappointed if we miss.

7. We all have the ability to accomplish our goals and realize our dreams. And even if we

miss, we know what to change when we try again.

8. Fear.

Reading Skills

Exercise 3

1. What is classifi ed: Mexican tourists

Categories: four categories: vacation, business, visiting relatives or friends, and attending

conventions

Organizing principle: the purpose of their trip

Signal words: be classifi ed into

2. What is classifi ed: memory

Categories: long term memory, short term memory and working memory

Organizing principle: the stored time of contents

Unit 1-7.indd 179 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 184: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

180

Signal words: be divided into

3. What is classifi ed: interests

Categories: three areas (things, people and data/ideas)

Organizing principle: the focus of any activity

Signal words: are usually grouped into

4. What is classifi ed: the college’s admission requirements

Categories: two categories: those who are 19 years old or younger, and those who are 20

years old or older

Organizing principle: age

Signal words: fall into

5. What is classifi ed: aid

Categories: two categories, direct aid granted to governments and indirect aid granted to

international organizations

Organizing principle: granted to whom (implied)

Signal words: be grouped into

Exercise 4

Vocabulary Practice

Exercise 5

1. resources 2. convinced 3. downfall 4. reality 5. latter

6. strove 7. categories 8. possess 9. disappointed 10. distinguish

Exercise 6

1. aim small 2. shoot for the stars 3. put your mind to

4. rose above 5. go after 6. believed in

The Upper Secondary School Courses

General courses Specialized courses Integrated courses

For 1) those who wish to

enter institutions of

higher education

2) t h o s e w h o a r e

going to and enter

employment but

have chosen no

specifi c vocational

area

For those students who have

chosen a particular vocational

area as their future career

Be further classifi ed into:

a g r i c u l t u r e , i n d u s t r y ,

commerce, fishery, home

economics, nursing, science,

m a t h e m a t i c s , p h y s i c a l

education, music, art, English

language and other courses

For students’ diverse interests,

abilities and aptitudes,

future career plans, etc.

Unit 1-7.indd 180 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 185: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 7 Realizing Our Dreams

181

7. fall into 8. distinguish… from

9. make of 10. to the fullest

Expanding Your Vocabulary

Exercise 7

1. self-employed 2. argument 3. accomplishment 4. self-pity

5. Self-control 6. entertainment 7. self-taught 8. management

Exercise 8

1. positively 2. come true 3. what 4. how 5. of

6. desire 7. negative 8. likely 9. focus on 10. take

参考译文

Text A

梦想的产生

“没有做不到,只有想不到。”

你能同意,梦想产生于一个想法 —— 一个心里形成的想法这个说法吗?

在19世纪,两个兄弟的一个想法,最终成为了他们激情满怀、矢志不渝的梦想。他们坚持不懈

地追求梦想,取得改变世界旅行的成就。

在1903年12月27日,星期五,上午10: 35分,莱特兄弟实现了他们的梦想。他们驾驶着“世界

上第一架由动力驱动、重量大于空气的机器,完成了自由的、由人来操控的持续飞行”。这项令人难

忘的壮举发生在北卡罗来纳州基蒂霍克镇,一个寒冷的、刮风的早晨。

这个梦想始于一个想法。父亲给他们的一个玩具,把这个想法种在了他们心里。用兄弟俩的话

来说,“1878年深秋的一天晚上,父亲走进屋子,两手拿着一样东西,半遮盖着。还没等我们看清

楚那是什么,父亲就把它扔向了空中。但它并没像我们所想的那样摔到地上,而是从房间的一头飞

到了另一头,然后又撞向天花板,扑扇了一会儿,最后才落到地上。”这个由竹子、软木和拉长的橡

皮筋做成的简陋玩具,让莱特兄弟俩着了迷,燃起了他们持续一生的对于人类飞行的兴趣。

莱特兄弟俩非常善于思考,他们喜欢学习新鲜事物。一开始,他们回收破旧零部件,造出了一

台印刷机,并开办了自己的印刷厂。后来,他们的兴趣转移到自行车上。在1893年,他们成立了怀

特自行车公司,出售和维修自行车。但是威尔伯(哥哥)的心思却在另一件更激动人心的事情上,

他决定认认真真地探索飞行。

兄弟俩花费大量时间研究和测试机器,以及在多次人工飞行尝试失败后进行改善。一开始的业

余爱好,很快变成了一种激情。凭借毅力和耐心,他们在1903年实现了自己的梦想。

下一次,当你听到飞机飞过,或乘坐飞机旅行时,想一想这一切是怎么开始的,这始于两个连

高中都没读完的年轻人脑子里的一个简单的想法。不管你信不信,他们并没有航空工程、数学、物

理或任何其他专业的大学学位。从真正意义上来说,他们不是科学家。事实上,许多没有亲眼目睹他

参考译文

Unit 1-7.indd 181 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 186: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

182

们的壮举的同辈人,都难以相信,两个来自俄亥俄州代顿市的自行车修理工干成了他们想干的事。

你在为什么想法而努力呢?你是不是认为,因为自己不是科学家,所以这也做不了那也做不

了?你是不是认为自己不够聪明,从而限制了自己?还是说,你和大多数人一样,认为所有的东西

都已经被发明和发现出来了?

自从1981年出现第一代个人电脑,我们做很多事情变得更加高效。有了你的大脑和手头的个人

电脑,你的梦想一定能实现。首先,用一个想法产生一个梦想,一个简单的、我们任何人都可以想

得到的想法!

Text B

相信自己能够实现梦想

生活中有两种人—— 做成事情的人和希望能够做成事情的人。不幸的是,大多数人属于后者。

到底是什么把这两者区别开来的呢?是什么让一种人能追求他们自己所想,而另一种人却仅仅只是

坐视希望一切能发生呢?是什么让一个人成为电脑怪人,而让另一个人成为比尔·盖茨呢?区别正在

于决心和自信心的多少。

人要是有了这两样东西,就可以实现他们专心去做的一切事情。所有人都有达到目标、实现梦

想的能力,无论梦想看上去是多么遥不可及——尤其是对大学生而言,我们拥有普通人所没有的许

多优势,提升能力的条件都唾手可得。

但是,我谈的并不仅仅只是教育和事业的目标,我所谈的是人们在生活中愿意追求的任何东

西。是什么使得一个人只是祝愿穷孩子能有更多的机会,而另一个人却成了良师益友呢?

让我开始思考这些问题的起因始于我想上美容学校。我一直都非常喜欢为别人做头发和化妆,

而且似乎很有天分,所以更想提高一下这个技艺。

我在原来就读的大学的剧院系工作,为各种演出做头发和化妆。我也时不时地为我所有的朋友

做头发。要是我们的周末有空,我会很快说服某个朋友,让我为他(她)染发或是亮发。我就是喜欢做

这些。

既然如此,我为什么不去学习做一个美容师呢?我计划毕业以后就去。我一直在思考生活和人

们对生活的态度。我意识到,关键还是那句老话,“你的生命只有一次”。我不想在某一天告诉我

的孙辈说,我很后悔。我想能够告诉他们,我尽情地生活过了,而且实现了我的梦想。

要说所有人都有梦想或渴望,我想,这恐怕没什么问题。那么他们为什么让梦想仅仅只是梦

想,却仍然洋洋自得呢?这常常没有真正的原因。

社会教育我们,目标要低,这样,一旦实现不了就不会失望。这是一种可怕的生活态度!我们

应该想得远,期望高,即使失败了,也知道下一次努力时什么地方该改一改。

我们国家到处都弥漫着洋洋自得的情绪,甚至我们这一代也是这样,这注定将把我们引向失

败。将生活中的行动者与空想者区分开的主要因素就是恐惧。如果我们把一生都不敢去努力追求似

乎难以获得的东西,那我们为自己展示的就只能是一种平庸的生活。我不知道你的想法,但我不愿

平庸。我想让人们看到我的生活后问我,“你只用了20年就做了这么多吗?”

为了实现我们的目标,我们要战胜自己的恐惧,相信自己。如果每个人都为梦想成为现实而努

力奋斗,想想看,我们的世界将变得多么神奇!

Unit 1-7.indd 182 16/3/24 上午9:19

Page 187: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Our Parents

Unit

8

ObjectivesObjectivesObjectives

Text A Text B

Words

cripple, balance, bother, despite,

indignity, envy, judge, engage,

content, urge, reluctance, regain

energetic, courageous, disabled,

grieve, upcoming, awaken, vision,

miracle, memory, sorrow, intertwined,

overcome

Phrases and

Expressions

let on, cling to, marvel at, subject…to,

engage in, break out, take a dive, on

leave, see to it that, be envious of

at the same time, none of, lapse into,

no longer, grieve for, hold hope,

insist on, lose one’s battle with, be

free of, stare at

Collocation verb + pace verb + balance verb + standard

Confusable Words pace/speed, judge/think of, opportunity/occasion, really/indeed

Structures

On one memorable occasion a fight broke out at a beach party, with

everyone punching and shoving.

Once there, he would cling to the handrail until he reached the lower steps

that the warmer tunnel air kept ice-free.

Translation

Practice省略译

Writing Practice Write Topic Sentences / Notices

Reading Skills Reading for Details (6): Understanding Process

Expanding Your

Vocabulary

ill+ ness → illness, sad + ness → sadness, eager + ness → eagerness, comfort

+able → comfortable, suit +able → suitable, reason +able → reasonable 183

Unit 1-8.indd 183 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 188: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

184

Text A

My Father

I Introduction

1. Introductory Remarks

How is your relationship with your parents? What are your memories of your

relationship with them when you were young? The passage we are going to read is

about a son’s memory of his father, who was seriously crippled but always had a good

heart for others. Then, how did the author feel, in his early years, when he was seen

with his father? What does the author recall about his father now? And what does he

learn from his father?

2. Introductory Questions

1. Why would the author feel uneasy when walking with his father?

2. What was his father’s attitude to work?

3. What did his father think of himself?

4. What did his father look for in others?

5. What does the author marvel at?

6. What does the author learn from father’s attitude to life?

II Outline

Paras. 1-- 4

My father – a man of courage

a. my embarrassment when walking with him, but he never let on

b. diffi cult to coordinate our steps on the way

c. he never missed a work day

d. how he went to work in bad weather

Paras. 5-- 11

I now marvel at my father’s courage and standards

a. he never saw himself as an object of pity, nor did he envy others

b. the standard by which he judged people

c. he tried to participate in some way

Paras. 12-- 13

I think of him often and of his “good heart”.

a. to regret my early reluctance/embarrassment

b. to remind myself of his words when in frustration

Text A

Unit 1-8.indd 184 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 189: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 8 Our Parents

185

III Detailed Study of the Text

1. (line 1) When I was growing up, I was embarrassed to be seen with my father.

— In my childhood, I felt uncomfortable and nervous when I was seen walking with

my father.

grow up: to develop from child to adult

e.g. Your children are growing up very quickly.

I grew up on a farm.

What are you going to do when you grow up?

2. (line 3) … his hand on my arm for balance…

— …with his hand on my arm in order to keep balance /his hand being on my arm for

balance…

This phrase is an absolute structure, indicating a simultaneous action when they “walk

together”.

balance: a state of being steady

e.g. She lost her balance and fell over.

She had to hold onto the railings to keep her balance (= to stop herself from

falling).

3. (line 3) I would inwardly squirm at the unwanted attention

— I would feel uneasy when others saw /noticed us walking in an awkward way.

inwardly: inside your mind and not expressed to other people

e.g. Inwardly, he disliked talking to others.

He was inwardly assured by her sincerity.

4. (line 4) If he ever noticed or was bothered, he never let on.

— If he did notice any of my reluctance or felt troubled by this, he would never

showed it /never let anyone else see how he felt.

bother: to cause trouble to; worry

e.g. His bad leg is bothering him again.

Living on my own has never bothered me.

bothered: worried or upset

e.g. He’s very bothered about what people think of him.

They were an hour late and she didn’t seem at all bothered.

She felt bothered when I asked her for help.

let on: to tell someone something, especially something you have been keeping secret

e.g. Don’t let on what I told you.

We never did let on how we found out.

I’m sure he knows more than he’s letting on.

5. (line 6) It was diffi cult to coordinate our steps — his halting, mine impatient…

— It was diffi cult for us to keep pace with each other because he stopped and started

walking now and then as if uncertain and I walked faster…

Unit 1-8.indd 185 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 190: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

186

halting: stopping and starting as if uncertain

e.g. After a few halting steps, he was walking smoothly.

He would then move his right leg forward in a halting step and then take an

unassisted step with his left foot.

She spoke to me in a quiet halting voice explaining that the stress of her work had

effected her ability to speak normally.

6. (line 8) You set the pace. I will try to adjust to you.

— You decide the speed of walking, and I will do my best to follow you /try to change

my speed and keep up with you.

set the pace: to determine or fi x the speed

e.g. As leaders, we have the opportunity to set the pace.

She let us set the pace, following close behind.

7. (line 10) He went to work sick, and despite nasty weather.

— In spite of bad weather or occasional sickness, he insisted on going to work (i.e.

never missing a day).

Here, the “go Adj /V-ed” is a structure without a comma in between. Such structures are

usually used along with verbs like leave, go, return (get home), come, sit, stand, rise, etc.

e.g. We all left the meeting convinced that the project would be successful.

They went hunting for hours, but returned empty-handed.

Peter got home tired out from the three-month-long journey.

despite: used to say that something happens or is true even though something else

might have prevented it; in spite of

e.g. He came to the meeting despite his serious illness.

I still enjoyed the week despite the weather.

cf. in spite of: without being affected or prevented by something

e.g. In spite of his injury, Ricardo will play in Saturday’s match.

We all enjoyed ourselves, in spite of the awful weather.

8. (line 11) … and would make it to the offi ce even if others could not.

— ... and would arrive in time at the offi ce even if others could not.

9. (line 12) A matter of pride.

— Father was proud of his being able not to miss a day of work. /This was something

Father felt proud of.

This is an elliptical sentence, used for emphasis.

a matter of: a thing/concern / business of

e.g. It was naturally a matter of great importance.

It’s all a matter of personal taste.

10. (line 16) Once there, he would cling to the handrail until he reached the lower steps

that the warmer tunnel air kept ice-free.

— As soon as he got there, he would hold on to the handrail. In this way, he reached

the lower steps that were free of ice because of the warmer tunnel air.

Unit 1-8.indd 186 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 191: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 8 Our Parents

187

Note that in the clause “once there” the subject and verb are omitted.

cf. Once he was there, he would cling to…

We can often leave out “subject + be” in clauses with while, when, once, although, etc.

if the main and subordinate clauses refer to the same subject.

e.g. When in doubt about taking the medicine, consult your doctor. (= when you are in

doubt)

He was on holiday in Beijing when told the news. (=when he was told the news)

He found the coins while digging in his back garden. (=while he was digging in his

back garden)

cling to: to hold someone or something tightly, especially because you do not feel safe

e.g. The little child clung to his mother for comfort.

As he clung to the branch, his mind raced with different possibilities about what he

should do in order to save his life.

cf. He clung to the hope that she would be cured.

All her life my mother clung to the belief that posthumously she and my father

would be reunited.

11. (line 20) … I marvel at how much courage it must have taken for a grown man to

subject himself to such indignity and stress.

— … I am greatly surprised with admiration how courageous my father, an adult, was

to face and endure such shame and diffi culties in life.

marvel at: if you marvel at something, you express your great surprise, wonder, or

admiration

e.g. We paused to marvel at the view.

Her fellow members marveled at her seemingly infi nite energy.

subject to: to make someone or something experience an unpleasant or worrying thing

e.g. The inquiry found that they had been subjected to unfair treatment.

“I didn’t want to subject him to such a long journey,” she said.

He has subjected himself to so much bad publicity so far.

indignity: a state which makes one feel less respected

e.g. The prisoners suffered many indignities.

He suffered insult and indignity in silence.

12. (line 23) He never talked about himself as an object of pity, nor did he show any envy

of the more fortunate or able.

— He never talked about himself as someone who should be pitied and he was not

envious of the more fortunate people or able-bodied people, either.

an object of pity: something or somebody that deserves sympathy

envy: the feeling that you wish you had something that someone else has

e.g. I watched with envy as she set off for the airport.

Gradually he began to acknowledge his feelings of envy towards his mother.

They gazed in a mixture of envy and admiration at the beauty of the statue.

Unit 1-8.indd 187 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 192: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

188

cf. be the envy of somebody: to be something that other people admire and want to

have very much

e.g. an economic expansion that was the envy of many other states.

an education system that is the envy of all European countries

13. (line 24) What he looked for in others was a “good heart”, and if he found one, the

owner was good enough for him.

— He tried to fi nd /discover in other people the kind and honest nature, if he met with

others’ kindness, he would be very grateful.

Here, the phrase “a good heart” refers to the kind, honest and generous nature of a

person. If we say “She has a good heart”, we mean she is a kind person.

14. (line 26) … I believe that is a proper standard by which to judge people…

— …I am convinced that people can be correctly distinguished in terms of whether

or not they have a good heart. /I believe that we can know what a person is like by

fi nding out whether he has a good heart…

judge: to form, give or have as an opinion, or to decide about something or someone,

especially after thinking carefully

e.g. You shouldn’t judge by/on appearances alone.

You should never judge people by their looks.

I am in no position to judge whether what she is doing is right or wrong.

15. (line 28) But I know the times I don’t have one myself.

— But I am aware that sometimes I do not show a kind heart to people (not like my

father).

16. (line 29) Unable to engage in many activities, my father still tried to participate in

some way.

— Although he was not able to take part in many activities, my father still tried to get

involved in some activities in a certain manner.

engage in: to take part in something

e.g. Almost a quarter of the couples had engaged in no activity together with people

from outside the household.

Can undergraduates engage in research activities?

17. (line 30) When a local baseball team found itself without a manager, he kept it going.

— When a local baseball team was in want of a manager, he went to help it.

keep (something) going: if you keep a business, institution, regular event etc. going, you

keep it open or make it continue to happen

e.g. The library costs £5 million a year to run, and the council can’t afford to keep it going.

You seemed to like it, so we kept it going.

18. (line 33) …where he could have a good time just sitting and watching.

— …where he could enjoy himself by just sitting and watching.

19. (line 35) … a fi ght broke out at a beach party, with everyone punching and shoving.

He wasn’t content to sit and watch, but he couldn’t stand unaided on the soft sand. In

Unit 1-8.indd 188 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 193: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 8 Our Parents

189

frustration he began…

— … a fi ght suddenly started and everyone was punching and shoving. He was not

satisfi ed by just sitting and watching, but he could not rise to his feet on the soft

sand without help (because of his disability). In annoyed disappointment, he

began…

Note the structure “with subject + V-ing”:

e.g. The runners started the race with a light following wind.

With prices going up so fast, we can’t afford luxuries.

content: pleased with your situation and not hoping for change or improvement

e.g. They’re content to socialize with a very small circle of people.

He is content to live quietly by himself.

Carla seems pretty much content with her life.

frustration: the feeling of being annoyed, upset, or impatient, because you cannot

control or change a situation, or achieve something

e.g. In spite of his frustrations, he fell in love with the country.

My friend shouted in frustration.

unaided: without help

e.g. She can no longer walk unaided.

Since his accident, he hasn’t been able to walk unaided.

The two explorers attempted an unaided walk across the South Pole

cf. aid: to give support to

e.g. They encouraged and aided him in his scientifi c studies.

At Christmas, many organizations aid the poor.

20. (line 40) Nobody did.

— Nobody sat down and fought with him as he ironically urged them to.

21. (line 40) …people kidded him by saying it was the fi rst time any fi ghter was urged to

take a dive even before the bout began.

— …people joked that it was the fi rst time when participants in a game were asked to

give up even before it started.

kid: 1. to make jokes or say funny things about someone in a friendly way

e.g. We were kidding Mom about being a grandmother.

Uncle Gene always kids me about my long hair.

2. to say something as a joke, often making someone believe something that is not true

e.g. No kidding. (=Is it really true?)

Don’t be serious; I was just kidding.

take a dive: to agree to lose a fi ght or game dishonestly, especially in a boxing match

e.g. Of course we don’t know if Liston took a dive or not and chances are we never will.

22. (line 43) …he participated in some things vicariously through me…

— …he “took part” in some activities through watching me doing them...

vicarious: experienced by the imagination through watching or reading about other

Unit 1-8.indd 189 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 194: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

190

people; experienced for other people

e.g. Mothers often get some vicarious pleasure from their children’s success.

Lots of people use television as their vicarious form of social life.

vicariously: in a vicarious way

e.g. ...a father who lived vicariously through his sons’ success.

23. (line 45) And when I came home on leave, he saw to it that I visited his offi ce.

— And when I came home from the Navy for a holiday, he made sure that I paid a

visit to his offi ce.

on leave: away from your job

e.g. She’s (gone) on leave (= holiday).

I met her while I was on leave.

see (to it) that: make sure that; arrange that

e.g. The babysitter will see (to it) that the children are in bed by nine.

Can you see (to it) that the victims of the fl ood will get relief and assistance in time.

Will you please see to it that the children get a hot meal after their swim?

24. (line 47) Introducing me, he was really saying…

— When he introduced me to others, he meant something like this…

25. (line 49) Those words were never said aloud

— He never shouted out these words.

This sentence indicates that it was perhaps only the author who heard these words.

26. (line 51) …if he sensed my reluctance...

— …if he was aware of my unwillingness to walk with him…

sense: to feel; be aware of

e.g. I could sense the feeling of hostility in the room.

Did he ever sense the danger that night?

27. (line 52) If he did, I am sorry I never told him how sorry I was, how unworthy I was,

how I regretted it.

— If he sensed my reluctance, I felt sorry that I never told him how regret I felt, how

shameful I was, I felt sorry for it.

unworthy: dishonest or morally wrong; not deserving respect, attention etc.

e.g. They judged Paul unworthy.

Baker feels that he is unworthy to receive such a great award.

The plan is unworthy of further consideration.

She said she was unworthy of the honor given to her.

28. (line 53) I think of him when I complain about trifl es, when I am envious of another’s

good fortune…

— I think of him when I express feelings of unhappiness about unimportant things,

when I feel unhappy because I want another person’s good fortune…

trifl es: small things which are not important

e.g. He wastes his time on trifl es.

Unit 1-8.indd 190 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 195: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 8 Our Parents

191

It’s silly to quarrel over trifl es.

be envious of: to want something that someone else has

e.g. I don’t think I’m envious of your success.

She is envious of his abilities to write.

29. (line 56) At such times I put my hand on his arm to regain my balance…

— At such times I gain some inspiration from my father as if I were putting my hand

on his arm so as to get a good heart back…

This sentences indicates that the author often thinks of his father and whenever in

frustration he tries to gain some strength or courage for life from his father.

regain: to get something back which was lost

e.g. She soon regained her strength and was able to walk.

What can I do to regain any of the money I’ve lost?

IV Summary of the Text

When I was growing up, I felt embarrassed to walk with my father, as he was seriously

crippled and very short. It was often difficult for us to coordinate our steps on the way

to the subway to his offi ce, but Father almost never missed a day despite illness or nasty

weather.

Now that I am older, and Father’s gone for years, I think of him often and marvel at his

courage and a good heart when he faced hardship in life.

I now feel sorry for my reluctance during the early walks with my father, and learn

lessons of courage for life from his words: “You set the pace, I will try to adjust to you.”

V Text-related Information

1. Manhattan:

Manhattan (57 sq km) is one of fi ve boroughs of New York City, New York, USA,

coterminous with New York County.

Although its population of 1 537 195 (2000)

is only third largest of the five — after

Brooklyn (2 465 326) and Queens, it is the

cultural and commercial heart of the city. Its

dramatic skyline symbolizes New York City

around the world.

It is composed chiefly of Manhattan

Island, and is bounded by the Hudson River

on the west, New York Bay on the south, the

East River on the east, and the Harlem River

and Spuyten Duyvil Creek on the northeast

Unit 1-8.indd 191 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 196: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

192

and north. Many bridges, tunnels, and ferries link it to the other boroughs and to New

Jersey. A large portion of Manhattan’s workers commute to the borough every day.

Manhattan began as a town built at the tip of the island. It was called New

Amsterdam and served as the capital of the colony of New Netherland during the

Dutch domination. In 1664 the English captured New Netherland and renamed it New

York. The boundary of New York City was first extended beyond Manhattan Island

when some Westchester co. towns were annexed in 1874. In the consolidation of 1898,

Manhattan became one of the fi ve boroughs of New York City.

2. Brooklyn:

Brooklyn occupies a special place in the American imagination. The Brooklyn

Bridge, Coney Island, Fulton’s Ferry, and the Dodgers are just a few of the magical

names associated with the borough’s history, each conjuring up a thousand

unforgettable images depicting the American experience.

It is also the quintessential city of immigrants. One out of every seven Americans

can trace their family roots through the streets of Brooklyn. Today, the borough’s streets

ring with the accents of the newest Americans expressing themselves in Creole, Arabic,

Spanish, Chinese, and Korean. If Brooklyn were still independent, it would be the

fourth most populous city in the United States. Instead, it is best known as the largest

of New York City’s fi ve boroughs — and home to some 2.3 million people.

Text B

Love Can Last Forever

I Introduction

1. Introductory Remarks

Some unusual or memorable moments in our experience will inspire us to a truth

about life. Have you ever experienced such moments when happiness and bitterness

were intertwined? And have you ever thought of learning something from these

experiences? The author of the passage has had such an experience, from which she

learns that love can last forever.

2. Introductory Questions

(Please refer to Exercise 1 in the student book)

Text B

Unit 1-8.indd 192 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 197: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 8 Our Parents

193

II Outline

Para. 1 I was going to have a baby and lose my mother all at the same time.

Paras. 2-- 5

Mother became totally disabled because of her brain tumor.

a. unable to speak, walk, eat or dress on her own

b. lapsed into a deep and hopeless coma

c. was brought home from hospital, waiting for death

Paras. 6-- 17

While my labor at hospital started, my mother opened her eyes.

a. replied my phone calls from hospital

b. sat dressed to welcome the baby

c. spoke to the baby as well as the whole family for two weeks before

quietly slipping into a coma and died

Para. 18I learned a truth about living: while both joy and sorrow are often

intertwined and fl eeting, love can last forever.

III Detailed Study of the Text

1. (line 1) I can honestly say it was the best of times and the worst of times.

— I believe it was both the best and the worst time I have ever experienced.

Here, “it” refers to the event in the following sentence.

2. (line 2) …that my once-energetic, zestful mother was losing her battle with a brain

tumor.

— my mother was losing her battle with a brain tumor before which she was very

energetic and zestful.

energetic: having or involving a lot of energy:

e.g. an energetic young woman

I tried aerobics but it was too energetic for me.

lose one’s battle with: to be defeated by; fail to cure, win, solve or change something

e.g. Children, teenagers and young adults are still losing their battles with this disease.

She battled and fought cancer but hated it when news reports would talk of

someone losing his battle with cancer.

3. (line 3) For ten years, my fi ercely independent and courageous mother had fought…

— My mother had fought (against the brain tumor) for ten years, during which she

was very independent and courageous...

Here, “for ten years” is put before the subject, in order to emphasize the length of the

time.

4. (line 7) I grieved not only for the upcoming loss of my mother, but also that…

— I felt very sad that my mother was dying and I also felt sad that…

grieve: to feel or express great sadness, especially when someone dies

Unit 1-8.indd 193 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 198: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

194

e.g. He is still grieving for/over his wife.

I didn’t have any time to grieve.

5. (line 9) My fear seemed well-founded.

— My worry seemed to be based on good judgment /facts / seems to be reasonable.

well-founded: based on facts or good judgment

e.g. His suggestions are well-founded, but it’s too late to change now.

My suspicions proved to be well-founded.

6. (line 9) A few weeks before my due date, Mother lapsed into a deep coma.

— Several weeks before the expected time of my giving birth to my baby, Mother

became unconscious for quite some time.

due date: the date on which something is supposed to happen

e.g. Fewer than fi ve percent of women have their babies on their due date.

Knowing your baby’s due date can help you monitor its growth and progress and

also help you keep track of laboratory test results.

lapse into: to gradually get into a worse state or condition

e.g. He lapsed into a coma and died two days later.

cf. Alison lapsed into puzzled silence.

Following his death, the Empire lapsed into chaos. His poetry often lapses into

sentimentality.

7. (line 10) Her doctors did not hold any hope; they told us her time was up.

— Her doctors told us that it was not likely for Mother to get better (this time) and her

life seemed to come to an end.

The expression “someone’s time is up” means someone has had all the time allowed.

Here, in the text, it means she was going to die.

8. (line 12) …we insisted on care to keep her comfortable.

— …we kept taking great care to keep her comfortable.

insist on: to demand that something should happen or be done; keep doing something

in spite of opposition;

e.g. We insist on the highest standards of cleanliness in the hotel.

He insisted upon checking everything himself.

Why do you insist on leaving your dirty clothes all over the fl oor?

9. (line 13) I hoped that somehow deep inside, she knew.

— I hoped that she could hear me and understand me in one way or another.

10. (line 15) …my labor started,

Here, “my labor” refers to the process of my giving birth to a baby in hospital.

11. (line 24) …the nurse at her house told me the impossible…

— …the nurse at her house told me that something unbelievable was happening (to

Mother)…

Here, the phrase “the impossible” means something which cannot be expected to

happen or exist.

Unit 1-8.indd 194 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 199: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 8 Our Parents

195

cf. attempt /do /ask the impossible

e.g. I just want to be able to buy healthy food at a reasonable price. Is that asking the

impossible?

She wants a man who is bright, attractive and funny as well, which is asking the

impossible in my opinion.

12. (line 31) Tears of joy blocked my vision…

— I was so joyful with tears in my eyes that I was unable to see clearly…

block: to prevent movement or activity

e.g. The player tried to block his opponent.

Someone is blocking our plan.

vision: eyesight; ability to see

e.g. I’ve had my eyes tested and the report says that my vision is perfect.

After the age of 50, the vision of many people begins to fail.

13. (line 32) …she clucked at him.

Here, the verb “clucked” is an onomatopoeia, imitating a usual sound that people make

when they amuse babies in addition to smiling.

cluck: to express with interest, approval, or disapproval

e.g. The grandma kept clucking at the baby when holding him in her arms.

She clucked her disapproval.

14. (line 33) They stared at each other.

— They looked at each other (as if in wonder or surprise)

15. (line 35) For two miracle weeks, she gave us joy.

— She gave us joy for two weeks, which was really a miracle (for a dying patient of

brain tumor)

miracle: a wonderful surprising unexpected event; a very lucky happening

e.g. It was a miracle that she was not killed in the accident.

It’ll be a miracle if we get to the airport in time.

The teacher told the lazy careless pupil that it’d be a miracle if he passed the exam.

16. (line 37) …was fi nally free of the pain and confi nes of a body that no longer did her

will.

— …was relieved of the suffering/ no longer suffered the pains, with her soul leaving

her body that had caused the pain and done her harm.

confi nes: limits, borders

e.g. within the confi nes of one country

This is outside the confi nes of human knowledge.

17. (line 40) For while both joy and sorrow are fl eeting, and often intertwined, love has

the power to overcome both.

— For although both joy and sorrow may coincide in life and remain impressive for a

short time, what makes us feel lasting is the strength of love that will live with us

for ever.

Unit 1-8.indd 195 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 200: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

196

fl eeting: short, passing quickly

e.g. a fl eeting look

the fl eeting hours

Youth is so fl eeting.

IV Summary of the Text

While expecting to give birth to her baby, the author grieved for the upcoming loss

of her mother, who had fought with her brain cancer for ten years. She now lapsed into a

deep and hopeless coma, and doctors suggested taking her mother home from hospital. The

author then kept talking to her about the upcoming baby. When the author’s due date came

at hospital, her mother opened her eyes at home. She even sat up, held and clucked at the

baby when it was brought home. Her mother remained in this miraculous state until two

weeks later when she slipped into a coma again and died. From this experience, the author

sees the power of love that seems to prolong her sick mother’s life.

Skills

Translation Skills

本单元的英译汉技能练习的重点是省略译。在把英语翻译成汉语的过程中,英语中有些词在译

文中可以省略,不必翻译出来,因为译文中虽然没有这些词,但是已经具有了原文这些词所表达的

意思,或者这些词在译文中的意义是不言而喻的。省略的目的在于使译文更加通顺流畅,更符合译

文习惯。但需要注意的是,省略并不是把原文的某些思想内容删去,省略不能改变原文的意义。下

面是一些例子:

1. The horse is a useful animal. 马是有用的动物。(省略冠词the,a)

2. Smoking is prohibited in public places. 公共场所不准吸烟。(省略介词in)

3. I can do it, and so can you. 我能做,你也能做。(省略并列连词and)

4. If winter comes, can spring be far behind? 冬天来了,春天还会远吗?(省略连词if)

5. Liquids have no defi nite shape, yet they have a defi nite volume. 液体没有一定的形状。(省

略人称代词they)

6. He shrugged his shoulders, shook his head, cast up his eyes, but said nothing. 他耸耸肩,

摇摇头,两眼看天,一句话不说。(省略物主代词his)

7. A square has four equal sides. 正方形四边相等。(省略冠词a和动词have)

8. In winter, it is much colder in the North than it is in the South. 冬天,北方比南方冷得多。

(省略介词和非人称代词in,it)

Skills

Unit 1-8.indd 196 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 201: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 8 Our Parents

197

9. University applicants who had worked at a job would receive preference over those who

had not. 报考大学的人,有工作经验的优先录取。(比较:报考大学的人,有工作经验的,比没有

工作经验的,优先录取。)

10. There was no snow, the leaves were gone from the trees, the grass was dead. 没有下雪,

但叶落草枯。(比较:没有下雪,树叶从树上落下来,草也枯萎了。)

归纳起来,从语法的角度,可以省略代词、连接词、冠词、动词、介词等,如上面的第1到第8

句。从修辞角度看,英语句子有些短语重复出现,或者具有相同意义的词重复出现,英译汉时可按

情况作适当省略,如第9句。另外从汉语行文习惯的角度,译文中可以省略一些可有可无的词,不然

显得有些累赘,如第10句。

Guided Writing

本单元的基础训练部分仍然是写主题句,说明可参考前两个单元。

本单元的实用英语写作部分是要求学生根据所提供的信息写一份公司搬迁通知,学生用书中提

供了一个例子。

通知是上级对下级、组织对成员或平行单位之间部署工作、传达事情或召开会议等所使用的应

用文。通知的写法有两种,一种是以布告形式贴出,把事情通知有关人员,如学生、观众等,通常

不用称呼,一般由标题、正文、落款(或时间)三部分组成。有的用NOTICE作标题,写在正文上方

正中部位。另一种是以书信的形式,发给有关人员,此种通知写作形式同普通书信,只要写明通知

的具体内容即可。通知要求言简意赅、措辞得当、时间及时。

下面的几份通知供你教学中参考:

NOTICEAll teachers and students are requested to meet in the department conference room on

Tuesday (May 16) at 2:30 p.m. to hear a report on Computer Assisted Language Learning.The English Department Offi ce

LectureBy

Professor X (Name)From

Peking University On

(Topic)At Room 205, Classroom Building 2

2: 00 p.m., Friday, June 6, 2014

Unit 1-8.indd 197 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 202: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

198

Service AdjustmentBus Route No. 744 Temporary Bus Stop Relocation in Paterson Effective Date: May 19, 2013Effective immediately, Bus Route No. 744 will temporarily stop providing service to the

eastbound bus stop on Presidential Boulevard, at the near side of Main Street in Paterson to accommodate construction. This bus stop has been temporarily relocated to eastbound Presidential Boulevard, at the far side of Main Street in Paterson until further notice.

If you have any questions about this temporary bus stop relocation, please contact NJ TRANSIT at 1 (800) 772-2222.

Temporary Bus Stop RelocationScottsdale and Camelback RoadsALL INFORMATION IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICEWhere: Scottsdale and Camelback Roads ― SCOTTSDALEWhen: Effective until further noticeDue to construction for the Waterfront project, the bus stop on the southwest corner of

Scottsdale and Camelback roads will be demolished. The bus stop will be temporarily relo-cated 100 feet south of its current location and may not be ADA accessible during this time.

The Waterfront project will be under construction indefi nitely. Passengers can expect occasional delays in service that may affect arrival times and transfers to other routes.

For up-to-the-minute information call Valley Metro at (602) 253-5000, TTY at (602) 261-8208.

Reading Skills — Reading for Details (6):

Understanding Process

Process analysis either explains how to do something so you can do it or explains

how something works so you can understand it. Both types of process analysis explain by

presenting the steps involved in the process.

So when you are reading a process analysis paragraph, ask yourself how the process is

presented, and what essential steps there are. The steps are very often arranged in a logical

order (usually in time order): what should be done fi rst, second, next, and so on.

When you read about a process analysis, it is important to understand time

relationship. One sentence often has two actions which take place at the same time or at

different times. Writers generally use an adverb of time to show that the actions happened

at the same time or explain the order of the actions.

Unit 1-8.indd 198 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 203: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 8 Our Parents

199

Signal words for classifi cation:

fi rst, second, to begin, after that, afterward, at that time, later, next, then, fi nally, at

last, meanwhile, in the fi rst stage, your next step

step one, step two,… phase one, phase two…

prior to, during, at the same time, before, when, after

Key to the Exercises

Text A

First Reading

Exercise 1

1. A 2. C 3. C 4. D 5. B

While Reading

1. He almost never missed a day, and would make it to the offi ce even if others could not. By

doing so, he had his feelings of his own worth and he thought he deserved to be respected

by other people.

2. Having a “good heart” is the proper standard to judge people by.

Second Reading

Exercise 2

1. F 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T

Exercise 3

My FatherWhen I was growing up, I was embarrassed to be seen with my father. As we started out, my father always said, “You set the pace. I will try to adjust to you.” My father almost never missed a day. He never talked about himself as an object of pity,

nor did he show any envy of the more fortunate or able. What my father looked for in others was a “good heart”.My father tried to participate in some way: he kept local baseball team going; he was a knowledgeable baseball fan;

Key to the ExercisesKey to the Exercises

Unit 1-8.indd 199 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 204: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

200

he often took me to watch the local teams play; and he liked to go to dances and parties.I now know he participated in some things vicariously through me. I often think of him: I think of him when I complain about trifl es, when I am envious of another’s good fortune, when I don’t have a “good heart”.

Oral Practice

Exercise 4

(For reference.)

When I was growing up, I didn’t want to be seen with my severely crippled, very short

father. When we would walk together, his hand on my arm for balance, people would stare.

It was diffi cult to coordinate our steps and because of that, we didn’t say much as we went

along. He always asked me to set the pace and he tried adjust to me.

My father never talked about himself as an object of pity, nor did he show any envy of the

more fortunate or able. What he looked for in others was a “good heart”, and if he found one,

the owner was good enough for him.

He has been gone many years now, but I think of him often. I think of him when I

complain about trifl es, when I am envious of another’s good fortune, when I don’t have a “good

heart”.

Vocabulary and Structure

Exercise 5

1. content 2. reluctance 3. engage 4. regain 5. balance

6. urging 7. bothered 8. judge 9. indignity 10. despite

Exercise 6

1. on leave 2. broke out 3. was envious of 4. took a dive 5. see to it that

6. let on 7. subject… to 8. clung to 9. engage in 10. marveled at

Exercise 7

1. on 2. along 3. to 4. at 5. in

6. on 7. of 8. out 9. On 10. to

Exercise 8

EXPRESSIONS pace balance standard

keep with (a growing population)★

Unit 1-8.indd 200 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 205: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 8 Our Parents

201

1. gathering pace /increasing its pace 2. lose her balance

3. meet the safety standards 4. strike/keep a balance between

5. keep pace 6. set the pace /standards, setting the pace /standards

7. improve living standards 8. his balance

Exercise 9

1. pace 2. speed 3. judge 4. think of

5. opportunity 6. occasion 7. really 8. Indeed

Exercise 10

1. In most cases I just sat by the river playing my guitar with my children singing around.

2. Shortly after I walked inside, a woman came in with a man following closely behind.

3. He shook his head with his eyes looking at the fl oor.

4. Mother seated on a rock with her children playing cards under the tree.

5. He stood there talking with other teachers with his kids playing nearby.

Exercise 11

1. Once inside the room, he closed the door behind him.

2. He wrote his fi rst science papers while working in the patent offi ce in Bern, Switzerland.

3. When telephoning a foreign number, you should fi rst dial 8, wait for the tone, then 10 plus

your country code and area code.

4. Once finished, the show can then be played on your computer, or transferred to your

music player.

5. Although in poor health, she continued to carry out her duties.

EXPRESSIONS pace balance standard

keep a between (work and play) ★

lose one’s (and fall) ★

set the (for us) ★ ★

(reforms have recently) gathered ★

set high (for teachers) ★

meet safety ★

improve living ★

increase one’s ★

regain one’s ★

strike a ★

(续表)

Unit 1-8.indd 201 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 206: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

202

Translation Practice

Exercise 12

1. 本能行为是(一种)动物生来就有的(一种)行为模式。

2. 我们(在自己)内心感到我们的做事方式是唯一正确的(做事方式)。

3. (当)我现在想起(这些),我惊叹一个成年男子要经受住这种难堪和压力得需要多么大的勇

气啊!

4. 他不但来晚了,而且(他)还忘了带(他的)书。

5. 他今天身体不好,但(他)还是来上课了。

6. (如果)你明天不去,他们会生气的。

7. 母亲坐了起来,(她的)氧气管拿掉了。

8. 他从不说自己可怜,(他)也从不嫉妒那些比自己幸运或身体健康的人。

Exercise 13

1. Once they (are) in bed, these children usually fall into sleep very quickly.

2. They clung to one another for balance.

3. I went out despite the rain.

4. This is an important meeting. Please see to it that you are not late for it.

5. He never talked about himself as an object of pity, nor did he show any envy of the more

fortunate.

Writing Practice

Exercise 14

1. There are ways to get the information about voluntary activities. /People who want to be

volunteers have many ways to fi nd the information about voluntary activities.

2. People looking for a job should use several different methods to track one down.

3. The benefi ts /importance of reading cannot be overemphasized. /Reading is important at

least in several ways. /Reading is benefi cial to us in several ways.

4. Knowing a foreign language gives students a lot of advantages.

5. Taking care of a large family requires a great deal of effort.

6. There are both advantages and disadvantages of working part-time while you are studying

at college. /It has both advantages and disadvantages to work part-time while you are

studying at college.

Exercise 15

May 15, 2016

Relocation Notice

We are pleased to inform you that ABC (NANHAI) BICYCLE COMPONENTS CO., LTD.

will move to a new offi ce with effect on June 1, 2014. Please note our new contacts below:

Unit 1-8.indd 202 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 207: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 8 Our Parents

203

New Address:

Room 1701—1703, No. 137 Wuxi Road, Hongxing Tower, Nanhai 528200, China

New Tel: 86-757-52061212

New Fax: 86-757-52062797

Our email addresses remain unchanged.

We will always provide the quality product and the good service for you, and hope to

get your vigorously support.

Best Regards,

ABC (NANHAI) BICYCLE COMPONENTS CO., LTD.

Dictation

Exercise 16

1. an unhappy one 2. value

3. opinions 4. communicate with

5. what’s going on 6. in the dark

7. share your thoughts 8. seek their advice

9. closeness 10. you don’t lie

Text B

First Reading

Exercise 1

1. Because it was the time she was joyfully expecting her fi rst child, and at the same time her

mother was losing her battle against a brain tumor.

2. Because a few weeks before her due date, her mother lapsed into a deep coma. The doctors

did not hold any hope and told them she was dying.

3. “Yes! Yes! I know!”

Second Reading

Exercise 2

1. She had fought against a brain cancer.

2. She feared that her mother and her child would never meet, as her mother grew closer and

closer to death and her baby grew closer and closer to life inside her.

3. She lapsed into a deep coma, and the doctors said her time was up.

Unit 1-8.indd 203 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 208: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

204

4. The author kept talking to her mother about the baby moving inside her. She hoped her

mother could understand it in some way.

5. Because she was told that her mother opened her eyes.

6. First she got a one-word reply “Yes” from her mother before her labor at hospital; after the

labor she heard her mother say four words “Yes! Yes! I know!” on the phone.

7. Her mom was looking better, sitting in her chair, dressed and ready to welcome him. This

lasted for two weeks.

8. For while both joy and sorrow are fl eeting, and often intertwined, love has the power to

overcome both. And love can last forever.

Reading Skills

Exercise 3

1. To study the effect of emotions on memory.

2. 4.

3. First, next, then, later.

4. 3, 1, 4, 2

Exercise 4

Topic: Time management

Topic sentences: Managing one’s time is easy if one follows these important steps for

developing weekly time planners.

Step one: Make a list of all academic assignments and the social activities.

Step two: Prioritize the list.

Step three: Break each task into smaller parts.

Step four: Estimate how much time it will take to complete each task.

Step fi ve: Set aside time in one’s schedule to complete each task.

Step six: Monitor or evaluate how well one sticks to the time management planner.

Signal words used for the steps: fi rst, then, the third step, the next step, step fi ve, the last step

Vocabulary Practice

Exercise 5

1. upcoming 2. vision 3. miracle 4. intertwined 5. energetic

6. memory 7. sorrow 8. courageous 9. grieved 10. awakened

Exercise 6

1. insisted on 2. grieve for 3. stare at

4. lost the battle with 5. none of 6. At the same time

7. hold… hope 8. lapsed into

9. no longer 10. is free of

Unit 1-8.indd 204 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 209: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 8 Our Parents

205

Expanding Your Vocabulary

Exercise 7

1. willingness 2. bitterness 3. understandable 4. knowledgeable 5. nervousness

6. acceptable 7. consciousness 8. awareness 9. drinkable 10. readable

Exercise 8

1. complain 2. frustrated 3. as 4. a list of 5. If

6. Also 7. completed 8. responsible 9. reminding 10. surprised

参考译文

Text A

我的父亲

在我成长的过程中,我一直羞于让别人看见我和父亲在一起。我的父亲腿瘸得十分厉害,个子

又矮。当我们在一起走路时,他的手总搭在我的臂上以保持身体平衡,人们总是盯着看。对于这种

讨厌的注视,我打心眼里感到不安。可即使他注意到了这些,或感到不安,他也从不表露出来。

走路时,我们难以保持一致——他常常停下脚步,而我的步子却显得很不耐烦,所以一路上我

们很少交谈。但是每次出行前,他总是说,“你走你的,我想法儿跟上你”。

我们常常往返于从家到他上班乘坐的地铁站的那段路上。哪怕生病,天气恶劣,他也要上班。

他几乎从未误过一天工,总是准点到办公室,即使别人做不到。他为此引以自傲!

每当冰雪覆盖大地时,就算有人帮助,他也难以行走。每当此时,我或我的姐妹们就用儿童雪

橇拉他穿过纽约布鲁克林区的街道,一直送他到地铁的入口处。一旦到了那儿,他便抓住扶手一直

走到底下的台阶时才放开手,因为那里通道的空气暖和些,下面几级台阶没有结冰。曼哈顿的地铁

站就在他办公楼的地下一层,他无须再走出楼来。在他下班回家的路上,我们会在布鲁克林接他。

如今每当我想起这些,我会惊叹一个成年男子要经受住这种难堪和压力得需要多么大的勇气

啊!我叹服他竟然能够不带任何痛苦,没有丝毫抱怨地做到这一点。

他从不说自己可怜,也从不嫉妒那些比他幸运的人或身体健康的人。他只从别人那儿所寻找一

颗“善良的心”,要是找到了,那个人在他心目中就是一个大好人。

如今我已经长大成人,我明白了“善良的心”是评价人的恰当标准,尽管我仍不很清楚它的确

切含义,但是我却知道我有时候缺乏善心。

虽然父亲不能参加许多活动,但他仍然设法以某种方式参与。当一个地方棒球队发现缺少一个

经理时,是他使得球队正常运转。他是一个见多识广的棒球迷,他过去常带我观看当地球队比赛。

他喜欢参加舞会和晚会,即使是只能坐着观看他也能享受一番乐趣。

记得有一次沙滩聚会上发生了一场打架,大家挥拳舞臂,推推搡搡。他不甘于坐在那里当观

众,可又无法在松软的沙滩上自己站起来。于是,失望之下,他吼了起来:“谁来坐下和我打?”

没有人响应。但是第二天,人们跟他开玩笑说,比赛还没开始,就劝拳击手认输,这还是头一

次看见。

Unit 1-8.indd 205 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 210: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Teacher’s Manual

206

现在我知道他是通过我,他唯一的儿子,间接参与一些事情。当我打球时(尽管我球技很糟糕),

他也在“打球”,我参加了海军,他也“参军”了。当我休假回家,他一定要让我去他的办公室。在介绍

我时,他真真切切地说过,“这是我儿子,但也是我自己,假如事情不是这样的话,我也会和他一样

的”,尽管这些话他从不大声说。

父亲离开我们已经很多年了,但是我时常想起他。我不知道他是否意识到我曾经不愿意让人看

到我和他走在一起。假如他知道这一切,我现在感到很歉疚,因为我从没告诉过他自己是多么愧

疚、多么不孝、多么悔恨。每当我为一些琐事而抱怨时,为别人的好运而妒忌时,在我自己缺乏那

颗“善良的心”时,我就会想起我的父亲。

此时,我会把自己的手搭在他的臂上,重新保持身体平衡,并且说,“你走你的,我想法儿跟

上你。”

Text B

爱可以永恒

我可以坦白地说,这是段最美好的时光也是最悲哀的时光。我高兴地期待着我第一个孩子的出

生,与此同时,我那曾经精力充沛,充满热情的母亲正在与脑肿瘤的抗争中逐渐失去战斗力。

十年来,我那极其独立,无比勇敢的母亲努力与病魔斗争,但所有的手术和治疗都未成功。尽

管如此,她从来没有丧失微笑的能力。而现在,年仅55岁的她终于完全丧失了生活能力——不能说

话,不能行走,不能自己吃饭穿衣。

正当她一步步走向死神时,我的孩子正在我的身体里一步步走向生命。我最大的担心是他们俩

的生命轨迹无法在这个世上交汇。我很忧伤,不仅因为快要失去母亲,而且因为她和我的孩子可能

会互不相识。

我的担心是有道理的。临产期前几周,母亲陷入一阵深度昏厥。她的医生们已经对她不抱任何

希望了,并告诉我们她的大限已至。不必再插食管了,他们说,她不会再醒来了。

我们把母亲带回家,让她躺在了家里她自己的床上,我们坚持细心照料,要让她舒适些。而我

则尽可能坐到她身边去,对她述说在我肚子里蠕动的胎儿。我希望, 在内心深处,她都知道。

2007年2月3日,几乎就在我开始分娩时,母亲睁开了眼睛。当他们在医院告诉我这些时,我往

家给她打电话,要求把电话接到她耳边。

“妈,妈,听,孩子要出生了!您快要有新外孙儿了。您知道吗?”

“是的。”

多么神奇的话!这是几个月来她能清楚说出的第一个词。

一小时后当我再次打电话,她屋里的护士告诉了我这不可思议的一切:母亲坐了起来,氧气管

拿掉了。她笑了。

“妈,是个男孩!您有个新外孙了!”

“是的,是的,我,知道!”

四个单词,四个美妙的词语!

当我把雅各布带回家时,母亲坐在她的椅子上,穿得好好的,准备好迎接他。当我把儿子放到

她手臂上,她“咯咯”地逗他时,高兴的泪水模糊了我的视线。他们俩互相注视着。

Unit 1-8.indd 206 16/3/24 上午9:20

Page 211: Ø{IeY ²QúrHy> - cflo.com.cn · 排了较为传统的词语练习,即用课文中所出现的词语的正确形式填空,主要是为了检验学生是否学 会和掌握了课文中出现的一些重点词语,通过在新语镜下使用这些词语,帮助学生加深理解和提高

高等教育出版社

Unit 8 Our Parents

207

他们认识了。

这样又过了两周,母亲“咯咯”逗他,微笑着,抱着雅各布。这两周,她对着我父亲、她的孩

子及孙辈们说着完整的话。这样奇迹般的两周,她给了我们欢乐。

然后,她安静地再次陷入昏迷,并在她所有的孩子都来看望她后,最终完全脱离了她的痛苦,

永远摆脱了病体的羁绊。

儿子诞生时的回忆,对于我永远都是既快乐又悲伤的,但就是在那时我悟到了一则重要的生活

道理:快乐和忧伤虽会转瞬即逝且时常相互交织,但爱的力量可以跨越快乐和悲伤。爱可以永恒。

Unit 1-8.indd 207 16/3/24 上午9:20


Recommended